Home

Avaya BCM Programming Operations Guide

Contents

1. Programming level Programming Setting Notes option Terminals amp Sets Forward Fwd to lt DN gt Capabilities no answer Fwd delay lt no of rings gt Forward on busy Y Do Not Disturb N on Busy Handsfree N Handsfree None answerback Pickup group lt group A portable can be part of a pickup group and number gt answers calls ringing at telephones in the same group when the user enters 76 Paging Y Page zone 1 Direct Dial Set 1 A portable cannot be a Direct Dial telephone It can use the Direct Dial digit Hotline None Priority call Y Requires special configuration of hardware and programming Terminals amp Sets Set lock Y Does not apply to portables Restrictions Set Allow last no Y Does not apply to portables restrictions Allow savedno Y Does not apply to portables Allow link YorN This can be set to N for portables Directed Call Pickup You must turn on the Directed Call pickup feature for the system before a user can use the feature For more information see Capabilities on page 86 Group Pickup Group Pickup allows the portable user to answer a call ringing on another set in the same pickup group Enterprise Edge programming allows you to place all telephones including portable telephones into pickup groups See Capabilities on page 86 for more information about Group pickup Wireless Call Forward No Answer This stops the Companion portable from ringing whe
2. On the Configuration menu click Change DN Enter the DN you want to change old DN Then enter the new DN Click Change DNs and Save Changing the starting DN number You can change the starting number for your telephone directory numbers DNs This is helpful when your system is part of a network and you want to use a uniform series of directory numbers for all telephones in your network 1 Enter the new directory number you want as the starting DN The new range of DN numbers will be displayed The length of the new DN can be from three to seven digits on all systems Feature settings Feature settings allows you to program a number of features that are not associated with an individual telephone set These settings apply to all telephones connected to the Enterprise Edge system To configure feature settings 1 Choose Resources Telephony General settings Feature settings Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 137 Configure feature settings according to the table Attribute Description Background music Allows you to listen to music through your telephone speaker A music source must be connected to Enterprise Edge Values Y or N Default N On hold Allows you to choose what a caller hears on an external line when the line has been put on hold Tones provides a periodic tone Music provides any signal from a source such as
3. Disable the port connected to the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 using the procedure Disable a device on page 256 Enable the port connected to the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 using the procedure Enable a device on page 257 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 292 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system Problems with the auxiliary ringer l If the auxiliary ringer is used for Schedules Night Evening or Lunch service ensure that Schedules is activated from the control telephone Check the wiring between the auxiliary ringer generator and the ringing device Refer to the auxiliary ringer wiring chart Check the following wiring between the auxiliary ringer generator and the distribution block Feature Pin Auxiliary ring Make 44 Yellow Brown Auxiliary ring Common 19 Brown Yellow Ensure that the auxiliary ringer contacts are operating properly by checking with an ohmmeter across the auxiliary ringer pin contacts listed above Check that the auxiliary ringer pin contacts are programmed to operate in conjunction with any or all of the features in the auxiliary ringer programming chart Feature Programmed in Auxiliary ringer Terminals amp Sets Auxiliary ringer Lines Schedules Services The current capacity of the Enterprise Edge relay contacts is 50 mA DC They are designed to operate with the auxiliary ringer generator or equival
4. Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete a manager 1 2 3 In the Manager table click the manager you want to delete On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete Manager A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager To add a trap community to the Trap Community List l 6 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Trap Community The Trap Community List dialog box appears In the Trap List box type the trap list In the Community Name box type the community name Scroll to see the Manager IP Address box In the Manager IP Address box type an IP Address for a manager station that is a member of this trap community Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To modify a trap community l 2 In the Trap Community table click the trap community you want to modify On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Trap Community The Trap Community List dialog box appears Click any box that requires modification and type the necessary changes Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 206 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services To delete a trap community 1 Inthe Trap Community table click the trap community you want to delete 2 On the menu click Configuration and then c
5. Lets users to define the number in kbits of bits the router transmits over a specified time interval if congestion is present Usually this value is set for 1 4 the value of the CIR Enterprise Edge uses one second intervals to measure this parameter P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 72 Configuring networking resources Column Description Excess Burst Be Combined with the committed burst rate lets users set in kbits the maximum number of bits the router transmits over a specified time interval if there is no congestion Both Be and bC must be less than or equal to the line speed To add PVC congestion control 1 6 7 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add PVC Congestion Control The PVC Congestion Control dialog box appears If an entry range has not been selected an error message appears In the Entry CC box type the entry CCxx where xx is a unique integer In the DLCI box type the DLCI In the CIR kbps box type the CIR in kbps In the Committed Burst BC kbits box type the committed burst in kbits In the Excess Burst BE kbits box type the excess burst in kbits Click the Save button to save the entries and return to Unified Manager To modify PVC congestion control l 2 Click an entry in the PVC Congestion Control range On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify PVC Congestion Control The
6. P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 288 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Module port status Disable the module using the procedure Disable a module on page 254 2 Enable the module using the procedure Enable a module on page 255 Follow the procedures in the Basic troubleshooting procedure on page 282 before proceeding Auto answer line rings ata telephone Possible problem You configured a loop start trunk as auto answer but the installed hardware does not support disconnect supervision In this case the symptom would be accompanied by the Alarm 62 code symptom Solution Reconfigure the trunk as manual answer Possible problem The line is configured as auto answer and unsupervised Solution Reconfigure the line as manual answer or reconfigure the line as supervised 1 Choose Resources Telephony Lines 2 Select the affected line 3 Select Trunk line data 4 Inthe Trunk mode field reconfigure the line as supervised by selecting Super from the drop down menu OR In the Auto answer field reconfigure the line as manual answer by selecting Manual form the drop down menu Possible problem The line is not equipped for disconnect supervision at the central office Solution Reconfigure the trunk as manual answer 1 Choose Resources Telephony Lines Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide
7. beside each heading indicates that the heading can be expanded to show additional headings in the right pane To make the additional headings appear double click the item or just click on the icon itself As you select various headings in the navigation tree the heading changes color and the Unified Manager displays the appropriate information panel view The information panel can contain configuration windows or dialog boxes indicating the appropriate action and system messages or warnings For more detailed information on the Unified Manager refer to e Using the configuration windows on page 28 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 28 Enterprise Edge Overview e Changing the Unified Manager s appearance on page 28 e Changing data views in the Unified Manager on page 29 Using the configuration windows The configuration windows are used to configure Enterprise Edge settings The configuration windows always contain a window identifier Some fields use edit in place formats to allow you to configure settings in the fields opposite each field name Each time you tab to the next field the previous field s values are saved Some fields use drop down menus to provide you with valid entries for each field If a value is invalid an error message appears to alert you of the error The dialog box format allows you to enter text in fields and save the settings by selecting Save or by simply moving t
8. 166 Configuring Telephony Resources Companion The Companion heading allows you to assign portable telephones to the system check Base Station parameters and enable and disable registration through programming The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Companion programming map Companion 9 Registration Registration enabled Credits available 9 Portable DNs DN xxx DN status 9 Radio data System LID Re evaluation Status 9 Radios Radio xxxx Radio Cell assignment Antenna type ells 9 Cell 01 Cell radios Cell neighbors Cell radio neighbors 9 O Note Enterprise Edge Companion Wireless requires a software keycode for activation Registration Software Keys are required to activate wireless capabilities To take advantage of the wireless capabilities available to your Enterprise Edge system you must first enable a certain number of portable credits using Software Keys You must enable registration for the entire Enterprise Edge system to allow registration of individual portables To enable user registration 1 Select Telephony Companion 2 Click Registration Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 167 3 Select a Registration enabled option Y Yes or N No Registration should normally be disabled For security reasons and to prevent unauthorized users from being registered to your s
9. A feature that lets an off site technician with a PC call in and troubleshoot your system through the built in modem Remote paging This feature allows remote users to use the system paging feature Access to this feature is governed by the Class of Service for the call See Remote Access and Class of Service Remote restriction A restriction filter applied to a line in order to control which digits can be dialed during an incoming remote access call It is the equivalent of a set filter for a remote user Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 381 remote user Someone who calls into an Enterprise Edge system from a telephone outside that system and uses system features or lines See Remote Access Restriction filter Through a combination of restrictions and overrides restriction filters prevent certain telephone numbers or feature codes from being dialed Restriction filters can be applied to lines sets specific lines on a set and to Class of Service passwords Restriction service A Services section that allows you to assign alternate dialing filters to lines telephones lines on a particular telephone and alternate remote filters to lines at specified times of the day and on specified days restrictions One component of a Dialing filter Restrictions are numbers you cannot dial when that dialing filter is in effect See Exceptions Ring Again A feature that can be used
10. Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 197 The LAN Filter and Static Route attributes are Attribute Description Input filter Specifies the filter name and identifies an individual input filter on the specified interface Its value must follow certain conventions It must have the prefix IF followed by a unique number that identifies the input filter on the interface For example IF2 is a valid value While adding specify non recurring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing filter name it modifies the existing filter Using non sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers While modifying a filter you can t change the name The filter name does not have any significance other than to identify an entry Output filter Specifies the filter name and uniquely identifies an individual output filter on the specified interface Its value must follow certain conventions It must have the prefix OF followed by a unique number that identifies the input filter on the interface For example OF2 is a valid value While adding specify non recutring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing filter name it modifies the existing filter Using non sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers While modifying a filter you can t change the name The f
11. Heading Parameter Setting Trunk Line Data Received 4321 for Line 241 Line 061 T1 DID Rec d length Received length 4 digits can be from 2 to 7 digits but must match number of digits sent by central office Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to a private network A manager in Georgia wants to use the tie lines at headquarters to call Washington He dials a telephone number 555 5321 that maps onto the DISA DN enters a Class of Service COS password then dials a line pool access code to select a tie line to Washington Manager in Georgia DID DID and T1 E amp M DTM T1 E amp M linepool to Washington Central Office Enterprise Edge P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 332 Appendix A Network Examples Hardware Enterprise Edge an EE DTM with one T1 DID line and three T1 E amp M lines Heading Parameter Setting Incoming trunk Trunk Line Data Line 061 T1 DID Access codes DISA DN 5321 Rec d length Rec d length 4 digits can be from 2 to 7 digits but must match number of digits sent by central office Outgoing trunk Trunk Line Data Line 062 Tl E amp M Line type Pool F Access codes Line pool F 6 up to 4 digits COS pswds Define restrictions Define remote access pkgs Assign a restriction filter to the line Assign COS passwords and filters for each Class of Service Call Enterpr
12. field is like gt Rxx where xx is a number If you are adding a new filter make sure that Filter F field looks like Fxx where xx is a number This is an invalid data value There was an error in setting port range Reason You are setting a port range value and the upper and lower limits are not correct or missing Each range should begin with a positive even number and must end with a number greater than the beginning number and must be an odd number Further the range values should be less than 65535 64K This is an error in data size There was an error in setting port range Reason You are setting a port range that is too big At present only 256 ports can be set in the port range table Consult chapter 3 for a discussion on port ranges in QoS You may not need that big a range Reduce it to be under 256 ports in the range Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 247 9 4 2 This is an invalid configuration parameter There was an error in setting data Reason This error can happen when you are setting a community string entry manager entry or a trap community entry Each entry uses a characteristic key string as its field name Use Cxx for community strings gt Mxx for manager entries and Txx for trap community entries Use appropriate key strings in the dialog boxes as suggested in their labels
13. system uses External lines recognize S the long distance access Route 001 and Line Pool A code and switch to the appropriate carrier 10222 1 601 555 2222 Dialout programming tells Routing tables 1 601 555 2222 the system to add the absorb 9 access code for long distance e g 10222 Programming for least cost routing It may be cheaper to use another long distance carrier at another time of day Continuing with the example used in the previous flowchart the lines that supply local service in normal mode will also be used for long distance service after 6 p m because that is when rates become competitive For the system to do this automatically another route has to be built 1 Choose Route 007 or any other available route at Route 2 Choose No number for the dial out 3 Choose Line pool A local service carrier lines In this case the change in route uses the start and stop times for Night Schedule the schedule for different modes are set up under Services 1 Enter 91 at Destination Code 2 Make sure AbsorbLength is set at 1 3 The route programmed with the access code as its dial out Route 001 remains as the route used by Normal 4 Under Night route select Route 007 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 123 Calls that begin with the digits 91 will now travel out without using the access code when the Night schedule comes into us
14. 3 Click Name 4 Type a name up to seven characters and press Enter Note The name may be a combination of letters and numbers User preferences Any programming that can be done by users at their telephones can also be done in the Unified Manager The default settings are given in bold If the attached set is not an Enterprise Edge set these options are not available Setting Description Model Allows you to pre program the model of Enterprise Edge set which will use this DN M7310 The model cannot be changed if the set is already attached Button programming Lets you program the buttons with internal and external autodialers and or programmed feature keys User speed dial Programs user speed dialers No defaults Call log options Select whether the set will Log all calls No autologging No one answered or Unanswered by me Dialing options Select Standard dial Pre dial or Automatic dial Language Choose the display language English French or Spanish Display contrast Adjust the contrast of the display 1 2 3 4 5 9 Ring type Select a ring type 1 2 3 4 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 91 Restrictions Restrictions prevent a user from making certain kinds of calls from a telephone or from lines that are available at the telephone It also restricts some features When you are finished programming restriction s
15. 6 Press the Tab key to save the changes 7 Clicking the System navigation key to close the navigation tree Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring networking resources 5 The following shows the programming map for networking resources Resources Q Configuring LAN settings LAN1 WAN2 WAN3 WAN4 Msc Telephony Q Configuring WAN settings WAN1 Configure your networking resources using the information in e Viewing Enterprise Edge resources on page 63 e Configuring LAN settings on page 64 e Configuring WAN settings on page 66 Note This chapter provides information on configuring LAN and WAN interfaces For information on configuring MSC and Telephone refer to Configuring Telephony Resources on page 77 Viewing Enterprise Edge resources To view the Unified Manager Resources screen 1 On the menu click Group and then click Resources or Comprehensive 2 On the navigation tree click Enterprise Edge and then click Resources The available Enterprise Edge resources appear in table format The table lists the name operating status software version and description of each available resource Column Definition Name The name column lists the available configurable resources Status The status column lists the operating status of each configurable resource Version The version column lists the software version of each configurable
16. Configuring Telephony Resources 127 Schedule Start time Stop time Schedule 1 Night 23 00 07 00 Schedule 2 Evening 17 00 23 00 Schedule 3 Lunch 12 00 13 00 Schedule 4 Schedule 4 00 00 00 00 Schedule 5 Schedule 5 00 00 00 00 Schedule 6 Schedule 6 00 00 00 00 Tips It is only necessary to program start and stop times for schedules that are activated automatically See the instructions with Ringing service for information on activating schedules The time may be entered in either 12 or 24 hour format If the display is in English and the hour entered is less than thirteen the display prompts you to specify AM or PM If you assign identical start and stop times for a schedule for example 04 00 start and 04 00 stop the schedule is in effect all day The only exception to this is a start and stop time of 00 00 in this case the schedule is off for the day You may assign overlapping times For example if schedule is assigned from 9 00 am to 4 00 pm and schedule 2 is assigned from 1 00 pm to 5 00 pm then the start time of the second schedule is treated as a stop time for the first schedule This is also true if two schedules have the same start time but different stop times the stop time of the shorter schedule is treated as the start time of the longer schedule If one schedule starts and stops within the times of another schedule the first service temporarily ends when the second service
17. Messages Received Address Mask Received Address Mask Reply 0 AN Dn na A U N Received Echo Reply Received Echo Received Parameter Problem N Received Redirect U Received Source Quench PAS Received Time Exceeded Nn Received Timestamp Reply nN Received Timestamp Sent Address Mask Sent Address Mask Reply e Oo o N Sent Destination Unreachable N Sent Echo Reply N Sent Echo N N Sent Parameter Problem N W Sent Redirect N Ja Sent Source Quench N Nn Sent Time Exceeded N nN Sent Timestamp Reply 27 Sent Timestamp UDP Counters 1 Datagrams No Port 2 Datagrams Received Errors 3 Datagrams Received icmpOutErrors icmpInErrors icmpInMsgs icmpOutMsgs no equivalent icmpInMsgs icmpOutMsgs icmpInAddrMasks icmpInAddrMaskReps Received Destination Unreachable icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInEchoReps icmpInEchos icmpInParmProbs icmpInRedirects icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInTimestampReps icmpInTimestamps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutEchos icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutTimestamps udpNoPorts udpInErrors udpInDatagrams Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02
18. Software keys A programming section used to enable the optional Remote monitoring feature One setting provides a System ID which an installer or system coordinator plus then uses to request three password keys from the Nortel Networks Customer Response Center Once these three passwords have been entered the system will permit Remote monitoring Startup programming When an Enterprise Edge system is first installed and powered up Startup programming must be performed before any programming can be done Startup initializes the system programming to defaults Station An individual telephone Station Auxiliary Power Supply SAPS A device which provides power to a telephone that is connected more than 300 m 975 ft and less than 1200 m 3900 ft from the server or to a CAP module Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 385 Station Media Bay Module A computer module which provides access to telephone lines The 16 port Digital Station Media Bay Module EE DSM 16 allows the connection of 16 digital telephone sets to the system The 32 port Digital Station Media Bay Module EE DSM 32 allows the connection of 32 digital telephone sets to the system The Analog Station Media Bay Module EE ASM 8 allows the connection of analog station sets to the system Station set test A series of diagnostic tests for these components of a telephone display buttons handset speaker and powe
19. way DID using a Public service In this example the user dials the prefix 8 to place a call over a PRI line e inthe Unified Manager under Hardware configure the DTI EE DTM for PRI e select Public as the protocol e for incoming calls you need to program target lines to match the DID digit that is being received on the PRI interface e set Dial Out to None e select PRI A as the line pool e set ServiceType to Public e under Services Routing Service enter a Destination Code 8 in this example e set Absorb Length to All e the set that you are dialing out from must have access to the PRI Pool programmed in Terminals amp Sets e define received digits for target lines e define limits for incoming and outgoing public calls see Programming Call by Call service selection on page 154 Note 2 way DID does not have to be configured for Call by call service PRI DID and 2 way DID When configuring PRI DID with 2 way service the channels programmed as DID at the CO must be the lowest B channels on PRI On your Enterprise Edge system the BchanSeq mode must be set to descending In this configuration all calls on PRI must be Public service For example channels 1 to 4 are configured as DID at the CO The CO uses ascending mode for B channel selection and Enterprise Edge uses descending mode Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix B ISDN Overview Welcome to ISDN This chapter pro
20. 53 Cause Demo system Software error dealing with Base Station System problem with locating portable telephones The radio driver software which directly controls the Base Stations device has experienced an internal error System problem with locating portable telephones Wireless system access error Wireless system access error Trying to register an incompatible wireless device Wireless system software error in dealing with a portable telephone Wireless system software error Portable does not support specific display character Internal radio driver error A cell manager has been unable to register with the router Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 269 Event message display Evtis4a Evtisia Evtiesi Evties2 Eut i853 Eutig54 Eut 855 Euti556 Evtissg Evtise4 Evtises Evtised Eviis7a 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Cause Synchronization error Synchronization error Base Station software error The Data Transfer server has been told by the Base Station that an error has occurred The Data Transfer server has been told by the Base Station that an error has occurred Invalid event for Data Transfer Internal wireless subsystem software error Internal wireless subsystem locator error All possible wireless telephone numbers have been registered to portable telephones No directo
21. As a guideline use only one IP Address range and specify multiple excluded ranges to exclude disjoint parts of it 5 5 45 This is an invalid data value The new range overlaps with an existing range Reason This error happens if the specified excluded range overlaps with another excluded address range or with an address that is already assigned to a DHCP Client computer Modify the new excluded address range so that it does not overlap with another or does not include assigned IP addresses You may also go to the client system that go the assigned address and release IP address before setting the excluded range 5 16 68 This is an invalid operation You can t delete the last IP Address range in the scope Reason The scope contains only one IP Address range and you are attempting to delete it You must have at least one IP Address range in the scope all the time You may modify the last entry however Don t delete the last DHCP range If you need to change it modify it If you don t want the DHCP scope to be operational change its status to Disabled If don t want any scope operational set the status of the DHCP Service to Disabled This is an invalid configuration parameter There was an error in setting data Reason You tried to add a port range or filter and the key field didn t contain the characteristic prefix If you are adding a new port range make sure the PortRange R
22. Center 1 5 To program settings for a line click the line number Line 001 364 of the line and click the key to display the programming sublevels Copying settings from one line to another The Copy commands allows you to duplicate programming for a line and apply it to another line or a range of lines When copying data from a physical trunk to a target line or the other way around only the data in common is copied For example copying a target line to a T1 E amp M trunk copies only the Line data settings because there are no Trunk data settings for a target line If you try to copy line programming between lines on different types of modules the window shows an error message You cannot copy programming between lines on different types of modules The Received number of a target line is a unique number and cannot be copied P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 96 Configuring Telephony Resources To copy settings from one line to another 1 Choose Resources Telephony Lines 2 Click the line Line 001 364 from which you want to copy settings 0S Ifnecessary choose a subheading to refine your selection 4 On the Edit menu click Copy Nn Click Single from the Copy type list box 6 Type the line number of the line to which you want to copy the settings 7 Click the OK button To copy programming from one telephone to a range of lines 1 Choose Resources Telephon
23. E Line type Dial mode Received 1S If busy J l PrimeSet Pa ma vo Je fw CLID set Auto A A A vw je J lev privacy Trunk mode Ground start Digital lt DID Digital PRI lines Target lines VoIP A B amp M Digital i p w AJAJAJA 4 A z A l l l KS 4 l l l l l l Answer mode Answer with DISA Link at CO Use wv wv Pa eo e J de Js auxiliary ringer A A A l 4 l l l A A A l s l l l KS l l l l l l l Full A w TE p autoHold Loss z J l l Package Signal 7 lt o j l ANI vy lw l A Number DNIS r o Number P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 98 Configuring Telephony Resources 2 Configure the line settings according to the table Attribute Description Line type Specifies how the line is to be used in relation to other lines in the system Values Public Private to Pool A to O PRI A to PRI F Default Dial mode Specifies whether dual tone multifrequency DTMF or pulse signalling is used on the trunk Values Pulse Tone Default Tone Received number Specifies the digits to make a specific target line ring Values up to 24 digits Default blank If busy Defines whether a caller gets
24. Inthe Range box type the range identifier Note The range field uniquely identifies an excluded range value in the scope The value for this field is used as key and must follow certain conventions It must always start with the prefix E followed by a unique number identifying the range in the table For example E2 is a valid name While adding specify non recurring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing excluded range name it modifies the existing range Using non sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers When you modify an excluded range you can t change the range name The excluded range name does not have any significance other than uniquely identifying an entry 3 Inthe Start Address box type the start address 4 Inon the End Address box type the end address Scroll to see any fields that are not displayed Note Make sure the start address and end address are in the same subnet and an excluded address range is completely contained in an IP address range specified for the subnet 5 Click the Save button to save the excluded address range and return to Unified Manager To delete an excluded address range 1 Click an excluded address in the Excluded Address Range table 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete Excluded Address Ranges A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion 3 Click the Yes button to confirm the del
25. Pool B Pool O or PRI A to PRI F The PRI pools will only be displayed if an EE DTM has been configured for PRI Route 000 uses Pool A by default and cannot be changed P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 116 Configuring Telephony Resources Call by Call Service routing The following is an example of a Routing Table containing Call by Call programming Route Dial Out Use Pool Service Type Service 000 999 24 digits Identifier 003 PRI A Public 004 PRI A FX XXXXX 005 PRI A Tie XXXXX 006 PRI B OUTWATS XXX 007 PRI B Private 008 PRI B Switched Digital Note The public DN lengths are used for all PRI calls except those whose routes use service type Private or service type Tie with DN Type specified as Private The service identifier SID depends on the selected service type For example with NI 2 protocol Service Type Service Identifier description Public None FX Facility Number 1 5 digits Tie Facility Number 1 5 digits OUTWATS Optional Band Number 1 3 digits Private None Switched Digital None a For NI 2 do not program the Carrier Access Code for banded OUTWAT calls This call may be rejected When a PRI protocol is selected or changed the Service Type and Service ID fields are automatically cleared for each entry in the routing table for that PRI Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Is
26. elements on the system board or between the circuitry on the system board and any cards plugged into the system board busy lamp field BLF A device with a liquid crystal display LCD panel of indicators that shows the status of up to 24 telephones in the system Byte The amount of space required to store a single character One byte equals eight bits C Call Duration timer A feature that lets you see how long you spent on your last call or how long you have been on your present call Call Forward A feature that forwards all the calls arriving at your telephone to another telephone in your system To have calls forwarded outside the system use Line Redirection Call Forward No Answer A feature that forwards all calls arriving at your telephone to another designated telephone in your system after a specific number of rings Call Forward No Answer is assigned under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming Call Forward On Busy A feature that forwards all calls at your telephone to another designated telephone if your telephone is busy This feature is assigned under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 356 Glossary Call Forward Override An automatic system feature that lets you call someone and ask them to stop forwarding their calls to you Call Information Call Information allows you to display information about incoming ca
27. high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth via the power cord Therefore itis mandatory that connection to an earthed outletis performed firstand removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unitto be powered down musthave the network connections exchange lines removed first Radio frequency interference This isa ClassA product In a domestic environment this product may cause interference The user may be required to take adequate measures Read and follow installation instructions carefully This product uses Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV circuits which include the following ports analogue lines including PFT modems ATA BRI ACI5A and TCM Isolator This product uses Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV circuits which include the following ports TCM extensions external music source MSCX auxiliary ringer AUX paging system relay PAGE LAN interface WAN interface and the serial port P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 18 About this document Software licensing Copyright c 1995 1999 The Apache Group All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source co
28. numbers changing 136 length 148 internal CSU 183 internal numbers coordinated dialing plan 310 in a network 310 IP addresses setting up with a laptop 54 with a PC 54 IP addressing dynamic 35 overview 35 static 35 IP routing Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 396 Index information protocol 36 introduction 34 overview 34 specifics 35 IP services DHCP configuring 38 ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network bearer capability 341 capabilities 339 installation programming 345 layers 340 planning service order 340 programming sequence 346 standards 345 ISDN PRI 2 way DID 344 Dialing Plan 344 J JAVA Virtual Machine JVM 55 L LAN connections 49 LAN resource settings 64 LAN routing services 193 LAN to LAN fast path routing 37 LAN DHCP settings 187 LEDs EE DTM 294 Legacy networks introduction 43 port range settings 47 line access 81 assignment 83 deprovisioning 271 filter programming 131 pool access code 146 access codes 315 troubleshooting 300 PRI about 305 programming name 106 telco features 106 trunk line data 96 trunk line data received number 102 provisioning 271 redirection feature 336 restriction programming 106 selection for a direct dial telephone 143 troubleshooting 285 290 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide type 101 line coding 182 line parameters WAN 68 line pool access code 146 in a dialing plan 310 line restriction 308 line set restriction 92 3
29. or N No P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 130 Configuring Telephony Resources Passwords The Passwords heading allows you define class of service passwords call log passwords registration passwords Companion wireless and Hospitality passwords The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Password programming map Passwords 9 COS passwords Q COS 00 99 Password User filter Line filter Remote package 9 Call log passwords Q DN 221 528 Password Registration password Password Hospitality passwords Desk password Room condition password COS passwords Class of Service COS passwords permit controlled access to a system s resources by both internal and remote users When you enter a Class of Service password at a telephone the restriction filters associated with your Class of Service password apply instead of the normal restriction filters Similarly when a remote user enters a Class of Service password on an incoming auto answer line the restriction filters and remote package associated with their Class of Service password apply instead of the normal restriction filters and remote package COS passwords lets you define individual passwords and determine the restriction filters and remote package associated with each Tips The Class of Service passwords for a system should be determined randomly and should be changed on a regular basis Users shou
30. screens appear Note The RIP Parameters screen is not displayed unless RIP is chosen as your routing protocol in the WAN summary screen To display the RIP parameters click the Routing Protocol list box and select RIP Then press the Tab key to update the screen A configurable RIP screen appears P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 202 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 3 Use the scroll bars to locate any fields that are not displayed 4 Configure the WAN1 or WAN2 routing summary and RIP Parameters screens from Unified Manager Configure the input filters output filters and static route attributes from the menu 5 Follow the steps outlined in LAN routing settings to complete your configuration process 6 Clicking the Routing navigation key to close the navigation tree SNMP To configure SNMP services settings 1 On the navigation tree click SNMP Clicking the SNMP navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click SNMP The screen displays the SNMP Summary Community List Manager List and Trap Community List screens 2 Configure SNMP summary screen from Unified Manager Configure the SNMP Community List Manager List and Trap Community List from the menu The SNMP Summary attributes are Attribute Description Description Shows the description of the SNMP agent Version Shows the version of the SNMP agent Status Lets users enable or disable the SNMP age
31. security 308 Class of Service 308 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 400 Index dialing restriction 308 services evening 127 example of alternate call ringing 112 lunch 127 night 127 programming common settings 126 restriction services 114 ringing groups 112 ringing service 112 routing service 114 programming ringing sets 113 Schedule 4 127 Schedule 5 127 Schedule 6 127 schedule names 126 schedule times 126 types 111 services configuring 185 services IP DHCP configuring 38 set feature and number restrictions 91 restriction default 91 user filter 131 setting up JAVA Virtual Machine 55 logging off of Enterprise Edge 57 logging on to Enterprise Edge 56 operational considerations 55 rebooting Enterprise Edge 57 web based administration 55 settings saving 241 signal type 105 significant event messages 262 SNMP guidelines 41 overview 41 SNMP service settings community list 203 manager list 203 overview 202 trap community list 203 software keys 173 Speed Dial programming 128 speed dial 128 start and stop times services 126 start DN 136 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide Static DID 338 static IP addressing 35 static IP routing 36 Station Set Test 284 Statistics charts 243 generating 243 sample rate 244 tables 244 Stop restore dialog box description 240 summary parameters WAN 74 superframe 182 support 283 system administration log 258 processor software 253 sample configu
32. you must have e Java Virtual Machine JVM 5 0 build 5 0 0 3167 or greater e one of the following web browsers Netscape Communicator 4 5 or greater Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or greater If you are using Netscape Communicator you must set the following parameters e Enable Java On e Cached document comparison Every time If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer you must set the following parameters e Check for newer versions Every visit to the page Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Overview 27 e Java JIT compiler enabled On For information about setting these parameters check the documentation that came with your web browser Understanding the Unified Manager The Unified Manager consists of e amenu bar where users access configuration management commands e anavigation tree used to navigate between views and configuration windows e an information panel view Menu Bar Navigation Tree Navigation Keys Command Buttons Information Panel View The menu bar contains configuration management options These options are enabled when you select the various headings in the navigation tree to enter specific areas of the Enterprise Edge system If an option is grey it is not available for the heading you have selected The navigation tree contains headings that allow you to access specific areas of the Enterprise Edge system The key symbol
33. 2 The server either validates the request and sends back an acknowledgement terminates the connection or offers the requestor another chance Passwords are sent without security and the originator can make repeated attempts to gain access For these reasons a server that supports CHAP will offer to use that protocol before using PAP Parallel port A port that transfers data through multiple wires so that eight bits are transmitted simultaneously Parallel ports usually use a 25 pin interface that transmits and receives data one byte at a time using a separate data line for each bit Park prefix See Call park prefix Park timeout The time before an unanswered parked call is routed back to the telephone that parked it Park timeout is under Feature settings in System programming Password A four digit to eight digit number that is entered using the dialpad A password is used to open mailboxes or perform configuration tasks Pause A feature that enters a 1 5 second delay in a dialing sequence on an external line This is often required for signaling remote devices such as answering machines or when reaching through to PBX features or host systems The Pause symbol uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence PBX See Private Branch Exchange Permanent virtual circuit PVC The PVC is an end to end virtual connection in frame relay networks P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 376
34. 221 528 from which you want to copy settings W If necessary choose a subheading to refine your selection 4 On the Edit menu click Copy N Click Range from the Copy type list box 6 Type the start and end DN numbers of the sets to which you want to copy the settings 7 Click the OK button To copy programming from one telephone to all telephones 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 from which you want to copy settings W If necessary choose a subheading to refine your selection 4 On the Edit menu click Copy 5 Click All from the Copy type list box 6 Click the OK button Line access Line access allows you to assign lines to individual telephones To save time you can copy the Line access settings to other telephones once you have finished programming the settings for one telephone Note PRI lines must be set to Auto Answer and cannot be Manual Answer P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 82 Configuring Telephony Resources To assign a line to a telephone 1 Choose Resources Terminals amp Sets Line access 2 Configure line access according to the table Attribute Description Prime line Defines the first line that is selected when a call is made from an Enterprise Edge telephone Values None Pool A to O I C intercom or Line Default None Intercom keys Assigns the number of intercom
35. 251 4 5 Datagrams Sent Datagrams TCP Counters 1 Connection Failures Connections Active Connections Established Connections Passive Connections Reset 2 3 4 5 6 yi 8 9 Segments Received Segments Retransmitted Segments Sent Segments QoS Session Counters udpOutDatagrams no equivalent udpInDatagrams udpOutDataGrams tcpAttemptFails tcpActiveOpens tepCurrEstab tcpPassiveOpens tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpOutSegs no equivalent tcpInSegs tepOutSegs Note These are proprietory counters implemented by QoS Provider Module 1 3 QoS Best Effort Traffic Counters Note Not Served Priority Sessions The number of premium priority sessions declined by the QoS module probably due to bandwidth restrictions Requested Priority Sessions Total number of premium priority sessions requested Served Priority Sessions Number of premium priority sessions admitted This is a proprietory counter 1 Total Best Effort Octets Total number octets carried in best effort level 2 Total Best Effort Packets Total number of packets carried in best effort level QoS Dropped Packets Counter Note Proprietory counter in QoS l Total Dropped Octets Total number of octets dropped probably due to insufficient buffer 2 Total Dropped Packets Total number of dropped packets P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O p
36. 565 3 763 3492 2 9203 555 3 763 4018 3 9204 555 All 763 4018 9205 565 2 763 3492 05 9206 555 3 763 4018 6 9207 555 3 763 4018 7 9208 555 3 763 4018 8 9209 555 3 763 4018 9 Note The numbers in italics in the Dial Out sequence are not visible to the user Destination codes Route Digit Absorb Dial Out 920A 555 3 763 4018 A 9204 555 All 763 4018 9205 565 2 763 3492 05 Note The numbers in italics in the Dial Out sequence are not visible to the user Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 119 Normal route Select which route a call using the destination code takes during normal service and for each of the schedules The automatic schedule times are programmed under Services The default Normal route is 000 which has no External digits and uses Pool A Digit Absorption Select the portion of the destination code that is always absorbed by the system and not used in the dialing sequence Select the number of digits to be deleted 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 or All Tips The digit absorption setting Digit absorb only applies to a maximum of two schedules Setting digit absorption to 0 minimizes the effort involved in preparing destination codes With a 0 setting the actual digits dialed by a caller are preserved in the dial out sequence Programming a dial out sequence as part of the route may or may not be necessary de
37. A to O Tips There is just one direct dial digit for the entire system The Enterprise Edge system cannot verify that the number you assign as an external direct dial set is valid Check the number before assigning it as a direct dial set and call the direct dial set after you ve assigned it in order to test it CAP assignment This setting designates a telephone as a central answering position CAP The CAP must be an M7324 telephone and may have one or two CAP modules attached A maximum of five CAPs can be installed in an Enterprise Edge system The CAP may be used to e monitor the busy not busy and Do Not Disturb status of Enterprise Edge telephones e answer external calls on up to 120 lines and extend calls to other Enterprise Edge telephones e send up to 30 messages to other Enterprise Edge telephones e provide up to 96 extra memory buttons for the M7324 telephone Under CAP assignment CAP1 CAP set enter the internal number of the M7324 telephone to be designated a CAP Tips If CAP modules are attached to an M7324 telephone that has not been programmed as a CAP then no CAP settings are assigned If a CAP module or modules is relocated with the M7324 telephone the settings are retained Access codes Access codes are used by the system to direct calls to the correct lines and destinations If the codes conflict some of the features on the system will not work The table of default settings can h
38. Addressing Overview 35 Static Routing 36 Routing Information Protocol RIP 36 Enabling RIP on Network Interfaces 36 Packet Filtering 36 LAN to LAN Fast Path Routing 37 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 37 Automatic Configuration using a DHCP server 38 Guidelines for Using DHCP 38 Domain Name Service DNS 39 Guidelines for Using DNS 39 Web Caching Proxy 40 Guidelines for Using Web Caching Proxy 40 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 41 Guidelines for Using SNMP 41 Quality of Service 42 QoS overview 42 DiffServ Networks 43 Legacy Networks 43 Admission Control 44 Packet Marking for DiffServ Networks 45 Port Range Setting for Legacy Networks 47 Relationship between the QoS Module and the VoIP QoS Monitor 48 Enterprise Edge QoS Restrictions and Defaults 48 LAN Connections 49 WAN Connections 49 WAN overview 49 Permanent WAN Connections 50 Backup Up WAN Connection 51 Backup WAN Links 52 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 53 Enterprise Edge required parameters 53 Setting up an Enterprise Edge IP Address 54 Setting up web based administration 55 Browser settings 55 Logging on to Enterprise Edge 56 Logging off Enterprise Edge 57 Rebooting the Enterprise Edge server 57 Configuring system settings 57 System name 58 System name date andtime 61 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 P0908508 Issue 02 Contents v Configuring networking resources 63 Viewing
39. Code 6 Absorb None Normal route 002 Remote access Rem access pkgs 01 Line pool access Pool M ON Rem access pkgs 02 Line pool access Pool B ON Line abilities 049 Remote pkg 01 Line abilities 050 Remote pkg 02 Toronto office Trunk Line Data Line 093 T1 E amp M Answer Mode Auto Line type Pool N Line 300 Target line Received 6221 Line Access Set 6221 L300 Ring only Line pool access Line pool N To New York Routing service Route 001 Use Pool N External None Destination Code 4 Absorb None Normal route 001 To Santa Clara Routing service Destination Code 2 Absorb None Normal route 001 If a user in New York wishes to call Toronto within the network they dial 6221 The local Enterprise Edge checks the number against the routing tables and routes the call according to the destination code 6 which places the call using Route 001 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 315 The call appears on the auto answer line on the Enterprise Edge in Santa Clara as 6 221 Because 6 is programmed as a destination code for Toronto on the Santa Clara system another call is placed using route 002 from Santa Clara to Toronto At the Toronto system the digits 6 221 are interpreted as a target line received number The call now alerts at telephone 6221 in Toronto Dialing plans with shared line pools Using routes and destination codes is a powerful and efficient way to creat
40. Configuring Enterprise Edge Services The Net Link Manager Summary screen attributes are Attribute Description Description Shows a description of the Net Link Manager Version Shows the version number of the subsystem Status Shows the status of the Net Link Manager The Net Link Manager is always running and cannot be disabled by the user Next Hop on Lets users specify the IP address in a valid dot format of the next hop router Primary Link which is typically the remote router of the primary WAN data link Up Poll Interval Lets users set the polling interval in seconds while the primary WAN data link is operational Down Poll Lets users set the polling interval in seconds while the primary WAN data Interval link is down and the dial up data link is operational Switch Over Lets users specify the interval in seconds that Net Link Manager waits for Delay before switching the network link after it notices that the primary WAN link has come up again This delay lets the router on the other end of the primary link recognize that the link has come up and adjust routing table accordingly Typically this is set to the RIP Route Announcement Interval of 30 seconds 2 From the Status list box select enable or disable 3 Inthe Next Hop on Primary Link box type the next hop This address is used by NetLink Manager to add a default route in the Enterprise Edge server If this address is unreachab
41. DN programming 145 auto number identification see ANT Automatic Daylight Savings Time see Daylight Savings Time automatic route selection see routing P0908508 Issue 02 Index 391 automatic telephone relocation programming 280 Automatic Time and Date 138 auxiliary ringer programming 104 troubleshooting 292 B background music 137 troubleshooting 293 Backup and Restore backing up programming 238 caution when restoring programming 239 failed restore 239 file storage 237 starting 238 239 bar graph progress indicator 238 B channel Sequence 179 Cc Call by Call example 319 PRI limits 154 programming service selection 154 routing incoming calls 180 routing table 116 service selection for PRI 151 usage metrics 279 call log automatic 93 password 132 space 94 142 call log set 93 called ID 93 camp timeout delay 137 CAP Central Answering Position line assignment 84 programming 143 card edge loopback test 273 carrier access codes 124 carrier failure alarms 275 standard 182 CbC routing table example 116 central answering position see CAP channel disabling PRI 272 Channel Service Unit see CSU Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 392 Index CLASS assignment 93 Class of Service dialing restriction 308 security 308 Class of Service see COS Clock Source 179 clock source description 179 primary reference 179 secondary reference 180 timing master 180 CO fail 182 cold start definition 239
42. Default N Handsfree Defines whether Handsfree will be available to a telephone Values Auto Standard None Default None HF answerback Defines whether a user can automatically answer a voice call without lifting the receiver or pressing the Handsfree Mute button Values Y or N Default Y Pickup group Assigns a telephone to a pickup group Values None 1 to 9 Default None Page zone Assign a telephone to page zone Values None 1 to 6 Default 1 Paging Defines whether paging announcements can be made from a telephone Values Y or N Default Y Direct dial Defines whether you can call the Direct dial telephone from this telephone using the Direct dial digit Values Set 1 to Set 5 None Default 1 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 87 Attribute Description Priority call Select whether to allow this telephone to interrupt calls or to override Do Not Disturb at another telephone Values Y or N Default N Aux ringer Defines whether an auxiliary ringer if installed will ring for incoming calls at this telephone Values Y or N Default N Allow redirect Defines whether or not to allow this telephone to redirect its lines Values Y or N Default N Redirect ring Select whether a telephone rings briefly when a call on one of its lines is redirected by the Line Redirection feature Feat
43. Dial mode is set to tone Applies to Tl E amp M and T1 DID trunks For T1 E amp M and T1 DID trunks con nected to an EE DTM this setting only appears if Signalling is set to WinkStart Applies to T1 E amp M trunks For T1 E amp M trunks connected to an EE DTM this setting only appears if Signalling is set to WinkStart and Answer mode is set to Manual P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 100 Configuring Telephony Resources Trunk type The Trunk line data displayed in the Unified Manager will vary with the type of trunk module how it is configured and which line is selected For example the EE DTM can be configured as PRI or T1 For more information see Hardware on page 175 To enable or disable a module consult the Maintenance chapter The following trunk types can be programmed Hardware Unit Trunk Types EE DTM PRI T1 Loop Tl E amp M T1 Ground EE CTM Loop Enable modules If you disabled any Trunk Modules to perform programming enable them now using Module port status in Maintenance or your system will not function properly See Module port status on page 254 Voice over IP trunk considerations For IP functionality with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway the trunk type is VoIP Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway routes voice traffic over private Internet Protocol IP networks to link multiple sites together using an existing corporate data network Li
44. EE DTM DTD the Immediate setting does not appear if dial mode for the line is tone ANI Number Select whether the telephone number of the caller will be collected for this line The digits can then be displayed on Enterprise Edge telephones as part of Call Display services The central office must deliver ANI DNIS in DTMF mode The delivery of ANI DNIS depends on the network provider and the services they offer If the conditions for signalling mode and start arrangement are not met prompts are not presented to the user No additional equipment is required DNIS Number Select whether the digits dialed by an external caller on this line will be collected This setting applies to T1 E amp M lines only For T1 E amp M lines on an EE DTM this setting only appears if Signal is WinkStart and Answer mode is Manual These digits are required for some third party software applications P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 106 Configuring Telephony Resources Name The default name for a line is Line and its three digit number for example Line 001 but it can be changed to any combination of letters and numbers to a maximum length of 7 characters Click on a line number in the Unified Manager and enter the name in the Name field Restrictions Restrictions prevent a user from making certain kinds of calls from lines that are available at the telephone It also restricts some features Line restri
45. EE DTM installed if you want to program PRI or T1 trunk lines The EE DTM is automatically disabled and re enabled when you change the card type There is no need to manually enable and disable it under Maintenance P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 178 Configuring Telephony Resources Low line loop High line loop Low line loop and High line loop settings are automatically assigned according to the settings in the following table Note that Module 6 and 7 are reserved for the Companion mobility option if Companion is included in the system Card Type Module 02 Module 03 Module 04 Module 05 Module 06 Module 07 T1 Card 1 211 234 181 204 151 174 121 144 91 114 61 84 PRI Card 1 211 233 181 203 151 173 121 143 91 113 61 83 Loop Card 1 211 214 181 184 151 154 121 124 91 94 61 64 Loop Card 2 219 222 189 192 159 162 129 132 99 102 69 72 Loop Card 3 227 230 197 200 167 170 137 140 107 110 77 80 Loop Card 4 235 238 205 208 175 178 145 148 115 118 85 88 Disconnect timer Disconnect timer allows you to specify the duration of an Open Switch Interval OSI before a call on a supervised external line is considered disconnected This setting must match the setting for the line at the central office CO You must enable disconnect supervision by changing the Trunk mode attribute From the Telephony heading choose Lines and Line trunk data See Trunk
46. Enterprise Edge implements the DiffServ queuing model that includes a premium queue and eight best effort queues The premium queue has a stricter high priority than the best effort queues The eight best effort queues are scheduled by a weighted fair queuing WFQ algorithm Since best effort traffic is not shaped and does not go through the admission control process the WFQ is needed to avoid starvation of low priority packets Currently H 323 traffic is allowed to get into the premium queue Users can allow other traffic to be premium by setting up priority filters on the web based GUI using the following filter criteria e Source IP address with mask e Destination IP address with mask e IP protocol ID e g TCP UDP or ICMP e Source port range e Destination port range e Incoming TOS field Note There is no traffic shaping mechanism implemented in this release of Enterprise Edge Be cautious when setting up premium priority filters If the traffic is high volume and with high bursts it can impact VoIP quality Unless necessary Nortel Networks recommends that you allocate traffic to the high priority best effort queues instead of the premium queue Legacy Networks In a legacy network Enterprise Edge assumes that network devices such as routers and switches do not recognize the IP header TOS field as defined by DiffServ and do not perform the corresponding priority processing However most of the current installed rout
47. Enterprise Edge resources 63 Configuring LAN settings 64 Configuring WAN settings 66 WAN Primary Link Summary Parameters 67 WAN Primary Link Line Parameters 68 WAN Primary Link Frame Relay Parameters 70 WAN Primary Link PPP parameters 73 WAN Primary Link performance graphs and tables 73 WAN Backup Links 73 WAN Backup Summary Parameters 74 WAN Backup Link Parameters 74 WAN Backup Access Parameters 76 Configuring Telephony Resources 77 Programming order 78 Terminals amp Sets 80 Copying settings from one telephone set to another 80 Line access 81 Capabilities 86 Name 89 User preferences 90 Restrictions 91 Telco features 92 Lines 95 Copying settings from one line to another 95 Trunk Line data 96 Restrictions 106 Telco features 107 Restriction filters 108 Services 111 Ringing service 112 Restriction service 114 Routing service 114 Destination codes 117 Setting up a route for local calling 119 Setting up a route for long distance calling 120 Adding a long distance carrier access code 121 Programming for least cost routing 122 Using dialing restrictions with routing 123 Using a dialing plan to route outgoing PRI calls 123 Common settings 126 System speed dial 128 Adding or changing a system speed dial 128 Passwords 130 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide vi Contents COS passwords 130 Call log passwords 132 Registration password 132 Hospitality passwords 132 Time and date 134 G
48. Error Threshold Lets users set the maximum number of consecutive failures permitted in LMI Status Enquiry before marking the link non operational It is also the number of successful consecutive LMI Status Enquiry messages that must be received before marking a link as operational Permitted values are between 0 and MAXINT The default setting is 3 Monitored Events Lets users set the number of events sampled for making decisions about the error threshold Set the number higher than the values set in the error threshold Permitted values are a number between 0 and MAXINT The default setting is 4 DS Code Lets users set the differentiated services code DSCode recognized by the frame relay driver for prioritization This value is used as a mask value When an IP packet is sent down the frame relay driver checks whether the packet s DSCode field known as TOS byte in earlier documents has any of the bits specified in this field set a bitwise AND operation is performed between this field s value and the DSCode field of the IP packet and the result is checked for 0 If any of the bits is set result is non zero the frame relay network is signaled to handle this packet with priority by clearing the D E discard eligibility bit in the frame relay packet header If none of the bits specified in this field are set in the IP packet header D E bit is set in the frame relay packet header marking the packet as a likely candidate for
49. Glossary Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI Slot Socket on the Enterprise Edge Server main board that connect to the Enterprise Edge cards Personal Speed Dial Two digit codes 71 94 can be programmed to dial external telephone numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers are programmed for each telephone and can be used only at the telephone on which they are programmed Pickup Group A telephone can be placed into one of nine call pickup groups A call ringing at a telephone within a pickup group can be picked up at any other telephone within the same pickup group A telephone is assigned to a pickup group under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming Pin 1 The first pin in a multiple pin connector or chip designated as such to help you properly orient the component when attaching or installing it Point to point protocol PPP PPP is a protocol for communication between two computers using a serial interface typically a personal computer connects to a server by a phone line For example your Internet server provider may provide you with a PPP connection so that the provider s server can respond to your requests pass them on to the Internet and forward your requested Internet responses back to you PPP is a full duplex protocol that can be used on various physical media including twisted pair or fiber optic lines or satellite transmission It uses a variation of High Speed Data Link Control HDLC for packet encapsu
50. If your Enterprise Edge server also contains a modem card with dial up interfaces these interfaces appear as WAN3 WAN4 and so on Click on these interfaces to see their description If your Enterprise Edge server does not have a WAN card dial up interfaces appear as WAN1 WAN2 and so on The configurable parameters and options are different for permanent WAN links and for dial up WAN links In this document it is assumed that WAN1 and WAN2 are permanent WAN links and WAN3 and others are dial up interfaces To view the WAN primary links 1 Click WAN to view the available WAN resources to configure The available WAN interfaces e g WAN1 appear in table format Note Clicking the WAN navigation key expands the navigation tree but doesn t display the summary of configurable WAN resources 2 Click the WAN navigation key to expand the navigation tree Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring networking resources 67 3 On the navigation tree click WAN1 or WAN2 Clicking the WANI or WAN2 navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click WANI or WAN2 The right frame displays the WAN Summary WAN Line Parameters WAN Frame Relay or PPP Parameters and PVC Congestion Control screens Note The WAN Frame Relay Parameters do not appear unless frame relay is chosen as your link protocol in the WAN Summary To display the WAN frame relay parameters from the Link Protocol list box select F
51. Line data on page 96 for more information Protocol Enterprise Edge supports a number of different trunk protocols used by different service providers and markets Supported protocols are listed in the table below Protocol Type NI 2 DMS100 DMS250 AT amp T4ESS Public SL 1 premium feature Private Protocol type When you select SL 1 protocol an additional setting Protocol type appears Because SL 1 protocol is a private networking protocol you have the option of designating an Enterprise Edge node as a Network Master The default setting is User Slave In public network configurations the CO is generally considered the Network side or Master Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 179 N SF Extension If you select the NI 2 protocol and you are using Call by Call services you must specify how Enterprise Edge should handle the NSF Network Specific Facilities The table below summarizes the NSF Extension settings recommended for each switch type Central O ffice N SF Extension Setting DMS100 None Siemens ESWD Lucent SESS WATS GTDS5 DMS10 ALL The Network Specific Facilities NSF information element is used to request a particular service from the network When you select NONE the NSF extension bit is not set for any service When you select WATS the NSF extension bit is set for unbanded OUTWATS calls When you
52. M1 must recognize numbers starting with 9 as public numbers whether the numbers are dialed by Meridian M1 users or by Enterprise Edge users Call by Call Services Example This example highlights the use of PRI Call by Call Services It shows two offices of a company one in New York and one in Toronto Each office is equipped with an Enterprise Edge system and a PRI line Each office has to handle incoming and outgoing calls to the public network In addition employees at each office often have to call colleagues in the other office To reduce long distance costs and to allow for a coordinated dialing plan between the offices private lines are used to handle inter office traffic P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 320 Appendix A N etwork Examples Toronto office New York office Network 2221 Network 6221 E Received 2221 Received 6221 rg Internal 2221 Internal 6221 5 DID 763 2221 DID 562 6221 Enterprise Edge Voice Enterprise Edge Voice Tie Connection PRI Central Office Central Office Public Network If call by call services were not used each Enterprise Edge system might have to be equipped with the following trunks e 12 T1 DID lines needed to handle peak incoming call traffic e 8 T1 E amp M lines needed to handle inter office calls e 8 lines needed to handle outgoing public calls The tot
53. Message Call Answer feature For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging Client Installation Guide Enterprise Edge TSP Server Microsoft s Telephony Application Programming Interface TAPI converts industry standard commands passed between Windows and your phone system into a format which both can understand TAPI consists of a set of programming tools developed by Microsoft which provides a standard set of commands that can be used to control any telephone TAPI allows a Windows application to operate on many different switch platforms with little or no modification For most telephone systems a TAPI Service Provider TSP is required to use TAPI For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge TSP Server Configuration Guide Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager is a TAPI based application that provides First Party Call Control for your telephone For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager User Guide Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording The Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording software records call activity Each time a telephone call is made to or from your company the information about the call is recorded When the call is completed information about the call is printed out in Call Records For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording System Administrator Guide Nortel Networks Voice Service Enter
54. Networks service program contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers Technical Solutions Center Telephone Number Billerica MA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Santa Clara CA 800 2LAN WAN 800 252 6926 Valbonne France 33 4 92 96 69 68 Sydney Australia 61 2 9927 8800 Tokyo Japan 81 3 5402 7041 Viewing system performance and fault alarms System performance graphs and tables on page 283 System Fault Alarm Banner on page 284 System performance graphs and tables To access the system performance graphs and tables l Choose Performance and then click System CPU Usage Graph The System CPU Usage Graph appears Choose Performance and then click System CPU Usage Table The System CPU Usage Table appears P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 284 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 3 Access the Memory Usage graph and Memory Usage table by following the steps for System CPU Usable Graphs and Tables For information on using performance tables and graphs refer to Graphs and tables on page 243 System Fault Alarm Banner To access the system fault alarm banner 1 Choose Configuration and then click Fault The Alarm Banner dialog box appears Problems with telephones For troubleshooting information for your telephone sets refer to one of the following items e Telephone has faulty bu
55. Not equipped From the Configuration menu option select Start loopback to begin the test The system displays the Loopback type selection window From the drop down menu select the test you want to run and then select OK The options are line payload card edge or continuity After you select the test the test name is displayed Note You may end the test at any time by selecting Stop loopback from the Configuration menu option DN to port conversion If you know a telephone s DN you can determine the port that is associated with this DN using the following procedure l Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance DN to Port Conversion The window displays a number of fields Type the DN in the DN to convert box and press Enter The system displays values in the Device port and Device channel fields CSU statistics Each EE DTM is equipped with an internal channel service unit CSU When enabled the internal CSU monitors the quality of the received T1 signal and provides performance statistics alarm statistics and diagnostic information EE DTMs must be individually programmed to establish parameters for collecting and measuring transmission performance statistics by the CSU For more information refer to Statistics collected by the Enterprise Edge system on page 275 Enable the internal CSU on page 275 Check the performance statistics on page 276 Check the CSU alarms on page 276 Check carrier failure al
56. O perations Guide 134 Configuring Telephony Resources Time and date The Time and date heading allows you to change the system time and date The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Time and date programming map Time and date yyyyMMddHHmmss You can configure the system to automatically change the time for Daylight savings From Feature settings enable Daylight savings time For more information see Feature settings on page 136 To change the time and date 1 Choose Resources Telephony Time and date 2 Type the time and date according to the format yryyMMddHHmmss and press Enter Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 135 General settings General settings heading allows you to define features and settings that are not associated with any specific line or telephone The following illustration shows a detailed view of the General settings programming map General settings Business name Feature settings Background music On hold Receiver volume Camp timeout Park timeout Park mode Transfer callback timeout DRT to prime DRT delay Held line reminder HLR delay Directed pickup Page tone Page timeout Daylight savings time Auto time and date Host delay Link time Alarm set Set relocation Message reply enhancement Anskey Call log space Q Direct dial Set 1 5 Type Internal External Facility CAP assig
57. P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 289 2 Select the affected line 3 Select Trunk line data 4 Inthe Auto answer field reconfigure the line as manual answer by selecting Manual form the drop down menu Possible problem The disconnect timer setting for the trunk module in Trunk Line data does not match the setting for the line at the central office Solution Reconfigure the disconnect timer in the Unified Manager to match the setting at the central office 1 Choose Resources Telephony Lines 2 Select the affected line 3 Select Trunk Line data The data is displayed for this line 4 Inthe Trunk mode field select the correct setting from the drop down menu For more information refer to Trunk mode on page 103 Prime telephone gets misdialed calls Possible problem The digits sent by a switch at a central office or in the private network did not match any Received number or the Auto DN The call has been routed to the prime telephone for the incoming trunk Solution 1 Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits for the Received number length defined in your system 2 Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending 3 Check that you have defined the corresponding Received number for every target line in your system 4 Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your network are correct P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Program
58. PVC Congestion Control dialog box appears Click any box that requires modification and type the necessary changes Click the Save button to save the modifications and return to Unified Manager To delete PVC congestion control l 2 Click an entry in the PVC Congestion Control range On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete PVC Congestion Control A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion Click the Yes button to delete PVC congestion and return to Unified Manager Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring networking resources 73 WAN Primary Link PPP parameters If you chose PPP as your link protocol scroll down from the WAN Line Parameters screen to find the WAN PPP Parameters screen The WAN PPP Parameters are Attribute Description Keep Alive Interval Lets users specify the interval between kept alive messages sent when there is no regular traffic on the PPP link Cisco s Encapsulation Lets users enable or disable the Cisco compatibility mode Mode To set the WAN PPP parameters 1 Inthe Keep Alive Interval box type the keep alive interval in seconds 2 From the Cisco s Encapsulation Mode list box enable or disable the Cisco compatibility mode WAN Primary Link performance graphs and tables To access the WAN Primary Link performance graphs and tables 1 On the menu click Performance and then click WAN Graph The W
59. Port ICMP Type ICMP Code e LAN to WAN routing managing traffic using Interrupt Modulation e LAN to LAN routing Fast Path Routing IP Routing Overview The Internet Protocol IP is the protocol used on the Internet to send data from one computer to another Each computer on the Internet called a host has at least one address that identifies it from all other computers on the Internet When you send or receive data for example an e mail or a web page the message gets divided into units called packets Each of these packets contains both the sender s Internet address and the receiver s Internet address A packet is first sent to a router that reads the destination address and forwards the packet to an adjacent router that reads the destination address This routing process continues across the Internet until one router recognizes the packet as belonging to a computer in its immediate neighborhood or domain That router forwards the packet to the computer whose address is specified Because a message is divided into a number of packets each packet can if necessary be sent by a different route across the Internet Packets can arrive in a different order than the order they are sent Another protocol the Transmission Control Protocol TCP puts the packets in the right order Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 35 IP is aconnectionless protocol which
60. Private incoming and outgoing calls connect Enterprise Edge to a virtual private network Dialed digits may conform to the standard North American dialing plan E 164 standard or the dialed digits may use a private dialing plan Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 153 NNV NI 2F DMS 100 DMS 250 AT amp T 4ESS Service custom MCI Sprint Generic FX FX FX Tie Tie Tie Tie SDN software defined network INWATS INWATS INWATS Eight Hundred Toll Free MEGACOM International Same as Same as Same as International INWATS INWATS INWATS INWATS Toll Free Service OUTWATS IntraLATA OUTWATS_ PRISM MEGACOM OUTWATS OUTWATS with bands InterLATA OUTWATS Private DMS Private VNET virtual network Switched Digital ACCUNET Nine Hundred Nine Hundred MultiQuest Public Public Public Public a A shaded box indicates that the protocol does not support the service b DMS 250 Sprint and UCS support incoming FX only i e Network to Enterprise Edge DMS 250 MCI does not support FX c NI 2 allows two Tie operating modes senderized and cut through Enterprise Edge will only support senderized mode d Rates greater than 64 kbps will not be supported e Bell Canada VNET f Not all service types may be supported by a switch type For information contact your service provider Programming Call by Call on PRI requ
61. Settings screens 1 From the Status list box enable or disable the router 2 From the Packet Filtering list box enable or disable packet filtering 3 From the RIP Log Level list box select the RIP log level 4 Inthe Triggered Update Interval box type the triggered update interval 5 Press the TAB key to save the settings LAN Routing This section describes the instructions to configure LAN 1 interfaces for routing If there are other existing LAN or WAN interfaces they also appear in Routing Follow the same instructions to configure them 1 On the navigation tree click the Routing navigation key to expand the menu 2 On the navigation tree click LAN1 Clicking the LAN1 navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click LANI to view the available services to configure The Summary Input Filters Output Filters and Static Route screens appear Note The RIP Parameters screen is not displayed unless you choose RIP as your routing protocol in the LAN1 summary screen To display the RIP parameters click the Routing Protocol list box and choose RIP Then press the Tab key to update the screen A configurable RIP screen appears You configure the LAN1 and WAN1 WAN2 etc Routing Summary screen from Unified Manager P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 194 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services The Input Filters Output Filters and Static Route screens are configured through the
62. TOS bits for premium packets for DiffServ networks If this field is ignored Enterprise Edge uses a default value of OxB8 TOS for Priority Filters this field sets TOS for those packets matching a specific priority filter Note You can specify packets matched to a filter to go Priority Queue 0 8 Queue 0 is for premium packets and Queue 1 8 correspond to best effort priority classes 1 8 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 46 Using Enterprise Edge Services If you specify Queue 0 and a TOS bits for a filter then this TOS takes precedence over the TOS set for premium traffic for all packets that match this filter The default TOS for all best effort packets is 0x00 and the default queue for best effort packets is Queue 5 WARNING A Premium flows that are specified by priority are not admission controlled Unless you know the behavioral characteristics of a flow do not specify flows as premium Instead you can specify them as the highest B E traffic Consider the following guidelines when you set up priority filters e The fewer the conditions to check for the fewer CPU cycles are consumed Filter processing is faster if fewer conditions are specified without compromising the precision in selection e Ifyou don t need the value of a particular criterion such as source port number don t set a corresponding value for the filter e When you specify the layer 3 sub protoco
63. Type the data in the following dot format 255 255 255 255 Physical Address Shows the physical address of the WAN interface Description Shows the description of the network interface card that supports the WAN interface Version Shows the version indicator of the WAN interface Speed Shows the operational speed of the WAN interface P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 68 Configuring networking resources Attribute Description Status Shows the current resource status of the WAN interface The possible states are Up the resource is operational Down the resource is not operational Link Protocol Lets users specify PPP or frame relay protocol If you change the link protocol the configuration screen changes to include fields corresponding to the link protocol you choose To ensure proper operation always refresh the page by clicking View and then Refresh Compression Lets users enable or disable data compression Frame Size Lets users specify the maximum frame size for the layer 2 packet carried on this port To modify the configuration of the WAN1 or WAN2 summary screen 1 Inthe IP Address box type the IP address 2 Inthe SubNet Mask box type the subnet mask 3 From the Link Protocol list box choose Frame Relay or PPP Note If you choose Frame Relay press the Tab key to update the screen A configurable WAN Frame Relay Parameters
64. Voice Mail O Configuring Services attributes includes e DHCP on page 186 e DNS settings on page 192 e Routing on page 192 e SNMP on page 202 e QoS on page 206 e VolP Gateway on page 212 e QoS monitor on page 215 e Web cache on page 216 e Net Link Manager on page 217 e Call Detail Recording on page 218 e TAPI Service Provider on page 223 e Console Service on page 224 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 186 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services e Alarm Service on page 226 e Voice Mail on page 227 Viewing Enterprise Edge services DHCP To access the services settings 1 On the menu click Group and then click Services or Comprehensive 2 On the navigation tree click the Enterprise Edge key and then click Services The Enterprise Edge Services table appears which provides the name status version and description of the available services This is the same Services table that appears when you select Enterprise Edge System 3 Click the Services navigation key to expand the navigation tree Enterprise Edge provides DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol service to branch office clients This service dynamically assigns IP addresses to branch office PCs which frees the administrator from the need to manually assign an IP address to each PC To configure a DHCP server you must create a scope for each LAN interface in the Enterprise Edge and t
65. a busy tone or the call is forwarded to the prime set when the target line is busy Values To Prime Busy Tone Prime set Assigns a telephone to provide backup answering for calls on the line Values DN None Default DN 221 CLID set The Call Line Identifier CLID set prompt specifies which sets are capable of using the feature Values DN None Default None Auto privacy Defines whether one Enterprise Edge user can select a line in use at another telephone to join an existing call Values Y or N Default Y Trunk mode 2 Defines whether or not disconnect supervision also referred to as loop supervision is enabled Values Unspr Super Default Unspr Answer mode Defines whether a trunk is manual or automatic answer Values Manual Auto Default Manual Answer with DISA 34 Defines whether a caller is prompted for a six digit class of service COS password Values Y or N Default Y Link at CO Values Y or N Default N Use auxiliary ringer Allows you to turn the auxiliary ringer on or off Values Y or N Default N Full autohold gt Enables or disables full autohold When enabled if a caller selects an idle line but does not dial any digits that line is automatically placed on hold if you then select another line Values Y or N Default N Loss package Allows you to select the appropriate loss gain and impedance settings for each line Values
66. a manner that lets them communicate and interact with each other Long Tones A feature that lets you control the length of a tone so that you can signal devices such as fax or answering machines which require tones longer than the standard 120 milliseconds Lunch schedule See Schedules and Services M MAC The Media Access Control MAC is a physical address that is the portion of the data link layer in 802 x networks that controls addressing information of the packet and enables data to be sent and received across a local area network Maintenance A type of programming that is used to diagnose and repair problems in the Enterprise Edge system Maintenance requires no programmable settings Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 371 Mailbox A storage place for voice messages on Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging message A feature that allows you to send a message to another system user The Message feature also lets you know if you have any messages waiting and maintains a Message Waiting List to keep a record of your internal messages and your external voice mail messages MHz The abbreviation for megahertz This is a unit of measure indicating frequency in millions of cycles per second Microprocessor A chip that is the center of all activity inside the Enterprise Edge Server The microprocessor controls all logical and arithmetic operations for the computer and is
67. a telephone when settings are assigned during programming Disconnect Supervision A setting that enables the system to detect if an external caller hangs up Once an external caller hangs up the system can disconnect its line Disconnect Supervision is enabled under Trunk Line data in Lines programming Disk drive A mass storage device that seeks reads and writes data on a disk Display A one line or two line screen on an Enterprise Edge telephone that shows commands and options Display buttons The three buttons that appear underneath an Enterprise Edge two line LCD display Display options The choices available to a user that appear on the Enterprise Edge two line display Options appearing on the display can be selected using the display or dialpad buttons DLCI See Data link connection indentifier Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 361 DN See Directory number DNS See Domain Name Server domain name The domain name is used to organize Internet names into manageable groups such as nortelnetworks com Domain Name Server DNS The domain name system or domain name server is the system in the Internet that maps names of objects most usually host names into IP numbers or other resource record values The namespace of the Internet is divided into domains and the responsibility for managing names within each domain is delegated typically to systems withi
68. addressing 35 E EE DTM LEDs 294 electromagnetic compatibility 15 enabling module 255 Enbloc dialing 124 Enterprise Edge administration web based setting up 55 admission control 44 as a DHCP server 38 IP addresses setting up with a laptop 54 with a PC 54 IP routing information protocol 36 specifics 35 static 36 LAN connections overview 49 logging off 57 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide logging on 56 operational considerations 55 packet marking 45 rebooting 57 WAN connections backup 51 overview 49 permanent 50 frame relay 50 PPP 50 with Meridian M1 over PRI 304 Enterprise Edge Link programming 89 troubleshooting 291 Enterprise Edge Link settings 89 Enterprise Edge system networking 303 error messages 10 5 2 247 11 12 10 248 11 19 9 247 11 5 2 247 14 17 40 248 14 17 41 248 14 17 68 248 14 4 21 248 14 5 77 248 2 5 4 244 2 5 6 245 2 5 8 245 2 xx 4 245 2 xx 6 245 5 16 68 246 5 4 59 245 5 5 39 245 5 5 40 245 5 5 41 246 5 5 45 246 8 4 2 246 8 5 3 246 8 8 3 246 9 4 2 247 9 6 4 247 9 6 5 247 9 6 6 247 overview 244 user actions 244 Ethernet LAN connections 49 WAN connections backup 51 overview 49 permanent 50 frame relay 50 PPP 50 P0908508 Issue 02 evening schedule 127 event messages maintenance 261 significant 262 system restarts 264 exception see dialing restriction extended superframe 182 external lines access code 144 paging troubleshooting 292 external code progr
69. an error Note Companion alarm codes are displayed in the Windows NT event log Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 271 Provisioning Use the Provisioning selection under Maintenance to perform one of the following procedures Provision a T1 line on page 271 Provision a PRI line on page 271 Deprovision a line on page 271 Disable a PRI Channel on page 272 Provision a T1 line l 6 Choose Resources Telephony Provisioning Select a module Select the appropriate card The display shows the card type Select Provision lines All the available lines are displayed Select one of the lines If the line has not been provisioned the status box displays Deprovisioned Select Provisioned from the drop down menu Provision a PRI line ISDN lines are provisioned by default For more information on adding a EE DTM configured as PRI see Modules under Hardware Deprovision a line Deprovisioning all of the lines on an EE DTM does not disable the module 1 2 Choose Resources Telephony Provisioning Select a module Select the appropriate card The display shows the card type Select Provision lines All the available lines are displayed Select one of the lines If the line has been provisioned the status box displays Provisioned Select Deprovisioned from the drop down menu P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 27
70. and then click Delete Filter A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 211 3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager QoS Port Ranges To set the QoS port ranges 1 Click the QoS navigation key 2 On the navigation tree click PortRanges Clicking the Port Ranges navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click PortRanges The QoS PortRanges screen appears To modify port ranges 1 Inthe Port Ranges table click the port ranges you want to modify 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Port Ranges The Port Ranges dialog box appears 3 In the Begin box type the beginning value for the range This must be an even value 4 Inthe End box type the appropriate end value for the range 5 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To add port ranges 1 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Port Ranges The Port Ranges dialog box appears 2 Inthe PortRange box type the port range Type an entry that looks like Rxx where xx is a unique integer 3 Inthe Begin box type the beginning value for the range This must be an even value 4 Inthe End box type the ending value for the range 5 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager Note Ifthe rest of your network is not diffserv capable you can set
71. between the computer hardware Windows NT is the operating system that manages the Enterprise Edge Server Option An Enterprise Edge Server choice that is given to a user through display prompts OPX Off premise extension Out of Band Out of band is a method of device access which circumvents the network interface components within the device P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 374 Glossary overlay See Programming overlay overflow A setting in Routing Service that allows users to decide what path an outgoing call will take if all the lines used in a particular route are in use when the call is made Overrides One component of a restriction filter Overrides are numbers you can dial even if they are forbidden by a more general restriction See Restrictions P Packet A packet is the unit of data that is routed between an origin and a destination on the Internet or any other packet switched network When any file e mail message HTML file GIF file URL request and so forth is sent from one place to another on the Internet the Transmission Control Protocol TCP layer of TCP IP divides the file into pieces of an efficient size for routing Each of these packets is separately numbered and includes the Internet address of the destination The individual packets for a given file may travel different routes through the Internet When the packets have all arrived they are reassemb
72. by anyone else Note The default setting should be changed only if Full autohold is required for a specific application Loss package Loss package lets you select the appropriate loss gain and impedance settings for each line The setting is based on the distance between Enterprise Edge and the terminating switch and the terminating switch type When measuring the distance from Enterprise Edge to CO and from Enterprise Edge to PBX use 600 ohms as the termination resistance setting Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 105 Loss Receive Transmit Impedance Distance to switch cable Package Loss Loss loss terminating switch Short CO 0 dB 3 dB Short Short lt 2 dB Enterprise Edge to CO Medium CO 0 dB 0 dB TIA EIA 464 Medium gt 2 dB and lt 6 dB Enterprise Edge to CO Long CO 3 dB 0 dB TIA EIA 464 Long gt 6 dB Enterprise Edge to CO Short PBX 0 dB 0 dB Short Short lt 2 dB Enterprise Edge to PBX Long PBX 3 dB 0 dB TIA EIA 464 Long gt 2 dB Enterprise Edge to PBX A loss of 4 dB corresponds to a cable length of approximately2700 m 9000 ft Signalling Select the signal type for the line WinkStart Immediate and DelayDial The Signal setting appears on the window only for T1 E amp M or T1 DID lines Make sure that this matches the signal type programmed for the trunk at the other switch For T1 E amp M and T1 DID lines on an
73. cable problem Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 295 e Inservice flashing green indicates that the T1 or PRI trunks are out of service because of a running loopback test or because the EE DTM is being initialized e Loopback test red LED on while a continuity loopback test is running e All LEDs flashing continuously the EE DTM is being initialized 3 Inthe Unified Manager select Resources Telephony Maintenance and Tests to run any loopback tests as appropriate 4 Check the pinout of the cable that connects the EE DTM to the termination point from the T1 or PRI service provider or the external channel service unit and check that the cable is properly connected 5 Check with your T1 or PRI service provider to see if through fed repeaters are used on the T1 or PRI span The EE DTM does not provide the DC connection required for through fed repeaters If through fed repeaters are used on the T1 span disable the internal CSU and connect the EE DTM to an external CSU 6 Ifthe problem persists replace the EE DTM Notify service provider of T1 or PRI signaling disruption Notify your T1 or PRI service provider before disconnecting your T1 or PRI A lines removing power to your system or performing any other action that disrupts your T1 or PRI signaling Failure to notify your T1 or PRI service provider may result in a loss of T1 or PRI servi
74. call the manager at the Administration office in Dallas Once the line is selected the production supervisor dials the digits that will map onto the target line of the manager in Dallas Manager in T1 E amp M Target line Pallas Il FSH PBX in Houston Enterprise Edge Hardware Enterprise Edge an EE DTM with a T1 E amp M line Heading Parameter Setting Incoming trunk Trunk Line Data Received 4321 for target line 243 Line 061 T1 E amp M Answer Mode Auto Rec d length Received length 4 digits can be from 2 to 7 digits but must match number of digits sent by central office P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 334 Appendix A N etwork Examples Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to other nodes in the private network Ata branch office Joan selects a tie line to the main office downtown After hearing the dial tone she dials a line pool access code to select another tie line to a branch office in the next state Joan at branch office T1 E amp M line pool to next state T1 E amp M Enterprise Edge key system Hardware Enterprise Edge an EE DTM with four T1 E amp M lines 3 lines in the line pool and 1 incoming line Heading Parameter Setting Incoming trunk Trunk Line Data Line 061 T1 E amp M Answer mode
75. cell radio neighbor configurations Select Telephony Companion Radio Data Cells and select a cell number 01 to 32 Cell radios This subheading allows you to view the 5 digit number of any radios assigned to this cell For example if radio 07012 is in the cell 07012 assigned is displayed Select Telephony Companion Radio Data Cells Cell radios and enter the 5 digit radio number to view the setting Assigned or Unassigned Cell neighbors This subheading allows you to view the 2 digit number of any cells that border a particular cell ina system Select Telephony Companion Radio Data Cells Cell neighbors and enter the cell number to see the settings Assigned or Unassigned For example cell 01 Neighbour 03 and Neighbour 04 are displayed This means that cells 03 and 04 have been assigned as cell neighbors P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 170 Configuring Telephony Resources Cell radio neighbors This subheading allows you to view the 2 digit number of any cells that border a particular cell in a system the cell neighbors plus any cells that border the cell neighbors Select Telephony Companion Radio Data Cells Cell radio neighbors and enter the cell number to see the settings Assigned or Unassigned For example cell 01 Radio neighbour 03 Radio neighbour 04 are displayed and Radio neighbour 11 Cell 11 does not appear as a cell neighbor see the example under Cell neighbor theref
76. destination address and destination mask should be equal to destination address P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 198 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services Attribute Description Protocol Lets users specify the protocol to match the filter The choices are TCP look for the TCP protocol packets You can specify source and destination service ports in other fields If you don t specify any port numbers all packets that match this protocol and other criteria if any match the filter UDP look for UDP protocol packets You can further specify source and destination service ports in other fields If you don t specify any port numbers all packets that match this protocol and other criteria if any match the filter ICMP look for ICMP protocol packets You can further specify the ICMP message types and ICMP codes in other fields If you don t specify any ICMP types or codes all packets that match this protocol and other criteria if any match the filter Source port ICMP type If the protocol chosen is UDP or TCP this lets users specify the source port to match the filter If the protocol chosen is ICMP this field specifies the ICMP code value to look for in the packet to match the filter Destination Port ICMP Code If the protocol chosen is UDP or TCP this lets users specify the additional destination service port to match the filter If the protocol chosen is ICMP this field ca
77. digit of any DN including the Auto DN or the DISA DN To avoid a conflict refer to the table of default settings in the description of External code Carrier codes For information on Carrier codes and their use see page 124 Remote access Remote access packages allow you to control the remote use of Enterprise Edge line pools Create a remote access package by defining which of your system s line pools it will be able to access You then assign the package to individual lines using Remote line access and to a particular Class of Service password Remote package in COS passwords Remote access packages Select the remote access package you want to program Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 147 LinePool access Select Line Pool access and click Add Enter a line pool code and click Save Remote page Click Y or N to enable remote paging for each pool Remote line access Select the line number of the line which will be accessible by remote users Use Remote package Enter the number of the remote access package that will apply to remote use of the line Parameter PBX DID Package 00 Prohibits remote access to line pools Page remote monitoring and administration Cannot be changed Package 01 Line pool access Y for Pool A N for Pools B to O and PRI A to PRI F Packages 02 15 Line pool access N for Pools A to O a
78. equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Enterprise Edge must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections central office lines removed first For more information refer to the following sections e General troubleshooting information on page 281 e Problems with telephones on page 284 e Problems with lines on page 285 e Problems with optional equipment on page 291 e Problems with Trunk or Station Modules on page 295 e Problems for network or remote users on page 296 e Problems with Companion sets on page 302 General troubleshooting information e Getting ready on page 281 e Types of problems on page 282 e Basic troubleshooting procedure on page 282 Getting ready Before you begin troubleshooting gather all the information that is relevant to your network configuration such as P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 282 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system
79. events are not List reported as SNMP traps Depending upon the network and user environment a component in Enterprise Edge can generate events of no significance to you at regular intervals Adding that event s source name here prevents the generation of SNMP traps for that event To view the fault alarms refer to Viewing system performance and fault alarms on page 283 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 232 Configuring Management Settings Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 9 A maintenance session helps you diagnose problems that may occasionally arise within the Enterprise Edge system Maintenance sessions also allow you to determine how the system will deal with T1 digital lines and provides a means for provisioning and testing digital lines Perform your maintenance programming in the Unified Manager under the Maintenance selection For more information on maintenance procedures refer to e System startup on page 233 e Warm reset on page 234 e Backup and restore on page 234 e Enterprise Edge system diagnostics and utilities on page 241 e Maintenance programming for telephony resources on page 253 For information on hunt group and call by call usage metrics refer to Metrics on page 279 For information on physically moving telephones refer to Moving telephones on page 279 System startup A system startup replaces any exist
80. for an urgent call This feature is enabled for a telephone under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming Privacy This feature determines whether a system user may select a line in use at another telephone and join an established call Privacy is enabled under Trunk Line data in Lines programming but can be turned on and off by users during individual calls Private branch exchange PBX A PBX is a telephone system within an enterprise that switches calls between enterprise users on local lines while allowing all users to share a certain number of external phone lines The main purpose of a PBX is to save the cost of requiring a line for each user to the telephone company s central office The PBX is owned and operated by the enterprise rather than the telephone company Private line See Private to Private network A telephone network consisting of owned or leased telephone lines used to connect different offices of an organization independently of the public network P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 378 Glossary Private to Lets you select the telephone that will use the line exclusively The line cannot appear on any other telephone except the prime telephone for that line Private lines cannot be placed into line pools Private lines are assigned under Trunk Line data in Lines programming programming Setting the way the Enterprise Edge system will work Programming inclu
81. functionality Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging Adds voice messaging mailboxes Enterprise Edge Attendant Console Attendants server and reports functionality Enterprise Edge Networking Adds Voice Profile for Internet Messaging VPIM and Audio Messaging Interchange Specification Enterprise Edge Call Center Automatic Call Distribution system Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting Reporting software Enterprise Edge Router Enables IP based routing functionality Enterprise Edge PRI PRI trunks Enterprise Edge TSP Server TSP server seats P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 174 Configuring Telephony Resources Package Product Features amp functionality Enterprise Edge Companion Wireless Enables wireless telephone sets to be connected to Enterprise Edge Enterprise Edge Companion UTAM Activation Etiquette only Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging Centralized call management Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway IP telephony amp VoIP ports Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Hardware Configuring Telephony Resources 175 The Hardware heading allows you to view and change settings for trunk modules installed in Enterprise Edge The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Hardware programming map Hardware 9 Module 02 07 9 Trunk module Module type 9 Card 1 C
82. general this means sending voice information in digital form in discrete packets rather than in the traditional circuit committed protocols of the public switched telephone network PSTN A major advantage of VoIP and Internet telephony is that it avoids the tolls charged by ordinary telephone service In addition to IP VoIP uses the real time protocol RTP to help ensure that packets get delivered in a timely way Using public networks it is difficult to guarantee Quality of Service QoS P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 390 Glossary Using VoIP an enterprise positions a VoIP device at a gateway The gateway receives packetized voice transmissions from users within the company and then routes them to other parts of its intranet local area or wide area network or using a T 1 or E 1 interface sends them over the public switched telephone network W Wait for dial tone A feature that causes of sequence of numbers to pause until dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial The Wait for dial tone symbol amp uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence This feature requires a Services or Combo Cartridge Web cache A web cache is a server or collection of servers that store copies of Internet content The web cache server can be either located on the LAN where the clients it serves are also located or it can be embedded within the enterprise WAN or at the client s Inte
83. if the item is an event or alarm and includes the associated code The time the event or alarm occurred is displayed For more information on the event or alarm refer to Alarm codes on page 261 or Event messages on page 261 Note Alarms are also displayed in the Windows NT event log 4 Write down the item on the System administration log record and repeat these steps until you have recorded all the items Erase the log Note You cannot remove selected log items You only have the option of removing all the log items 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Network event log Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 261 2 Ifthe Unified Manager indicates that there are hidden subheadings double click on the heading to display all the items in the log If there are no log entries the Unified Manager will indicate that there are no hidden subheadings 3 Select the Del All button from above the left hand window The system displays a message indicating that this will remove all of the items 4 Select Yes to continue If new items have been added since the log items were displayed these new items are not erased Alarm codes The Enterprise Edge system generates alarm codes after system disconnections or after certain anomalies in system operation All alarm codes appear at the Alarm telephone in the System test log of a Maintenance session and in the Win NT event log For
84. in North America can be removed or Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 125 modified These defaults will handle most regions in North America without the need for additional programming e the table always contains one default entry this cannot be removed You can only modify the length parameter associated with this entry The default entry specifies the length of any dialing string that does not match one of the other table entries 1 Under Routing service Public DN lengths Prefix default Select a prefix 0 00 01 011 1 411 911 2 Under DN prefix enter the DN prefix number 2 digits 1 25 3 Under DN length enter a DN length number 2 digits 1 25 Private DN lengths The Private DN lengths parameter specifies the length of DNs in the private dialing plan This is used by all PRI calls where the route uses DN Type Private 1 Under Routing service Private DN lengths x 2 Select a different DN length 3 10 Schedules Indicate how the alternate routing should be activated for each of the schedules Dialing timeout Dialing timeout specifies how long Enterprise Edge will wait between user dialed digits This value allows Enterprise Edge to determine when the user has stopped dialing The value is programmed from the Routing service feature The user can also use the key to tell Enterprise Edge that they are finished dialing h
85. information on the following topics e Frame Relay e PPP The permanent WAN connections are provided by a WAN card that supports PPP and Frame Relay connections Each port can be configured to run either of the protocols independently The WAN cards are provided with one T1 port with in built CSU DSU and one serial sync port or dual serial sync port versions The Enterprise Edge serial sync port supports the following e Interfaces V 35 RS442 RS 323 X 21 e Maximum line speed 8 Mbit sec Frame Relay Enterprise Edge supports Frame Relay in group mode That is for each physical port serial sync or T1 port there is one IP address for all PVCs The available DLCI numbers are 0 1023 of which 16 are reserved The maximum number of PVC s allowed is 1008 For a Frame Relay network Enterprise Edge supports the Frame Relay Forum standard FRF 9 compression protocol with the standard STAC compression algorithm Software performs the compression which can be enabled or disabled by using Unified Manager PPP Point to Point Protocol PPP is a protocol for communication between two computers using a serial interface typically a personal computer connected by phone line to a server For example your Internet server provider can provide you with a PPP connection so that the provider s server can respond to your requests pass them on to the Internet and forward your requested Internet responses back to you PPP uses the Intern
86. interface Include area codes if any and all necessary digits to dial an external number Connect Rate Lets users specify the initial speed in bits per second for the modem to connect Set to the maximum permissible value for best results Permitted values 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 Note This is the initial rate actual rate is always negotiated Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring networking resources 75 Attribute Description Dial Retries Lets users specify the number of tries the system attempts to make a link operational before marking it non operational A positive number must be used Dial Interval Lets users specify the interval in seconds between successive attempts to make a link operational Speaker Mode Lets users enable or disable the speaker during initial link establishment IP Header Compression Lets users enable or disable IP header compression To function the receiving end must utilize this feature to work Software Compression Lets users enable or disable data compression in the software instead of the modem For dial up connections Unified Manager uses Microstate Point to Point Compression algorithm MPPC Hardware Compression Lets users enable or disable data compression in the hardware instead of the software PPP LCP Extensions Lets users specify whether or not to enable or di
87. lines to other nodes in the private network 334 Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network 335 Select T1 E amp M trunks to the private network 336 Enterprise Edge Line Redirection feature 336 PRI dialing plan example for 2 way DID 338 PRI DID and 2 way DID 338 Appendix B ISDN Overview 339 Welcome to ISDN 339 Analog versus ISDN 339 ISDN PRI channels 340 ISDN layers 340 ISDN Bearer capability 341 Services and features for ISDN PRI 341 ISDN hardware 344 Clock Source for ISDN 344 ISDN standards compatibility 345 Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada 345 Ordering ISDN PRI service in United States 345 Supported ISDN protocols 345 ISDN programming 345 Program ISDN equipment 347 Appendix C Setting Up Remote Routers 349 Creating an Outbound Traffic Filter 349 Sample Criteria Ranges and Actions for UDP Filtering 350 Glossary 351 Index 391 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 About this document 1 This guide explains how to program your Enterprise Edge system For more information on the Enterprise Edge document suite refer to Related documents on page 12 Note The Enterprise Edge system regulatory information is summarized in Regulations on page 13 Software licensing information is contained in Software licensing on page 18 W hat s new in this document How This release includes the following additional information e Data programming information previousl
88. making outgoing calls When Link at CO is enabled the system applies the restrictions on outgoing calls to the digits dialed after the Link signal and the call on the alternative line will be subject to all restrictions Disabling Link at CO prevents a Link signal from resetting the Enterprise Edge restrictions in cases where the host exchange does not provide an alternative line Use auxiliary ringer This setting allows you to turn the auxiliary ringer on or off An auxiliary ringer can be programmed on a line or a set When programmed on a line the auxiliary ringer will ring every time a call is received When programmed only on a set the auxiliary ringer will not ring when a transferred call is received Tips The auxiliary ringer is an optional device that should be connected by the installer If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on an external line and you transfer a call on that line without announcing the transfer the auxiliary ringer will ring for the call transfer An auxiliary ringer can also be programmed in Services to ring for a line placed into a scheduled Ringing service Full autohold Full autohold on idle line is a variation of the Automatic Hold feature If you select an idle line but do not dial any digits that line is automatically placed on hold if you then select another line The line you first selected is held until you press its button The line is not available for use
89. means that there is no established connection between the end points that communicate Each packet that travels through the Internet is treated as an independent unit of data without any relation to another unit of data The packets get put in the right order because TCP the connection oriented protocol keeps track of the packet sequence in a message In the Open Systems Interconnection OSI communication model IP is in layer 3 the Networking Layer Enterprise Edge IP routing specifics Using Enterprise Edge Unified Manager you can perform the following routing configuration options e Add or delete the interfaces to routing protocols e Configure routing protocol options e Add and delete static routes e Add or delete filters e Set filter actions For instructions on configuring routing options see Routing on page 192 The followings table shows the Enterprise Edge IP routing protocols and the precedence order when conflict or redundant routes occur Precedence IP Routing Protocols l Static Routing 2 SNMP 3 RIP v1 and v2 IP Addressing Overview IP addresses follow the format nnn nnn nnn nnn where nn is a number between 0 and 255 for example 192 123 4 56 or 10 1 1 1 IP addresses enable computers to communicate to each other Both servers and workstations on a network must have IP addresses There are two types of IP addresses Dynamic A dynamic IP address changes Dynamic IP addresses are
90. must appear on that telephone but it does not have to be a ringing line Click Y or N to enable call logging Voice Message setting If you subscribe to a voice message service you can access that service through your Enterprise Edge system The external voice message setting controls whether the indicator shows up when there is a voice message waiting on a particular line The line must appear on that telephone Click Y or N to enable voice messaging To find out if your voice message service will work with Enterprise Edge or if you have any problems with your service contact your voice message service provider First Display Depending on the services you subscribe to Call Display information may contain the number of the caller the name of the line in your Enterprise Edge system that the call is on or both For each telephone you can determine which information is displayed first Select the setting Name Number or Line Tips The Call Information feature is used to display and toggle between the name and line number used for Call Display information You may see Unknown number on the display if the information is not available from your telephone company You may see Private number on the display if the caller blocks that information Auto called ID Auto called ID allows you to see the extension number and name of the set being called on the display The Auto called ID set for target lines is the same set that h
91. must assign one EE DTM as the primary reference and one as the secondary reference Clock Source for ISDN Systems with ISDN interfaces need to synchronize clocking with the ISDN network Systems synchronize clocking to the first functionally available network connection If there are excessive errors on the reference network connection the next available network connection is used for clock synchronization The clock synchronization process generates alarm codes and event messages Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix B ISDN Overview 345 ISDN standards compatibility Enterprise Edge ISDN equipment supports National ISDN standards for basic call and calling line identification services Enterprise Edge PRI is compliant with National ISDN 2 Enterprise Edge does not support EKTS Electronic Key Telephone System CACH Call Appearance Call Handling or Calling Name Display Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada In Canada order Megalink service the trade name for standard PRI service and set the Enterprise Edge equipment to the supported protocol that is identified by your service provider either DMS 100 or NI 2 Ordering ISDN PRI service in United States In the United States order PRI service from your service provider Set the Enterprise Edge equipment to the PRI protocol indicated by your service provider Supported ISDN protocols The switch used by your service provider must be run
92. network frame relay A frame relay is a high speed packet switching WAN protocol designed to provide efficient high speed frame or packet transmission with minimum delay Frame relay uses minimal error detection and relies on higher level protocols for error control P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 364 Glossary FTP The file transfer protocol FTP allows a user on one host to access and transfer files to and from another host over a network On the Internet FTP refers to a tool for accessing linked files Full Autohold on idle line When this feature is on if you select an available line and then do something that selects another line the first line is put on hold Full Autohold is enabled under Trunk Line data in Lines programming Full Handsfree See Handsfree Fully Qualified Domain Name FQ DN The combination of host name and domain name For example mycomputer nortelnetworks com is Fully Qualified Domain Name G Ground Start trunk Ground start trunks offer the same features as loop start trunks but are used when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks By configuring lines as ground start the system will be able to recognize when a call is released at the far end Ground start trunks are provided only by a Digital Trunk Interface DTI Group Listening A feature that allows you to have others in your o
93. network connected via Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging systems must have Enterprise Edge Networking enabled before receiving or sending network messages Meridian Mail systems must be equipped with Meridian Mail Net Gateway before receiving or sending network messages Enterprise Edge Networking uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP to exchange the messages For more information refer to the Configuring networking resources on page 63 Enterprise Edge Call Center The Enterprise Edge Call Center application is designed to handle incoming calls efficiently and economically Incoming calls are distributed to available agents or to Enterprise Edge greetings in your call center To ensure that each call is handled successfully the Enterprise Edge Call Center system answers plays greetings and routes each incoming call to the first available agent in the order of the call s arrival For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting is a Windows software application that provides Real Time statistics and comprehensive management information on the day to day performance of your Enterprise Edge system Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting helps you manage call traffic and provides a comprehensive range of management reports that provides critical information for accurate bu
94. of Phone Ports box type the number of phone ports 9 Press the Tab key to save the settings QoS performance graphs and tables To access QoS performance graphs and tables 1 On the menu click Performance and then click QoS Session Graph The QoS Performance Graph appears Note For information on using performance tables and graphs refer to Graphs and tables on page 243 2 On the menu click Performance and then click QoS Session Table The QoS Performance Table appears 3 Access the remaining QoS graphs and QoS tables by following the steps for QoS Session Graphs and Tables QoS filters To set the QoS filters 1 Click the QoS navigation key to expand the navigation tree 2 On the navigation tree click Filters Clicking the Filters navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Filters The Filters Configuration and Filters screens appear 3 In the Filter Configuration box type the filter configuration 4 Press the Tab key to save the settings To modify QoS filters 1 In the Filter table click the filer you want to modify 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Filter The Filters dialog box appears 3 Make changes to any setting that you want to modify 4 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 210 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services To add QoS filters l 10 11 12 13 O
95. or 600 700 feet Default 000 100 Line coding Allows you to define the encoding signals on a T1 line Select the standard used by your T1 service provider Contact your T1 service provider for the proper setting Values B8ZS or AMI Default B8ZS Interface levels Interface levels defaults to the ISDN loss plan setting Find out if your Enterprise Edge system is connected to a central office CO with digital network loss treatment ISDN I F levels or analog network loss treatment PSTN I F levels by checking with your telecommunications service provider The ISDN setting requires digital access lines DAL that have digital network loss treatment On a DAL network it is the PBX rather than the CO that administers the dB loss DALs may have ISDN signaling or digital such as T1 and so on signaling The loss plan follows the Draft TIA 464 C loss plan which uses a send loudness rating SLR of 8 dB To have DAL network loss treatment on a line with digital signaling you must contact your service provider The PSTN setting requires analog access lines AAL that have analog network loss treatment and digital signaling On an AAL D network the CO administers the dB loss Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 183 The loss plan follows the Draft TIA 464 C loss plan The ISDN loss plan uses a send loudness rating SLR of 8 dB and a receive loudness rating
96. possible speed of the connection Depending upon the connected device the interface can choose 100 MB or 10MB full duplex or half duplex The receiving end s speed and connection type determines the mode of transmission For example if the receiving end is another PC port or a bridge switch port the full duplex of operation is possible if the receiving end is a shared media port like hub port only half duplex mode is possible 10 MB Half Speed is set to 10 MB s and mode to half duplex 10 MB Full Speed is set to 10 MB s and mode to full duplex 10 MB Auto The speed is set to 10 MB s and the mode is automatically chosen by the interface using auto negotiation protocol This mode is chosen to limit the maximum traffic coming into Enterprise Edge to 10 MB s while enabling the auto negotiation feature for easier interconnection Usually you limit the incoming traffic if you notice that the bursty traffic from the connected LAN is degrading the quality of voice calls carried through VoIP over WAN Though the LAN traffic gets lower priority in Enterprise Edge their high rate of arrival to the Enterprise Edge server generates too may interrupts in the system that cause degraded quality in voice calls carried as VoIP 100 MB Half Speed is set to 100 MB s and mode to half duplex 100 MB Full Speed is set to 100 MB s and mode to full duplex Status Lets users view the current status of the LAN interface The possible s
97. resource Description The description column gives a brief description of the interface for each configurable resource 3 Click the Resources navigation key to expand the navigation tree P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 64 Configuring networking resources Configuring LAN settings You configure LAN resource settings from Unified Manager If your Enterprise Edge server has more than one LAN interface multiple items appear under LAN resources To configure other LAN interfaces follow the instructions given here for LAN1 1 Choose LAN from the navigation tree to view the available LAN resources to configure The available LAN interfaces e g LAN1 appear in table format Note Clicking the LAN navigation key expands the navigation tree but doesn t display the summary of configurable LAN resources 2 Click the LAN navigation key to expand the navigation tree 3 On the navigation tree click LAN1 Clicking the LAN1 navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click LAN1 The LAN Summary screen for the LAN interface appears The following table lists and describes the attributes that the LAN Summary screen shows Attribute Description IP Address Lets users specify the IP address of the LAN interface Type the address in the following format 255 255 255 255 The value for this field is valid only if the LAN interface is enabled SubNet Mask Lets users speci
98. screen appears 4 From the Compression list box select to enable or disable compression 5 Inthe Frame Size box type the frame size 6 Press the TAB key to save your settings WAN Primary Link Line Parameters Scroll down from the WAN Summary screen to find the WAN Line Parameters screen The WAN Line Parameters attributes are Attribute Description Channel Rate Lets users set the data rate for each of the DSO channels in the T1 line Clock Source Lets users set an internal or external T1 clock source Frame Type Lets users set the type of framing to be adopted in the T1 line You can select either SF D4 or ESF for the frame type SF D4 transmits superframes consisting of 12 individual frames ESF transmits superframes consisting of 24 individual D4 frames and provides enhanced signaling and synchronization ESF lets you test the digital line while it is in use Always use the frame type that the equipment at the receiving end expects Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring networking resources 69 Attribute Description Line Coding Lets users set the type of encoding used in the T1 line You can select either B8ZS or AMI for this parameter B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution line coding replaces a block of eight consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit B8ZS code containing bipolar violations in the fourth and seventh bit positions of
99. select ALL the NSF extension is always set for all CbC services B channel selection sequence B channel selection sequence allows you to select either Ascending Sequential or Descending Sequential depending on your service provider You should choose the opposite setting of your service provider Note If all lines for two EE DTMs configured as PRI are in the same PRI pool then both cards must be set to use the descending B channel selection sequence As a result the service provider must use ascending sequential sequence Clock Source Clock Source lets you designate which of the systems Digital Trunk Modules EE DTMs obtains the timing reference from the network to be used for synchronization Systems with digital interfaces need to synchronize to the network in order to function Synchronization is done in a hierarchical way where each device switch obtains the network clock from the device above it in the synchronization hierarchy and passes the network clock to the device below it in the synchronization hierarchy The synchronization levels are referred to as strata Enterprise Edge systems are stratum 4E equipment and are usually used as termination points in a network For each EE DTM choose one of the following settings Primary Secondary or Master Primary reference The EE DTM obtains the timing reference from the network and the system synchronizes to it This is the default value for the first EE D
100. source address 4 Inthe Source Mask box type the source mask 5 Inthe Destination Address box type the destination address Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 199 6 In the Destination Mask box type the destination mask 7 From the Protocol list box select the response 8 Inthe Source Port ICMP Type box type the source port ICMP type 9 Inthe Destination Port ICMP Type box type the destination port ICMP type 10 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To add LAN input filters 1 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Input Filter The Input Filter dialog box appears 2 Inthe Input Filter box type the input filter 3 Inthe Source Address box type the source address 4 Inthe Source Mask box type the source mask 5 Inthe Destination Address box type the destination address 6 In the Destination Mask box type the destination mask 7 From the Protocol list box select the response 8 Inthe Source Port ICMP Type box type the source port ICMP type 9 Inthe Destination Port ICMP Type box type the destination port ICMP type 10 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete LAN1 input filters 1 Click a filter in the Filter table 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete Input Filter A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion 3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletio
101. system initiates a cold start If a restore fails to complete due to an error the system will initiate a cold start This means that all programming will be lost and all programming settings will be returned to the factory defaults Ensure the restore is completed successfully A restore replaces all existing programming for a Enterprise Edge system A failed restore can shut down a Enterprise Edge system and telephone service to a Site so it is important to ensure the restore is completed successfully 1 Start the Backup and Restore tool by choosing Resources Telephony The Tools menu option is enabled 2 Click Tools Restore Note If you restore any programming which has been enabled by software keys you may have to re enter the keys after the restore A confirmation dialog is displayed asking if you wish to start now 0S Click Yes to start When you initiate a restore there is a period of a minute or longer while the restore action is initiated When a restore is in progress the text shows the current action and the file name For example Restoring System Programming into file Fnvram new The system also displays the percentage of programming that has been restored It does not appear unless a restore is occurring When the restore is complete the system automatically restarts P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 240 Maintenance Note When a restore is in prog
102. the lines in Pool PRI A in a toll bypass scenario In other words you must give package 01 access to pool PRI A and you must assign package 01 to all IP trunks For more information see Remote access packages on page 146 Other networking examples This section shows sample configurations for different types of network access Each example has four parts e A scenario explains the caller s goal and what is required to achieve it e A diagram shows the network configuration that supports the application e A list shows the Enterprise Edge hardware required to support the configuration e Tables show the programming required Only those settings that are important to network access are described here Note The ability to perform private networking is only available with Enterprise Edge software keycodes Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 331 Public network Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones Ms Nelson is a bank customer who has a question for an accountant She dials the telephone number 555 4321 that maps onto target line 241 All of the accountants telephones ring Accountant Target line telephone 225 Ms Nelson 241 Tx Ma Oo l l Enterprise Edge gt _S Target line EHE E 241 5E Accountant telephone 226 Central Office Hardware Enterprise Edge an EE DTM with lines programmed as DID
103. the Enterprise Edge server power switch 2 Connect a PC or laptop computer to the Enterprise Edge server RS 232 port 3 Start a hyperterminal on the PC or laptop computer 4 Enter the LAN WAN IP address and other parameters Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 55 To set up the Enterprise Edge server IP address using a LAN 1 Turn on the Enterprise Edge server power switch 2 Connect a laptop to the Enterprise Edge server by Ethernet back to back by using a crossover cable to avoid disturbing the corporate LAN 3 Set your PC or laptop computer IP address to 10 10 10 2 with a mask 255 255 255 0 4 Start a web browser on your laptop with a URL of 10 10 10 1 Setting up web based administration To establish web based administration a workstation must be set up as an Enterprise Edge client with Internet Explorer 4 0 or greater and a JAVA Virtual Machine JVM 5 0 0 2922 or greater installed To install JVM on a workstation search the Microsoft information web page for instructions These minimum PC requirements are discussed in Enterprise Edge specifications Note The ideal display for a monitor attached to Enterprise Edge is 1280 x 1024 Browser settings Set your browser as follows Program Required Settings Netscape Communicator 4 5 Click Settings Edit Preferences or greater Category Advanced set Enable Java On set Category
104. the criteria specified in the filter The priority value has significance only within the IP interface the packet is related and is relative to other packets that go out through the interface 0 is the highest priority and 8 the lowest priority Use caution when you assign priority If you assign priority 0 for regular data traffic it is possible that the quality of voice calls that go through this interface are degraded Use priority 0 only if your WAN does not carry any voice calls As a guideline always start assigning priorities from the lowest level up Outbound DS Code Lets users specify the new DS Code added to the packets that match this filter If you don t want to change the DS Code in the packets going out through the interface don t specify any value for this setting If a value is specified this setting lets Enterprise Edge change the DS code on outgoing packets This lets Enterprise Edge be used as a marker device on the edge of a diffserv capable network 2 Inthe Description box type the description 3 Inthe Version box type the version 4 From the Status list box select enable or disable 5 Inthe Premium Bandwidth box type the appropriate premium bandwidth 6 From the Video Class list box select the video class 7 Inthe Premium DS Code box type the premium DS code Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 209 8 In the Number
105. the module is enabled The Configuration menu option is enabled Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 255 3 Select the Configuration menu The drop down menu displays the Disable selection Select Disable The system displays a warning that this action will disable the entire module and all of its devices Click OK The system disables the module in one minute or immediately if the status is idle Press Cancel to leave this display without disabling the module Enable a module Use the following procedure to enable a disabled module 1 2 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Module port status Select the module you wish to enable The State box indicates that the module is disabled and the Configuration menu is enabled Select Configuration The drop down menu displays the Enable selection Select Enable The system displays a messaging indicating that the module is being enabled Identify a device connected to the system You may wish to check a device s version number for compatibility with the system Use the following procedure to display status information for any device connected to the system 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Module port status The window displays Modules 01 through to 07 For more information on how modules are numbered refer to Hardware on page 175 Select one of the modules Select Ports on module Select
106. total number of lines depends on the number and type of trunk media bay modules installed P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 370 Glossary Line Pool A group of lines used for making external calls Line pools provide an efficient way of giving a telephone access to external lines without taking up many line buttons A line is assigned to be part of a line pool under Trunk Line data in Lines programming Line Redirection A feature that allows you to redirect all calls on an incoming line to a destination outside the system Once a line is redirected it cannot be answered within the system The system may be set up to give a brief ring when a call comes in on a redirected line under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming This feature differs from Call Forward in two ways It redirects only external calls not internal calls and it redirects calls to destinations outside the system Call forward redirects calls only to destinations inside the system See Call Forward Link If your Enterprise Edge system is connected to a Private Branch Exchange PBX you can use a Link signal to access special features The Link signal can also be included as part of a longer stored sequence on an External Autodial button or in a Speed Dial code The Link symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence Local Area Network LAN A group of computers or Enterprise Edge Servers physically connected in
107. use Feature for accessing features on a remote Enterprise Edge system 2 Make sure that the remote user is dialing tones not pulses once the call is answered Dialed number gets ringback and the wrong person Possible problem The digits sent by a switch at a central office or in the private network did not match any Received number or the Auto DN The call has been routed to the prime telephone for the incoming trunk Solution 1 Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits for the Received number length defined in your system 2 Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending 3 Check that you have defined the corresponding Received number for every target line in your system 4 Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your network are correct Dialed number gets dial tone instead of ringback Possible problem The remote caller has tried to reach an Enterprise Edge target line but has reached the Enterprise Edge system instead The system has mapped the incoming digits onto the Auto DN P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 298 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system Solution 1 Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending 2 Check that you have defined the corresponding Received number for every target line in your system 3 Check that you have defined the correct Auto DN for your system 4 Make sure that
108. warning dialog box 240 common settings 126 Companion troubleshooting 302 Companion programming Call Pickup 171 cell assignment 169 neighbours 169 radio neighbour 170 radios 169 disabling registration 166 enabling registration 166 Group Pickup 171 recommended settings 170 re evaluation 168 re evaluation status 168 configuring management settings alarm manager overview 231 user manager overview 229 configuring resource settings introduction 63 LAN 64 WAN backup links access parameters 76 link parameters 74 overview 73 summary parameters 74 WAN primary links access parameters 67 frame relay parameters 70 line parameters 68 overview 66 performance graphs and tables 73 PPP parameters 73 configuring service settings alarm service overview 226 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide DHCP LAN 187 overview 186 DNS overview 192 introduction 185 NetLink manager overview 217 QoS filters 209 overview 206 performance graphs and tables 209 port ranges 211 QoS monitor mean opinion score 216 overview 215 routing LAN 193 overview 192 WAN 201 SNMP community list 203 manager list 203 overview 202 trap community list 203 Tapi service provider overview 223 voice mail overview 227 voice record access suppress settings 223 market parameters 221 overview 218 prefix settings 222 report options 220 voice service 224 VoIP Gateway 212 overview 212 Web cache overview 216 configuring system settings date 61 faul
109. you to assign dialing filters to room sets based on the room occupancy status The Vacant state indicates that the room is empty The Basic Mid and Full states indicate that the room is occupied The default dialing filter for all Room occupancy states Vacant Basic Mid and Full is 00 The dialing filters are standard the Restriction filters used in Enterprise Edge Filters 00 99 For more information see Restriction filters on page 108 To assign dialing filters 1 Choose Resources Telephony General settings Hospitality Call permissions 2 Type a 2 digit filter number in the Vacant Basic Mid or Full box and press Enter P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 158 Configuring Telephony Resources Alarm data The Alarm data heading allows you to program the following alarm settings e Attempts The number of times the Alarm time feature attempts to alert the occupant before cancelling e Retry interval The interval period in minutes between each attempt e Alarm duration The period in seconds for which a set alerts for each alarm attempt Time format The hour format to be used 12 hour or 24 hour To define the alarm data 1 Choose Resources Telephony General settings Hospitality Alarm data 2 Click an Attempts value 1 to 5 and press Enter The default value is 3 attempts 3 Click a Retry interval value 2 to 9 and press Enter The default value is 4 minutes 4 Click a
110. 08 user filter 131 link parameters WAN 74 link time 138 140 log network evt 260 space number of spaces 94 programming 94 space allocation 142 system administration 259 system test 257 logging off of Enterprise Edge 57 logging on to Enterprise Edge 56 logon definitions configure 57 download 57 login 57 password 57 upload 57 loop start trunk remote access from public network 306 loopback test starting 273 loss package 104 loss gain settings 104 lunch schedule 127 M M7100 telephone accessing external lines 144 M7324 telephone CAP 143 maintenance alarm codes 261 bipolar violations 277 carrier failure alarms 277 CSU stats 274 disabling module cartridges 254 enabling the module 255 event messages 261 identify device connected to system 255 module 254 network event log 260 programming system administration log 258 P0908508 Issue 02 provisioning 271 short term alarms 277 system administration log 258 test log 257 version 253 mean opinion score QoS monitor 216 Meridian 1 316 Message sending 141 MIB IT counters 249 variables 249 module enabling 255 showing inventory 254 troubleshooting 302 moving telephones see automatic telephone relocation music license 16 source 16 N name system 58 National ISDN standards 345 NetLink manager settings overview 217 network configuration samples 330 337 coordinated dialing plan 310 event log 260 options with Enterprise Edge 303 private 333 private systems to
111. 08 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 54 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system Users must enter the following parameters Initial IP and mask for all network interfaces Primary and optional secondary DNS servers Default next hop router Fractional T1 channel numbers if you are using fractional TI System name WAN Link Protocol Frame Relay DLCI CIR if applicable V 90 modem dial up username and password if applicable V 90 modem dial up phone number and optional alternate phone number if applicable The following table describes the Enterprise Edge server connectivity options Field Definition HTTP You can launch your JAVA enabled browser to connect to the Enterprise Edge server IP address that connects to your PC This displays the log in screen See the Enterprise Edge login screen on page 56 TTY You can connect a dumb terminal to the console of the Enterprise Edge server through an RS 232 cross over cable or you can use Hyperterminal from Win95 Win NT systems Refer to the installation guide for console menus Setting up an Enterprise Edge IP Address To manage the Enterprise Edge server using a web browser or a Telnet connection you must first set up the IP address The Enterprise Edge server LAN interface is shipped with default IP 10 10 10 1 and mask 255 255 255 0 To set up the Enterprise Edge server initial IP address using a RS 232 port l Turn on
112. 2 Maintenance Disable a PRI Channel PRI channels can be disabled however there is no association between a line number and a b channel Disabling of a b channel can be done when you have fractional PRI For more information refer to Link Status on page 278 Tests Enterprise Edge allows you to run tests which verify the integrity of the installation wiring for the telephone sets Before you run any tests use the procedure DN to port conversion on page 274 to determine the port that is associated with a particular DN Choose an appropriate time to run tests A good time to run tests is after office hours The following messages may appear on the Alarm Telephone during Loopback tests Message Explanation EVT 210 YYYZ Loopback test YYY on Trunk module Z has started EVT 211 YYYZ Loopback test YYY on Trunk module Z has ended Loopback tests are started and stopped in Maintenance programming under the heading Tests Only one test at a time can be run on an EE DTM You can exit Maintenance or move on to another programming task while the loopback test is running While the loopback test is running the green in Service LED on the EE DTM flashes If the internal CSU is administered on a line loopback and payload loopback tests can also be invoked and stopped by the central office In order to be able to run a payload loopback test the EE DTM must be configured for extended superframe format
113. 27 No 851 No 328 No 882 No 329 No 883 No 330 No 900 No 336 No 940 943 No 373 No 950 989 No P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 266 Maintenance Companion event messages Table 1 Event messages Event message display Etiz 5 3546 55 Evtisei 1831 53 Evt 382 1831 55 Evt i3031 631 3 Evtis84 1832 Evtis65 61 632 55 Eutiz06 61631 55 Evi ise7 Biasige 53 Cause U S only Unable to activate all registered portables The system ran out of portable credits One event is generated per portable that failed to activate The repetition of the corresponding alarm code 59 indicates how many additional credits must be purchased The Base Station on port 0103 in this case cannot successfully receive the data image Both radios belonging to the Base Station are disabled This may occur if the flash EEPROM is faulty Two events are raised one for the B1 channel radio as in this case and another for the B2 channel radio A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs The Base Station on port 0103 in this case cannot be written to during data transfer Both radios belonging to the Base Station are disabled The Base Station s flash EEPROM is faulty Two events are raised one for the B1 channel radio as in this case and another for the B2 channel radio A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs The Base Station on port 0103 in this case cannot be synchronized with the other Base Statio
114. 508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 101 Tips VoIP requires 7 digit dialing If you use less than 7 digits users must enter a sign to indicate that they have completed their dialing For more information see Dialing timeout on page 125 Line type This setting specifies how the line is to be used in relation to other lines in the system Select the setting Public Private to or Pool A to O representing 15 line pools or PRI A to PRI F e A Public line can be accessed by more than one telephone e A Private line can be assigned only to one telephone and the prime telephone for that line Enter the internal number of the telephone e Pool assigns the line to one of the fifteen line pools Ifa line is assigned to a line pool but is not assigned to any telephone that line is available only for outgoing calls Tips Line pools must never contain a mixture of lines All lines in a given line pool should go to the same location Try to avoid putting unsupervised loopstart lines in a line pool These lines can become hung especially when a remote user uses the line pool to make an external call There are two more programming settings that must be assigned before a line pool can be used e You must assign line pool access to telephones in Line access programming e You must assign system wide line pool access codes in General settings not applicable to PRI pools P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise
115. 56 kbps down to 1200 bps Note The modem is capable of receiving at up to 56 kbps and sending at up to 31 2 kbps Because of FCC regulations receiving speeds are limited to 53 kbps The actual speed can vary depending on factors such as current line noise P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 52 Using Enterprise Edge Services Backup WAN Links Enterprise Edge supports Microsoft Point to Point Compression MPPC and RFC 2118 for traffic across dial up links The compression ratio of MPPC is approximately 4 or 5 to 1 For the remote backup Enterprise Edge supports the following authentication mechanisms e Password Authentication Protocol PAP e Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP This protocol is a more secure procedure for connecting to a system than the PAP The system attempts CHAP before using PAP Software data compression on backup dial up link is an optional feature in Enterprise Edge The default is set to ENABLE data compression Note Remote user dial in as an RAS client is supported for administrative purposes only Guidelines for Using Remote Dial in Consider the following guidelines when using remote dial in e The same modem is shared between the remote dial in for administration and the backup WAN link If a remote administration user is connected while the primary link breaks the automatic backup function does not occur e While using the back up interface En
116. 6 For every event message that you see P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 262 Maintenance 1 Refer to Significant event messages on page 262 2 Determine if the event caused the system to automatically restart For more information refer to the table on Event Message on page 264 Significant event messages The following table lists event messages that are relevant to maintenance activities Event message The event message is recorded when Evt 210 YYYZ S4 Loopback test YYY on Trunk module Z has been started Evt 211 YYYZ S4 Loopback test YYY on Trunk module Z has been stopped Evt 220 3546 S4 the Sys admin log has been cleared by the DN 3546 in this case Evt 221 3546 S4 the Sys test log has been cleared by the DN 3546 in this case Evt 222 3546 S5 the DN 3546 in this case enters the debugging facility that is password protected Evt 255 S9 administered mode is not supported by the module plugged into the slot Evt 260 0302 S8 the system takes the access line on port 0302 out of service because no current was detected Evt 261 0302 Sl the access line on port 0302 is returned to service after current was detected see Evt 260 Evt 268 07 S8 Dialing filter 07 has lost data due to a fault in the system memory Evt 269 3546 S8 the Line set filter for the DN 3546 in this case has lost data due to a fault in the system memory Evt 299 S1 the system powers up after a power fa
117. 9 6 4 9 6 5 9 6 6 The object was not found There was an error in setting lt object Name gt Reason This error can happen while setting a community string entry manager address or trap community entry Each entry takes a characteristic key field as the first field that should follow certain conventions and a unique number within the class If that unique number is 0 or less this error happens Specify correct number for the key field name 10 5 2 This is an invalid data value for requested data Reason This can happen happens when user enters values into a dialog box and clicks Save on it If any of the fields had some strict format specified for it say dotted format for an IP address and if you entered a wrong value it would beep when you tab out of the field If you ignored that beep the GUI would reject the field and when you clicked Save it didn t send the field to the Enterprise Edge system there by causing this problem Follow the rules precisely and pay particular attention to beeps If your IP Address has only 1 digit prefix them with Os in order to make them 3 digit in each segments of the dotted notation If the screen has a scroll bar scroll and enter all the necessary values 11532 This is an invalid data value for password Reason The user was changing a user profile and the password entered in password and confirm password fields do not match Match
118. 9 setting P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 220 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 3 From the Format list box select the format 4 From the Report Type list box select the report type 5 Click the Language list box select the language 6 From the Report Filter list box select the report filter 7 From the Feature Code F9 box select the feature code 8 Press the Tab key to save the settings To configure commit and clip files 1 On the menu click Configuration and then click Commit Report options To set Call Detail Recording report options 1 On the navigation tree click Services Call Detail Recording Report Options Clicking the Report Options navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Report Options The Report Options screen appears The Call Detail Recording report options are Attribute Description Date Format Lets users specify the date format on voice mails recorded from MM DD YY DD MM YY YY MM DD The default date format is MM DD YY Header Format Lets users specify the header format for the recorded messages from Line Station always reports the Line number first followed by the station number Source Destination reports the source of the call followed by the destination of call Incoming calls are reported in Line Station format Outgoing calls are reported in Station Line format The default he
119. AN Graph Statistic Chart appears 2 On the menu click Performance and then click WAN Table The WAN Table Statistic Table appears For information on using the WAN statistic chart and the WAN statistic table refer to Graphs and tables on page 243 WAN Backup Links WAN3 and WAN4 are dial up interfaces that are configured according to the V 90 modem in the Enterprise Edge server You must click WAN3 to see its description Dial up WAN Links always use PPP as the link layer protocol For proper operation the links must be connected to PPP capable RAS Servers that can run RIP or can accept static routes To view the WAN backup link parameters 1 On the navigation tree click WAN3 The WAN Summary WAN Link Parameters and WAN Access Parameters screens appear Note Clicking the WAN3 navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click WAN3 2 Scroll to see any settings that are not displayed P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 74 Configuring networking resources WAN Backup Summary Parameters The WAN Summary contains these settings Setting Definition IP Address Lets users set the IP address of the modem interface when it connects Users can set a fixed IP Address for the dial up interface If a fixed address is specified it is used by Enterprise Edge to connect to the receiving end Alternatively users can choose RemoteAssigned to indicate that Enterprise Edge
120. After you select the desired components BRU creates a ready to run Windows NT script file that can be executed immediately or at a scheduled time and date You launch the BRU utility after starting a virtual network computing VNC session The VNC desktop sharing utility supplied with Enterprise Edge allows you to access the desktop of the Enterprise Edge server from another computer For more information refer to Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide BRU provides additional functionality that complements the Unified Manager telephony programming backup and restore features The backup and restore tool in the Unified Manager allows you to back up your system programming or retrieve a complete copy of all or selected programming information from the Enterprise Edge system This information is backed up on the Enterprise Edge system D drive If one of the files stored on your Enterprise Edge server drive becomes corrupted you can successfully restore the programming information BRU is used to backup the system registry and customer data stored by default on the Enterprise Edge D drive The backup can be stored on any network accessible drive Telephony programming is backed up to the D drive prior to performing a backup with BRU Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 235 For a brief description of telephony backup and restore programming in the Unified Manager see
121. An analog modem operating at 14 4 K takes about 4 5 minutes to transfer a 1MB data file and a 28 8K modem takes about half that time Using one channel of an ISDN line the transfer time is reduced to only 1 minute and if two ISDN channels are used transfer time is just 30 seconds P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 340 Appendix B ISDN Overview When transmitting data the connect time for an average ISDN call is about 3 seconds per call compared to about 21 seconds for the average analog modem call ISDN PRI channels With primary rate interface PRI each line is made up of separate channels known as B and D channels which transmit information simultaneously e PRI is known as 23B D because it consists of 23 B channels and 1 D channel B channels B channels are the bearer channel and are used to carry voice or data information and have speeds of 64 kbps Since each ISDN line has more than one B channel a user can perform more than one transmission at the same time using a single ISDN line D channels The standard signaling protocol is transmitted over a dedicated data channel called the D channel The D channel carries call setup and feature activation information to the destination and has speeds of 64 kbps PRI Data information consists of control and signal information and packet switched data such as credit card verification ISDN layers ISDN layers refer to the standards established
122. Auto Under Lines Restrictions Define restriction filters Define and Remote access remote access packages Assign a remote restriction and remote package to the trunk Outgoing trunk Trunk Line Data Line 062 T1 E amp M Line type Pool D Access codes Line pool D 71 can be from 1 to 4 digits Lines Restrictions Assign a restriction filter to the trunk Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 335 Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network In Memphis Liz needs to call long distance to a client in New York She selects a tie line to the branch office in New York After hearing the dial tone she dials a line pool access code to select a line to the public network Then she dials the client s number as a local call Liz in client in Memphis New York T1 loop start Enterprise Edge key system Central Office Hardware Enterprise Edge an EE DTM with a T1 E amp M line Heading Parameter Setting Incoming trunk Line 091 T1 E amp M Trunk Line Data Answer mode Auto Under Lines Restrictions Define restriction filters and remote and Remote access access packages Assign a remote restriction and remote package to the trunk Outgoing trunk Trunk Line Data Line 061 Loop Line type Pool B Access codes Line pool B 73 can be 1 to 4 digits Lines Restrictio
123. Backup and restore telephony programming on page 237 The BRU window EE Backup Restore Upgrade Building Windows NT script files BRU creates a Windows NT cmd file from the information retrieved from the xml file and data from user input The assembled cmd file is then executed In order to create a backup restore or upgrade script BRU must first load the corresponding xmi file Each xml file contains a top level section that lists the main sections in the xm file with for example tasks such as BACKUP RESTORE or UPGRADE For each of these tasks there is a list of available components The cmd file is built from selections from the list of available components Once the component is in the Selected Components window BRU reads the instructions for this component and writes the cmd file BRU can execute the file immediately or at a specified time and date on a Once Daily Weekly or Monthly schedule P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 236 Maintenance To create and execute a script file l 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Initiate a telnet session to access the Enterprise Edge desktop and start the remote desktop sharing service called VNC by typing net start winvnc Login to the server with your browser and specify port 5800 On the desktop click Start Programs Nortel Networks Double click the BRU icon to run the program Click Lo
124. Cache set Cached document comparison Every Time Internet Explorer 4 0 or Choose Views Internet Options Category General Temporary greater Internet Files Settings click Check for newer versions of stored pages Every visit to the page set Advanced Java VM set Java JIT compiler enabled Enterprise Edge OA amp M allows multiple users to log on If each user that logs on attempts to configure the same or related subsystems the most recent modification remains in effect and overwrites changes by another administrator Administrators must be careful to not make any unintended changes P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 56 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system Nortel Networks recommends that only one administrator user account is maintained in Enterprise Edge and access is closely controlled Administrators must coordinate changes to avoid unintended changes Note Do not use proxy servers while configuring Enterprise Edge using WEB OA amp M You must disable proxies and directly access Enterprise Edge The configuration procedures depend on the browser and version Logging on to Enterprise Edge To log on to Enterprise Edge 1 2x Open a web browser In the URL address field type the Enterprise Edge IP Address For example HTTP 10 10 10 1 Press the Enter key The Enterprise Edge log on screen appears In the Login box type your login name The default login name is s
125. Called Party set as Unknown name The system supports sending the calling party name Business Name and Set Name concatenated together on calls originated by the Enterprise Edge system P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 150 Configuring Telephony Resources For information on programming your CLASS assignment see Feature assignment on page 93 The Set Name will only be sent if the OLI for the Set is configured See OLI on page 83 Receiving Redirected Name Network name display allows the receiving of the Originally Called Name Redirecting Name on incoming calls The Originally Called Name will be stored but not displayed Receiving and Sending Connected Name Network name display supports the reception of Connected Name on outgoing calls The Connected Name is stored and displayed on the Enterprise Edge set In order for this to work you need to set the Called ID to yes See Auto called ID on page 93 The system also supports sending the Connected Name Business and Set Name concatenated together on incoming calls If the call is answered by a hunt group the hunt group name is used instead of the set name in forming the connected name The Connected Name is a transient display that appears for about 3 seconds Network Name Display interactions Calling and Connected Name information if available is passed between trunks with Selective Line Redirection SLR Only Calling Name in
126. Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 161 W Expand the hunt group and click Members 4 Click the Add button 5 Type a number in the DN number box 6 Click the Save button To remove a member from a hunt group 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Expand the hunt group and click Members 4 Click the member for example Member 001 to be removed 5 Click the Delete button To remove all members from a hunt group 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Expand the hunt group and click Members 4 Click the Delete All button Moving members of a group Member order within a Hunt Group is important The member order determines how a call is routed through a Hunt Group To move a member within a hunt group 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Expand the hunt group and click Members 4 Click a member from the member list for example Member 003 5 On the Configuration menu click Move 6 Type the new member number 001 002 etc in the Member box P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 162 Configuring Telephony Resources 7 Click the OK button The list is automatically reordered Assigning or unassigning lines to a group Confi
127. D and DOD calls are supported A private dialing plan may be used Tie Tie services are private incoming and outgoing services that connect Private Branch Exchanges PBX such as Enterprise Edge FX Foreign Exchange FX service calls logically connect your Enterprise Edge set to a remote CO It provides the equivalent of local service at the distant exchange Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix B ISDN Overview 343 Outwats Outwats is for outgoing calls This allows you to originate calls to telephones in a specific geographical area called a zone or band Typically a flat monthly fee is charged for this service Inwats Inwats is a type of long distance service which allows you to receive calls originating within specified areas without a charge to the caller A toll free number is assigned to allow for reversed billing Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider Emergency 911 dialing The ISDN PRI feature is capable of transmitting the telephone number and internal extension number of a calling station dialing 911 to the Public Switched Telephone Network State and local requirements for support of Emergency 911 dialing service by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your local telecommunications service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations For most installations the following c
128. Demand mode the router sends its table when requested by another established router In Periodic mode the router sends its table to other established router at regular intervals Route Announcement Type Lets users specify the route announcement type for the specified interface The choices are Disabled sending RIP packets is disabled on this interface This requires the other routers in the subnet have static routes configured to access the Enterprise Edge server RIP 1 sends RIP v1 packets in broadcast only RIP 1 Compatible sends RIP v1 and RIP v2 packets in broadcast Use this for a mixed environment of RIP v1 and RIP v2 RIP 2 sends RIP v2 packets in multicast only Use this only if all other routers connected to the Enterprise Edge server are RIP v2 capable Route Accept Type Lets users choose to accept announcements in either RIP1 RIP2 or both formats The choices are Disabled accepting RIP packets is disabled If this choice is selected the user is prompted to create static routing entries in the Enterprise Edge server to access other networks connected through this interface This method is preferable if you want to keep the routing table small in the Enterprise Edge server RIP 1 accepts only RIP v1 packets RIP 1 Compatible accepts packets of both RIP v1 and RIP v2 RIP 2 accepts only RIP v2 packets Route Expiration Interval Lets users specify in seconds the time interval to mark an
129. Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 387 Time and date A programming section that lets you manually change time or date Token Ring A token ring is a network topology and data signaling scheme where a special data packet called a token is passed from one station to another along an electrical ring A transmitting station takes possession of the token transmits the data then frees the token after the data has made a complete circuit of the electrical ring Tone dial telephone A push button telephone that emits DTMF tones TOS See Type of Service Transfer A feature that lets you redirect a call to another telephone in your Enterprise Edge system over a network or outside your system Transfer Callback If a transferred call is not answered after a specific number of rings the call will return to the telephone that made the transfer The number of rings is assigned under Feature settings in System programming Transfer Callback does not apply to calls transferred externally Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP A language governing communication among all computers on the Internet TCP protocol checks packets of information for errors submits requests for re transmission in the event of errors and returns multiple packets of a message into the proper original sequence when the message reaches its destination IP dictates how packets are sent out over networks and has
130. Edge Programming O perations Guide 102 Configuring Telephony Resources Tips A telephone can be administered to search automatically for an idle line from several lines appearing on the telephone Assign a line pool as the prime line in Line access and all the lines in the line pool must appear on that telephone When the user lifts the receiver or presses Handsfree Mute any one of the lines if idle can be selected by Automatic Outgoing Line selection Changing the settings for trunk type on a system that is in use may cause calls to be dropped When assigning lines to line pools consider your network configuration You may be able to create a unified dialing plan by assigning lines to the same location to the same line pool on each of your systems For example if system A and system B each have tie lines to system C assign the tie lines to pool D on each of the systems You cannot assign target lines to a line pool Dial mode Dial mode lets you specify whether dual tone multifrequency DTMF or pulse signalling is used on the trunk Received number The Received number setting applies only to target lines It allows you to specify the digits to make a specific target line ring The default value is blank A received number cannot be the same as or be the start digits of a line pool access code a destination code the DISA DN or the Auto DN If busy When a call is received on a target line that is already bu
131. Edge system For more information on the Unified Manager refer to Unified Manager on page 26 Hardware components The Enterprise Edge system consists of PCI cards and a number of Media Bay modules installed in a PC server a a0cdc Aa O00 A y PCI cards Media Bay modules The main hardware components of the Enterprise Edge system include PCI standard cards which perform call processing as well as media processing of the voice channels The following types of cards may be included Media Services Card MSC V 90 Interface LAN interface Card 10 100 Base T Ethernet NIC WAN Interface Card with CSU DSU Station set media Bay modules which provide access to telephone lines The Enterprise Edge system includes the following station set media bay modules 16 port Digital Station Media Bay Module EE DSM 16 which allows the connection of 16 digital telephone sets to the system 32 port Digital Station Media Bay Module EE DSM 32 which allows the connection of 32 digital telephone sets to the system P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 22 Enterprise Edge Overview Analog Station Media Bay Module EE ASM 8 which allows the connection of analog station sets to the system e Trunk media bay modules which provide access to telecommunications trunks The Enterprise Edge system includes the following trunk media bay modules Digital Trunk Media Bay Module EE DT
132. Enterprise Edge 304 public network to Enterprise Edge 303 security 308 troubleshooting 296 301 302 user problems 296 Network Name Display 149 Business name 150 calling party name 149 connected name 150 interactions 150 programming 150 receiving redirected name 150 night schedule 127 No free lines 290 Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers 283 Not available 290 Not in service 290 NTI network termination type 1 stand alone connections 344 P0908508 Issue 02 Index 397 O on hold see hold open switch interval disconnect timer 178 operational considerations 55 optional equipment troubleshooting 291 293 outbound traffic filter creating 349 Outgoing Name and Number Blocking 172 Outgoing name and number blocking 151 overflow routing 123 P packet filtering features destination address 37 destination mask 37 destination port 37 ICMP code 37 ICMP type 37 protocol 37 source address 37 source mask 37 source port 37 introduction 36 packet marking DiffServe networks 45 TOS premium traffic 45 TOS priority filters 45 Page timeout 140 parameters obtaining required values 53 required values 53 park retrieving calls 144 timeout delay 137 park prefix 144 password calls answered with DISA 145 COS 130 registration 132 using DISA 310 payload loopback test 273 performance 243 performance graphs and tables QoS 209 system 283 WAN 73 Point to Point Protocol PPP 50 port range settings Legacy networks overv
133. Enterprise Edge TIA 547A TR62411 LOS CFA Red CFA Red CFA OOF CFA Red CFA Red CFA AIS CFA Red CFA AIS CFA RAI CFA Yellow CFA Yellow CFA The criteria for declaring and clearing the alarms is selectable to meet those in TIA 547A or TR64211 Enable the internal CSU Use the following procedure to enable the internal CSU to gather performance statistics for your T1 lines or PRI with public interface 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hardware and select the appropriate module P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 276 Maintenance Select a card Select T1 parameters In the Internal CSU box select On from the drop down menu The card will be temporarily disabled while the internal CSU is being enabled Check the performance statistics l 2 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance CSU statistics Select a module Double click on one of the cards The screen displays the card statistics including the date and time that the system began collecting statistics Select Performance statistics to view the performance statistics Select Current interval to display the duration of the current 15 minute interval of the selected card the number of errored seconds ES the number of severely errored seconds SES and the number of unavailable time seconds UAS Select 15 min intervals to display statistics for 15 minute intervals in the last 24 hours numbered from the most recen
134. Error in setting action for input output filters Reason You were attempting to set the action for input output filters on the interface The operation failed because there were no input or output filters defined for the interface Add an input or output filter before setting the action 14 17 68 Command failed Error is setting static route This problem is caused by a mismatch in destination network address in its subnet mask specified in the route Match them Bitwise AND of destination address and subnet mask should be equal to the destination address The routing protocol is changed and the screen didn t update Refresh the screen by clicking on View Refresh menu item The routing protocol for the interface shows up as RIP But no RIP configuration parameters show up on the screen Set the routing protocol back to NONE and then set to RIP again The RIP configuration field would show up 14 5 77 Invalid Data Value Static default route is not permitted in this version Reason You were setting a static route that was a default route for the system In this release of Enterprise Edge setting default routes as static routes is not permitted The default route is managed by the Net Link Manager component that accepts the address of next hop router on the primary and then adds or deletes manages the default route in the system None Enterpris
135. Fwd no answer to Fwd no answer delay Fwd on busy to ATA answer timer Msg indicate Terminals amp Sets cont d User preferences Model Button programming User speed dial Call log options Dialing options Language Display contrast Ring type 9 Restrictions Set restrictions Set lock Allow last number Allow saved number Allow link Schedules Line set restrictions Telco features First display Auto called ID Set log space Available log space Feature assignment Line xxx Call log set Vmsg set Copying settings from one telephone set to another The Copy command allows you to duplicate programming for a telephone and apply it to another telephone a range of telephones or all the telephones on the system To copy settings from one telephone to another Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 from which you want to copy settings 3 Ifnecessary choose a subheading to refine your selection 4 On the Edit menu click Copy 5 Click Single from the Copy type list box Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 81 6 Type the DN number of the set to which you want to copy the settings 7 Click the OK button To copy programming from one telephone to a range of telephones 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN
136. Getting ready 281 Types of problems 282 Basic troubleshooting procedure 282 Viewing system performance and fault alarms 283 System performance graphs and tables 283 System Fault Alarm Banner 284 Problems with telephones 284 Problems with lines 285 Calls cannot be made but can be received 285 Dial tone absent on external lines 286 Hung lines ata telephone 286 Auto answer line rings at a telephone 288 Prime telephone gets misdialed calls 289 Selected lines reads Not in service or Not available 290 Selected line pool shows No free lines 290 Problems with optional equipment 291 Problems with the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 291 Problems with the auxiliary ringer 292 Problems with external paging 292 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Contents ix Problems with Music on Hold and Background Music 293 Problems with module service 293 Digital Trunk Computer Module trouble 294 Monitoring the T1 or PRI signal 295 Problems with Trunk or Station Modules 295 Problems for network or remote users 296 Remote feature code gets no response 297 Dialed number gets ringback and the wrong person 297 Dialed number gets dial tone instead of ringback 297 Dialed number gets busy tone 298 Dialed number does not get through 298 Dialed feature code gets overflow tone 299 Dialed feature code gets busy tone 300 Line pool access code gets overflow tone 300 Line pool access code gets ringback 301 Line pool access code gets bus
137. Internal 2221 Internal 6221 z Pool H Pool N oO cere ooooo Enterprise Edge Voice Pool M Pool B F T1 E amp M Ti E amp M Santa Clara Network 4221 Received 4221 Internal 4221 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 313 Heading Parameter Setting New York office Trunk Line Data Line 061 T1 E amp M Answer Mode Auto Line type Pool H Line 241 Target line Received 2221 Line Access Set 2221 L241 Ring only Line pool access Line pool H To Santa Clara Routing service Route 001 Use Pool H External None Destination Code 4 Normal route 001 Absorb None To Toronto Routing service Destination Code 6 Absorb None Normal route 001 Santa Clara office Trunk Line Data Line 091 T1 E amp M Answer Mode Auto Line type Pool M Trunk Line Data Line 092 T1 E amp M Answer Mode Auto Line type Pool B Line 251 Target line Received 4221 Line Access Set 4221 L251 Ring only Line pool access Line pool B Line pool M To New York Routing service Route 001 Use Pool M External None Destination Code 2 Absorb None Normal route 001 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 314 Appendix A N etwork Examples Heading Parameter Setting To Toronto Routing service Route 002 Use Pool B External None Destination
138. Internet s Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP packets passing through a gateway host can be expedited based on policy and reservation criteria arranged in advance Using ATM which also lets a company or user preselect a level of quality in terms of service QoS can be measured and guaranteed in terms of the average delay at a gateway the variation in delay in a group of cells cells are 53 byte transmission units cell losses and the transmission error rate In Enterprise Edge QoS is provided over IP QoS is guaranteed for outgoing traffic until it reaches the next hop QoS See Quality of Service R RAM Random Access Memory Computer memory that stores data temporarily RAM stores the data used by the microprocessor as it executes instructions The contents of RAM are erased each time the Enterprise Edge Server is turned off or restarted recall See Link time receiver The handset of a telephone Regression Code Restores the previous system security number so that previously applied UTAM Activation Codes and Portable Credit Codes can be reentered to restore full system operation Also required in cases of system recovery This code cannot be reused Relaying Relaying is the process of moving data along a path determined by a routing process The data is relayed between a source and a destination P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 380 Glossary Remind delay A feature that c
139. Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 287 Possible problem A line that has been redirected using Line Redirection may under some circumstances remain busy after a call is over If this happens the outgoing line for the redirection also remains busy You can clear this kind of hung line only at the telephone that was used to redirect the line Solution 1 Enter the Button Inquiry feature code Feature at the telephone that was used to redirect the line 2 Press the button of the redirected line 3 Press SHOW or f 4 Press DROP or Both the redirected line and the outgoing line for the redirection should now be cleared Possible problem The supervision and or disconnect timer programming for the line do not match the settings for the line at the central office Solution Verify in the Unified manager that your programming for the line matches the central office settings 1 Choose Resources Telephony Lines 2 Select the affected line 3 Select Trunk Line data The line s programming data is displayed 4 Verify that the supervision and disconnect timer programming match the settings for the line at the central office Possible problem Lines are still hung after all the above solutions have been investigated or tried out Solution For lines that are hung for any other reason you will have to run a Maintenance session and disable then re enable the affected trunk module
140. LID Name The default NameCLID is Enabled Long CLID Lets users enable and disable supporting the long CLID digit reporting Support This parameter is very market specific Do not change the default unless the trunk supports this feature The default Long CLID is Disabled CLID with Call Lets users enable and disable reporting the call type Long distant or Type Unknown This parameter affects only the Norstar record format Do not change the default unless the trunk supports this feature The default call type is Enabled Support Call Lets users enable and disable supporting the call charge reporting Charge This parameter is very market specific Do not change the default unless the trunk supports this feature The default call charge is Disabled P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 222 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services Answer Lets users enable and disable using Answer Supervision to identify far end Supervision answered outgoing calls This parameter is very market specific Do not change the default unless the trunk supports this feature The default ans supervision is Disabled Call Filter Lets users enter the call filter duration Duration The range is 1 30 2 From the CLID with Name list box enable or disable Name CLID 3 Inthe Long CLID Support list box enable or disable Long CLID Support 4 From the CLID with Call Type list box enable or d
141. Lines Remote restriction P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 110 Configuring Telephony Resources Tips Filter 00 cannot be changed Enterprise EdgeE can have up to 100 restriction filters 00 to 99 Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions There is no limit on the number of overrides that can be allocated to a restriction There is a maximum of 400 restrictions and overrides allocated to the 100 programmable filters The maximum length of a restriction is 15 digits The maximum length of an override is 16 digits A single letter A in a dialing sequence is a wild card stands for any digit You can use and in a sequence of numbers in either a restriction or an override These characters are often used as part of feature codes for other systems or for features provided by the central office the public network When restricting the dialing of a central office feature code don t forget to create separate restrictions for the codes used for DTMF and pulse lines Examples of dialing strings that may be restricted for this reason are 67 and 1167 Do not string together a central office feature code and a dialing sequence that you want to restrict Create a separate restriction for each You can copy restrictions and overrides from one filter to another Any restriction or override can be used in any number of filters Each time it is used it counts as one entry For ex
142. M which provides the connection between a standard digital PSTN T1 or PRI line and the Enterprise Edge system Caller ID Trunk Media Bay Module EE CTM which provides the ability to access four analog Caller ID PSTN lines e Station sets and adapters For a detailed description of each of the hardware components refer to the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Manual Software components The Enterprise Edge system provides a number of software applications assembled into software packages that are enabled using software key codes A software keycode is a password number provided to the installer The available Enterprise Edge software applications are e Enterprise Edge Integrated Solution on page 22 e Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging on page 23 e Enterprise Edge Voice over IP gateway on page 24 e Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging on page 25 e Enterprise Edge Call Center on page 24 e Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting on page 24 e Enterprise Edge TSP Server on page 25 e Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager on page 25 e Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording on page 25 e Nortel Networks Voice Service on page 25 For more information on the software application packaging refer to Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Manual and Enterprise Edge Software Keycode Installation Guide Enterprise Edge Integrated Solution Enterprise Edge Integrated Solution software supplies standard te
143. NORTEL NETWORKS Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 P0908508 Issue 02 Contents iii Contents iii About this document 11 What s new in this document 11 How this guide is organized 11 Related documents 12 Regulations 13 Safety 13 Radio frequency interference 14 Telecommunication registration 14 Hearing aid compatibility 15 Electromagnetic compatibility 15 Telephone company registration 15 Use of a music source 16 Rights of the telecommunications company 16 Repairs 16 Safety 16 Radio frequency interference 17 Software licensing 18 Enterprise Edge Overview 21 Hardware components 21 Software components 22 Enterprise Edge Integrated Solution 22 Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging 23 Enterprise Edge Call Center 24 Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting 24 Enterprise Edge Voice over IP gateway 24 Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging 25 Enterprise Edge TSP Server 25 Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager 25 Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording 25 Nortel Networks Voice Service 25 Unified Manager 26 Browser requirements 26 Understanding the Unified Manager 27 Menu descriptions 29 Enterprise Edge system access 30 Using Enterprise Edge Services 33 Routing and IP services supported by Enterprise Edge 33 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide iv Contents Chapter 4 IP Routing 34 IP Routing Overview 34 Enterprise Edge IP routing specifics 35 IP
144. NTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 About this document 19 This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Group and was originally based on public domain software written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois Urbana Champaign For more information on the Apache Group and the Apache HTTP server project please see lt http www apache org gt P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 20 About this document Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Overview 2 The Enterprise Edge system consists of software and hardware components that offer traditional telephony technology basic voice messaging and IP telephony The system components are summarized in Hardware components on page 21 Software components on page 22 A Unified Manager is used to provide access to all Operations and Maintenance programming on the Enterprise
145. PRI all existing line appearances for that module are automatically removed The Enterprise Edge Analog Terminal Adapter ATA 2 or a portable cannot process more than 2 simultaneous calls There is a suggested limit of 4 keys per set You can program more than 4 keys on a set by programming less than 4 on other sets For instance you might program 20 keys on a receptionist set equipped with a CAP Tips In general auto answer loop start trunks auto answer T1 E amp M trunks and T1 DID trunks are not assigned to telephones If assigned they are used for monitoring incoming call usage or for making outgoing calls auto answer loop start and T1 E amp M trunks You cannot assign a line that is private to another telephone Each line assigned to appear at a telephone must appear at a button with an indicator on that telephone The maximum number of line buttons are 8 for the M7208 telephone 10 for the M7310 telephone and 24 for the M7324 telephone If you set a line to Ring only incoming calls appear on an intercom button A central answering position CAP with one or two CAP modules can provide extra line buttons if more than 24 lines are assigned to the CAP The remaining lines appear at buttons on the CAP module The M7100 telephone is an exception it has no line buttons and can be assigned any number of lines Make sure that lines assigned to an M7100 telephone are assigned to ring otherwise you cannot detect incomi
146. RLR of 2 dB The PSTN loss plan uses an SLR of 11 dB and an RLR of 3 dB Choosing the wrong setting may affect voice quality either too loud or too soft Internal CSU Internal CSU allows you to turn the internal T1 channel service unit on or off The channel service unit gathers performance statistics for your T1 lines or PRI with public interface Contact your service provider for the proper settings Note You must disable the EE DTM using Module port status in Maintenance before you can change this setting See Module port status on page 254 for details You can view the performance statistics for your T1 lines in Maintenance under the CSU stats heading If you set the internal CSU off there must be an external CSU connected to your T1 lines P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 184 Configuring Telephony Resources Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 7 The following shows the Services programming map Services DNS settings Routing LAN1 WAN1 WAN2 WANS WAN4 SNMP oS Filters Port Ranges VoIP Gateway Local Gateway Remote Gateway QoS monitor Mean Opinion Score Web cache Net Link Manager Call Detail Recording Report Params Report Options Market Params Prefix Bins Access Bin Settings TAPI Service Provider Console Service Server Configuration General Information Diagnostic Logging Alarm Service
147. Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Click a Mode value Linear Rotary Broadcast and press Enter Setting the hunt delay This setting allows you to program the number of rings the system permits at a Hunt Group set before moving on to the next set in the Hunt Group This attribute appears only if the distribution mode is set to Linear or Rotary For more information see Setting the distribution mode on page 163 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 164 Configuring Telephony Resources 3 Click a Hunt Delay value 1 to 10 and press Enter Programming busy line setting A Hunt Group is considered busy if one of two scenarios exists e all of its members are being presented an incoming Hunt Group call e all of its members are active on a Hunt Group call There are three routing options if all members are busy e BusyTone the caller gets a busy tone PRI lines only e Overflow the call is routed to an overflow position If the overflow DN is the hunt group DN for that same hunt group the overflow option will not appear e Queue the call stays in the system for a period of time Within this period of time the call is presented to a member if one becomes available When the time out occurs the call is presented to an overflow position 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hun
148. Settings Enterprise Edge allows you to save the customized system settings for e Archival and backup purposes e Downloading system settings to multiple Enterprise Edge units For example you can use the download or upload feature to configure several Enterprise Edge servers by downloading definitions and uploading them onto new machines This method of uploading definitions saves configuration time and can be used for archival and backup purposes Note The upload feature is not supported in release 1 Downloading System Settings To download files 1 On the log on screen click the Download button ENTERPRI iy Lavin Abaaager Lam amp 7 Se 4 eee enaa TE Wert Herai The download screen appears P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 242 2 Select the underlined file and a download screens appears for the user to copy the file from the Enterprise Edge server to the user machine The configuration files that you can download include the web user interface configuration and the subsystem configuration i F ockEile Stheceau rie ti Wevigioni i P IDA THO I 1170p f je ee i D A A Ea SaDa a A I HiHi ERENT aFSTER FOF WEG SER IMTERFACE COMP DSUPATI Copyright co La LEFF LL rigbta remeri Bay Architecture Lab Hoctel Hetworks Ioc i AIL Crest beeries Feckeny i Banie Clara Ch 38084 i a TTET Templaten zem FXIXIX Page Layout eee rmnm tamnrmeTE
149. Short CO Medium CO Long CO Short PBX Long PBX Default Medium CO Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 99 Attribute Description Signalling G Defines the signal type for the line Values WinkStart Immediate DelayDial Default Winkstart ANI Number 7 Defines whether the telephone number of the caller will be collected for this line Values Y or N Default N DNIS Numberr Defines whether the digits dialed by an external caller on this line will be collected Values Y or N Default N 1 2 U Notes Tone does not appear if Signalling is set to Immediate T1 DID amp T1 E amp M trunk types only Must be set to Super if a loop trunk has its Answer mode set to Auto or Answer with DISA is enabled Disconnect supervision is also required to conference two external callers The line must be equipped with disconnect supervision from the central office for the Super option to work Appears for T1 loop start and T1 E amp M lines that have auto answer mode Set this option to No for T1 E amp M lines on a private network that have auto answer mode Applies to loop start and VoIP trunks Full autohold is always in place for T1 E amp M trunks it has no meaning for incoming only T1 DID trunks Applies to T1 E amp M or T1 DID trunks The immediate setting does not appear for T1 E amp M or T1 DID trunks connected to an EE DTM if the
150. TM in Enterprise Edge If the system is configured with an EE DTM configured as PRI the setting should be set to Primary P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 180 Configuring Telephony Resources Secondary reference The EE DTM acts as a standby reference If there are excessive errors on the primary T1 reference link or the EE DTM designated as primary reference fails the second EE DTM will obtain the timing reference from the network to be used for system synchronization This is the default value for the second EE DTM in Enterprise Edge Master The EE DTM does not obtain timing from the network but transmits the systems timing to equipment connected to it Changing clock source may disconnect calls Changing the clock source for your system may cause your system to restart itself resulting in dropped calls Choose a suitable time to change the clock source and use the Page feature to inform people of possible service disruptions Tips In most T1 network configurations you need one EE DTM configured as PRI to act as a primary reference The only application where you might not have a PRI EE DTM designated as a primary reference is in a network where your Enterprise Edge system is connected back to back with another switch using a T1 link If the other switch is loop timed to your Enterprise Edge system your EE DTM configured as PRI can be designated as a timing master If your Ent
151. The Enterprise Edge system allows you to run the following tests e Line loopback test on page 273 e Payload loopback test on page 273 e Card loopback test on page 273 e Continuity loopback test on page 273 Use the procedure Start a loopback test on page 273 to run any of these tests Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 273 Line loopback test The line loopback test loops the full 1 544 Mbps signal received from the network back to the network The looped signal is regenerated without any change in the framing format and without the removal of any bipolar violations The line loopback test can also be invoked and stopped remotely using the in band signal or via the facility data link FDL in extended super frame ESF format The line loopback test must be run in coordination with the T1 or PRI service provider Some test patterns can cause the EE DTM to reset To avoid this start the line loopback test from your system before the T1 or PRI service provider begins their test and stop the line loopback test from your system after the T1 or PRI service provider ends their test Payload loopback test The payload loopback test loops the received information bits 192 per frame back to the network The payload loopback test can also be invoked and stopped remotely via the facility data link FDL in extended super frame ESF format The payload loopback test must be run in coo
152. a more complete description of alarm and event codes consult your technical support representative Tips The Alarm telephone is assigned in Feature settings under System programming Alarms have a higher severity than events Attend to alarm codes before event messages Alarm code information that is specific to Companion components is included in the Companion event messages on page 266 An alarm code may not be displayed until two minutes after it has been triggered If the system is powered off when the alarm is triggered the alarm code is not displayed until two minutes after the system is powered on Event messages Event messages appear as items in the System administration log or the System test log of the Maintenance session Most of these event messages can only be caused by an unusual combination of events and should rarely occur Each event is assigned a severity number An S preceding this number S4 for example may appear in the event message S9 is the most severe If the log is full new event messages with a higher severity number replace existing event messages of a lower severity For this reason you should check event messages at regular intervals You can then deal with all messages before they are replaced The time that the message is recorded is also provided Event message information that is specific to Companion components is included in the Companion event messages on page 26
153. a packet addressing method that lets any computer on the Internet forward a packet to any other computer that is a step or more closer to the packet s recipient Trunk The physical connection between the Enterprise Edge system and the outside world using either the public telephone system or a private network Trunk Answer A feature you can use to answer a call on any line that has an active Ringing service Service Mode even if that line does not appear on your telephone Trunk Answer is enabled in Services programming P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 388 Glossary Trunk Media Bay Module A computer module which provides access to telecommunications trunks The Digital Trunk Media Bay Module EE DTM provides the connection between a standard digital PSTN T1 or PRI line and the Enterprise Edge system The Caller ID Trunk Media Bay Module EE CTM provides the ability to access four analog Caller ID PSTN lines Type of Service TO S The TOS field is located in the IP packet header and is used in DiffServ processing U UDP See User Datagram Protocol Unsupervised line A line for which disconnect supervision is disabled If an external caller hangs up the system does not detect the disconnection and does not hang up its line See Disconnect Supervision User Data User Data is an option in the Set Copy feature User Data refers to the personal settings that are unique to an indiv
154. a radio connected to Enterprise Edge Silence provides no audio feedback Values Tones Music Silence Default Tones Receiver volume Allows you to specify whether the volume level of a receiver or headset will return to the system default level when a call is ended or put on hold or whether it will remain at the level set at the individual telephone Values Use system volume Use set volume Default Use system volume Camp timeout Allows you to assign the number of seconds before an unanswered camped call is returned to the telephone which camped the call Values 30 45 60 90 120 150 or 180 seconds Default 45 Park timeout Allows you to assign the number of seconds before a parked call on an external line returns to the originating telephone Values 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 300 or 600 seconds Default 60 Park mode Allows you to define how retrieval codes are assigned to parked calls For more information see page 139 Values Lowest or Cycle Default Lowest Transfer callback timeout Allows you to specify the number of rings before a callback occurs on a transferred call You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings by six Values 3 4 5 6 or 12 Default 3 DRT to prime Defines whether or not unanswered external calls are automatically forwarded to a prime telephone after a certain period of time For more information see page 139 Values Y or N Def
155. a safe place Backing up your original files protects them from damage if a hardware failure occurs Base Station A Companion component that is mounted on walls and ceilings to provide a radio link to an office or other area where Companion portable telephones are used Each Base Station houses two radios that allow portables to send and receive calls through the Enterprise Edge Server Baud rate A unit of measurement of data transmission speed It is approximately equivalent to Bits Per Second BPS Typical baud rates are 300 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 Bearer channel See B channel BERT See bit error rate test BIOS Basic Input O utput System A program contained in Read Only Memory ROM that acts as the interface between software programs and the computer hardware Bit An abbreviation for Binary Digit A bit is the smallest unit of information recognized by the computer A bit has one of two values 0 or 1 to indicate off or on Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 355 bit error rate test A test that checks the transmission of data across the voice and data channels between the system and any telephone BPS Bits Per Second The speed of data transmission between two computers Basic Rate Interace BRI An ISDN interface which uses two B channels and a D channel 2B D Bus A collection of communication lines that carry electronic signals either between
156. ad to load an xml script file Choose an xml file from the Open dialog box Click Open Select a mode from the Mode list box Select an available component from the Available Components box Click the right arrow button to move the component to the Selected Components box Click Execute to run the file immediately or Select the Current Time checkbox to set the time of execution based on the system time Select or type the execution date in the Date list box Click Execute or Select the Schedule check box to enable the Execute list box Select Once Daily Weekly or Monthly from the Execute list box Select or type the execution date in the Date list box Click Execute Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 237 Note The current version of BRU allows scheduling single executions of the script file on a given date Repetitive scheduled execution capability is not available Note When in update mode BRU performs a silent mode auto uninstall of the specified software component if the xm file contains an uninstall token and if the system registry contains uninstall information for the component If the component information is not available BRU runs an interactive version of the uninstall script Backup and restore telephony programming The Backup and Restore menu option in the Unified Manager allows you to back up your telephony programming or retrieve a complete cop
157. ader format is Line Station format This parameter affects only the Norstar record format Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 221 DNIS Info Lets users enable and disable reporting Dialed Number Information Service DNIS digits The default DNIS Info is Enabled This parameter affects only the Norstar record format Not all trunks support DNIS Connect Char Lets users enable and disable inserting between digits dialed and after the call is connected The default connect char is Disabled 2 From the Date Format list box select a date format 3 From the Header Format list box select a header format 4 From the DNIS Info list box select enable or disable 5 From the Connection Character list box select a connection character 6 Press the Tab key to save the settings Market parameters To set the Call Detail Recording market parameters 1 On the navigation tree select Services Call Detail Recording Market Params Clicking the Market Parameters navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Market Params The Call Detail Recording Market Parameters screen appears The Call Detail Recording market parameters are Attribute Description CLID with Name Lets users enable and disable reporting the CLID Name of the call This parameter affects only the Norstar record format Not all trunks support C
158. al required is thus 28 lines If the Enterprise Edge systems were using T1 trunks then two T1 spans would be required at each office Note that the total of 28 lines represents the worst case value for line usage In reality the total number of lines in use at any one time will generally be less than 28 For example during periods of peak incoming call traffic the demand for outgoing lines will be low With PRI call by call services it is not necessary to configure a fixed allocation of trunks Each of the 23 lines on the PRI can be used for DID private Tie or outgoing public calls This consolidation means that it may be possible for each office to use a single PRI span rather than two T1 spans With PRI call by call services the only limitation is that there are no more than 23 calls in progress at any one time The dialing plan at each Enterprise Edge site is configured to determine the call type based on the digits dialed by the user If a user in Toronto wishes to dial a colleague in New York they dial the 4 digit private DN such as 6221 The dialing plan recognizes this as a private network DN and routes the call using Tie service with a private numbering plan Incoming Tie calls are routed to sets based on the digits received by the network which in this case will be the 4 digit private DN If a user in either location wishes to dial an external number they dial 9 followed by the number such as 9 555 1212 The dialing p
159. aling Also referred to as end to end signaling Telephones can access a remote system or dial a number on an alternate carrier by means of host feature activation such as Link Pause and Run Stop Hotline This feature automatically calls a pre assigned number when the telephone s receiver is lifted or the Handsfree Mute button is pressed A Hotline number can be an internal or external number Hotline is assigned under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming HTTP The Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP is the set of rules for exchanging text graphic images sound video and other multimedia files on the world wide web HTTP proxy See Web proxy Hz hertz A unit of measure for indicating frequency in cycles per second ICMP ICMP is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses IP datagrams however the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and are not directly apparent to the application user Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 367 I C An abbreviation of intercom IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force In Band In band is a method of device access which utilizes a network interface component within the device Initialization The steps required to prepare hardware or software for operation Install To set up for operation For example hardware is installed by attaching it t
160. amming 144 extra dial telephone programming 113 F fast path routing 37 fault alarm banner settings 284 feature codes troubleshooting 299 using remotely 306 files backup 237 filtering criteria 350 ranges 350 filters QoS 209 QoS adding 210 QoS deleting 210 QoS modifying 209 filters see also restriction service 92 108 first display 93 Fnvram backup file name 237 frame relay 50 frame relay parameters WAN 70 framing 182 framing format 182 full autohold 104 G gateway DNS 39 ground start trunk 305 H hardware clock source 179 modules 178 hearing aid compatibility 15 held line reminder remind delay 137 P0908508 Issue 02 Index 395 help customer support 283 hold tones music or silence 137 Hospitality services 155 hung lines 286 Hunt Groups about 159 Adding members 160 Assigning lines 162 Broadcast mode 163 Distribution modes 163 Moving members 161 Programming busy line setting 164 Programming the overflow set 164 Programming the queue time out 164 Removing members 160 Rotary mode 163 Sequential mode 163 Setting the hunt delay 163 Setting the name 165 Unassigning lines 162 Hunt groups usage metrics 279 l I F levels 182 ICMP counters 249 identification system 61 idle line search for 102 immediate signal type 105 impedance setting for line 104 incoming call routing call by call 180 Integrated Services Digital Network see ISDN interdigit timeout 125 interface levels 182 internal
161. ample if restriction 411 exists in filters 01 02 and 03 it uses up three entries of the 400 entries available Removing a restriction from a filter has no effect on the contents of other filters even if the restriction was copied to them You cannot delete a filter Removing the restrictions programmed on a filter makes it an unrestricted filter but the filter itself is not removed Exercise caution when removing overrides Removing a restriction removes the overrides associated with it It also changes the identifying numbers of the subsequent restrictions that you may have defined For example if you remove restriction 01 restrictions 02 to 08 are renumbered as 01 to 07 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 111 Services The Services heading allows you to control three types of service by the time of day and day of week e alternate call ringing for certain times and days e alternate dialing restrictions for certain times and days e alternate call routing for certain times and days The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Services programming map Services Services cont d Ringing service Ring groups Routing service Ring group 001 100 Private DN length Sets Dialing timeout DN xxx Routes Schedules oe vt E Night les pool Service setting Q D stinaion codes Trunk answer Extra dial set Q xx Line
162. anagement and the monitoring of network devices and their functions Guidelines for Using SNMP Consider the following guidelines when using SNMP You can set read only and read write community names You can set a list of permitted managers When set the agent responds to requests from SNMP managers from only those IP hosts An empty list of permitted managers implies that agent responds to requests from anyone You can set trap communities Each trap entry identifies the community name that must be used and the manager addresses You can enable or disable sending authentication traps You can enable or disable the SNMP agent At present SNMP supports only MIB II RFC 1213 MIBs P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 42 Using Enterprise Edge Services Quality of Service This section includes information on e QoS overview e DiffServ networks e Legacy networks e Admission control e Packet marking for DiffServ networks e Port range setting for legacy networks e Relationship between the QoS Module and the VoIP QoS monitor e Enterprise Edge QoS restrictions and defaults QoS overview On the Internet Quality of Service QoS is the methodology by which transmission rates error rates and other characteristics can be measured improved and to some extent guaranteed in advance QoS is a concern for the continuous transmission of high bandwidth voice and video multimedia information Transmitt
163. and algorithms to choose the best route based on a routing matrix Routing The path a message takes from its point of origin to its destination on a network or the Internet Routing Information Protocol RIP RIP enables routers in the same autonomous system to exchange routing information by means of periodic updates RIP is a widely used protocol for managing routing information within a self contained network such as a corporate local area network LAN or an interconnected group of such LANs Using RIP a gateway host with a router sends its entire routing table which lists all the other hosts is has on record to its closest neighbor host every 30 seconds The neighbor host passes the information to its next neighbor and so on until all hosts within the network have the same routing path information a state known as network convergence RIP uses a hop count as a way to determine network distance Each host with a router in the network uses the routing table information to determine the next host to route a packet to for a specified destination RIP is considered an effective solution for small homogeneous networks For larger more complicated networks RIP s transmission of the entire routing table every 30 seconds may put a heavy amount of extra traffic in the network The major alternative to RIP is the Open Shortest Path First Protocol OSPF Routing service A programming section that allows outgoing calls to be directed a
164. and each depends on the type of trunk involved in placing the outgoing call Analog trunks use a dialing digit sequence called a Vertical Service Code VSC The VSC differs from region to region and must be programmed Analog trunks with both tone and pulse dialing trunks can have separate VSCs PRI trunks have only one VSC To configure ONN 1 Select Telco Features 2 For analog trunks under Voice Message center numbers ONN Blocking Analog VCS Tone None You can choose F78 0 9 3 Enter a new tone dialing Name and Number blocking digit sequence 4 For non analog trunks under Voice Message center numbers ONN Blocking Pulse None You can choose F78 0 9 5 Enter a new pulse dialing Name and Number blocking digit sequence Call by Call service selection for PRI Call by Call service selection allows a user to access services or private facilities over a PRI line without the need for dedicated facilities The different services represent different types of access to the network Various services see list below are available depending on the chosen protocol Call by Call service selection is supported for the following protocols e National ISDN 2 NI 2 e DMS 100 custom e DMS 250 MCI Sprint Generic e AT amp T 4ESS custom P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 152 Configuring Telephony Resources The following Call by Call Services are supported Public Public calls conn
165. and should set your own password to prevent unauthorized use The default password is RADIO 72346 To change the Registration password 1 Choose Resources Telephony Passwords Registration password 2 Type a 5 digit password in the Password box and press Enter Hospitality passwords The Hospitality Services feature allows for two types of passwords to access different areas of Hospitality programming Desk password The Desk password is used to control access to all Hospitality Services administrative features The default Desk password is HOSP 4677 It is recommended that you change the password to prevent unauthorized use To change the Desk password 1 Choose Resources Telephony Passwords Hospitality passwords 2 Type a l to 6 digit password in the Room condition password box and press Enter Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 133 Room condition password The Room condition password controls access to the Room condition feature Feature 8 7 6J The default Room condition password is None For more information about using feature 8 ZJ 6 see the Enterprise Edge Feature Telephone Programming Guide To create a Room condition password 1 Choose Resources Telephony Passwords Hospitality passwords 2 Type a l to 6 digit password in the Room condition password box and press Enter P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming
166. ant to assign a trunk or line 3 Choose Line access Line assignment 4 Click the Add button 5 Type a line number in the Line box 6 Click the Save button 7 Click one of the following to define the line appearance type Unassigned Ring only Appear amp Ring or Appear only Appearances The Enterprise Edge system can handle simultaneous calls to the same DID line on the same set multiple target line appearances The number of DID appearances depends on the Appearance type setting Appear amp Ring Ring only Appear only Note This setting only applies for direct inward dial DID lines 241 336 These lines are also referred to as target lines Select the line number you want the Appearance type setting and for Appearances enter the number of target line appearances P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 84 Configuring Telephony Resources The Enterprise Edge system will not support a mixture of Appear only and Ring only appearances for the same line If Appear amp Ring or Appear only is chosen you can have as many simultaneous DID calls as there are target line key appearances If Ring only is chosen you can have as many simultaneous DID calls as you have intercom keys PRI Lines Users cannot access PRI lines directly through line appearances or line pools All outgoing PRI calls are dialed using the intercom button and entering a routing code When an EE DTM is changed to
167. applies to the call is determined by the COS for the trunk on which the user is calling Enter the digits to be received from the auto answer trunk Tips The length of the Auto DN is the same as the Received number length specified in General settings The Auto DN is cleared if the Received number length is changed The Auto DN cannot be the same as a line pool access code or a destination code DISA DN For calls answered with DISA the system presents a stuttered dial tone to prompt a caller to enter a valid password The Class of Service COS that applies to the call is determined by this COS password Once a remote user is on the Enterprise Edge system the DISA DN can be used to change the existing Class of Service This gives you greater flexibility when you create access privileges For example you may want to have a shared DN for remote access and separate COS passwords with different dialing out privileges for individuals Enter the digits to be received from the auto answer trunk Tips The length of the DISA DN is the same as the Received number length specified in General settings The DISA DN is cleared if the Received number length is changed The DISA DN cannot be the same as a line pool access code or a destination code P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 146 Configuring Telephony Resources Private access code The Private access code is the first digit th
168. ard type Loop Low line loop High line loop Disconnect timer Card 1 Card type T1 Low line loop High line loop Disconnect timer Answer timer Clock source T1 Parameters CO fail Interface levels Framing Internal CSU CSU line build Line coding 9 Card 1 Card type PRI Low line loop High line loop Protocol Protocol type NSF extension B channel selection sequence Clock source 9 Call by call service selection Foreign Exchange Inwats 800 Switched Digital SDS Inter Nine Hundred 900 T1 Parameters CO fail Interface levels Framing Internal CSU CSU line build Line coding Module Module 01 is reserved for the MSC card As there is no hardware programming required for the MSC card it is not displayed at this heading You can view and perform maintenance operations on Module 01 from the Maintenance heading For more information see Maintenance on page 233 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 176 Configuring Telephony Resources Note Because the voice over IP VoIP functionality resides on the MSC card it is not necessary to program any hardware settings The Trunk mode is automatically set to VoIP for lines 001 to 014 For more information refer to the section Lines on page 95 in this chapter To configure a module 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hardware Module 2 Click a Module type Station module Analog station module Trunk modul
169. arms on page 277 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 275 e Check bipolar violations on page 277 e Check short term alarms on page 277 e Check Defects on page 277 e Reset all statistics on page 278 Statistics collected by the Enterprise Edge system Three performance parameters are accumulated e errored seconds ES e severely errored seconds SES e unavailable seconds UAS These parameters are defined as per TIA 547A Errored seconds are enhanced to include control slip CS events Only near end performance data is recorded The internal CSU continuously monitors the received signal and detects four types of transmission defects e any active carrier failure alarms CFA loss of signal LOS out of frame OOF alarm indication signal AIS remote alarm indication RAI e the number of bipolar violations that occurred in the last minute e any defects loss of signal LOS out of frame OOF alarm indication signal AIS that occurred in the last minute e the number of milliseconds of short term alarms loss of signal LOS out of frame OOF alarm indication signal AIS remote alarm indication RAT in the last minute A short term alarm is declared when the detected defects persist for tens of milliseconds A carrier failure alarm CFA is a duration of carrier system outage CFA types reported can be mapped to CFAs defined in TIA 547A and TR62411 as follows
170. as appearance on that target line Click Y or N to enable Auto called ID P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 94 Configuring Telephony Resources Set log space Log space determines the number of items that can be stored in the Call log for each telephone There is no log space assigned by default Enter the amount for Available log space Tips There must be space available in the log pool in order for you to add space to a Call log The maximum number of spaces available is 600 System wide log space allocation is performed in Call log space under General settings If you want to allocate the same log space to all telephones use the Call log space setting instead Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 95 Lines The Lines heading allows you to assign settings for each line The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Lines programming map Note Lines 001 to 014 are reserved for VoIP trunks Lines 241 to 364 are reserved for target lines 9 Lines Line 001 364 Name Q Trunk Line data Trunk type Line type Dial mode Received number If busy Prime set CLID set Auto privacy Trunk mode Answer mode Answer with DISA Link at CO Use auxiliary ringer Full autohold Loss package Signalling ANI number DNIS number Q Restrictions Line restrictions Remote restrictions Telco features Voice Message center
171. assigned to computers by an IP address server as the computer needs it Usually there is a particular range or scope of IP addresses that your network uses With dynamic IP addressing a computer can have a different IP address every time it connects to the network Other devices must know the computer s IP address so that they can communicate with it The IP address server manages the assignment of IP addresses to the client workstations Static A static or fixed IP address never changes It is assigned to a computer permanently The computer has the same IP address every time it connects to the network and is known to other devices on the network by that IP address P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 36 Using Enterprise Edge Services Static Routing Enterprise Edge users can add static routes to the IP routing table These static routes take precedence over those routes chosen by routing protocols such as RIP To add a static route see Static Route on page 198 Note Make sure that users do not add a static route for default route 0 0 0 0 with mask 0 0 0 0 Enterprise Edge s Net Link Manager automatically creates a default route and adjusts it according to link status unless router or Net Link Manager are running Routing Information Protocol RIP RIP is a widely used protocol for managing routing information in a self contained network such as a corporate intranet RIP is classified by the Inte
172. ata Re evaluation Re evaluation automatically assigns the proper cell configuration to each radio ina Base Station When adding or removing Base Stations Re evaluation must be applied to the system Re evaluation Status If the Re evaluation status reads Required you can carry out the re evaluation To view the Re evaluation status 1 Select Telephony Companion Radio data Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 169 2 Click Re evaluation 3 Click the Configuration menu and select Re eval now or Schedule Radios Radio programming settings apply to Base Stations Cell assignment A cell is the area covered by one or more radios in close proximity As you move around your office while on a call with your portable the call is handed off from one cell to another A call on a portable can be handed off from one cell to another only if those cells are programmed as neighbors The Enterprise Edge system automatically assigns cell neighbors and re evaluates the cell to cell configuration when Base Stations are added or removed The cell assignment setting allows you to see if a Base Station radio is assigned to a cell in the Companion system To view the cell assignment 1 Select Telephony Companion Radio Data Radios 2 Click Radio nnnn where nnnn is the four digit radio number Cells Cell programming allows you to examine the cell radio cell neighbor and
173. ate 30 ms 20 ms 10 ms No 10 6 k 14k 24k Compression Data 8k 10k 16k Compression RTP Hdr Comp 5 8 k 6 8 k 9 6 k Note The calculation is based on a full duplex WAN link with HDLC overhead and VoIP with silence suppression Nortel Networks recommends that for slow WAN links such as a 56K leased line or ISDN H 323 video is not configured as premium traffic Packet Marking for DiffServ Networks Enterprise Edge classifies traffic and marks packets by setting the IP header type of service TOS field By default the following items are classified as premium traffic e All VoIP flows e RIP packets routing packets are periodically exchanged between Enterprise Edge and remote routers These packets need higher priority than regular packets to ensure that the routing protocol is working properly e ICMP packets Enterprise Edge Net Link Manager uses the ping command to determine whether the primary WAN link is active or inactive These packets are not delayed by regular packets e UDP Port 5000 packets Enterprise Edge VoIP QoS Monitor uses port 5000 in a proprietary protocol to monitor the IP network delay and jitter Because Enterprise Edge assigns VoIP packets to the premium queue it also gives these monitor packets high traveling priority e Admitted RTP RTCP packets In Enterprise Edge there are two places a user can set up a TOS field in an IP header TOS for Premium Traffic this field sets
174. ation of system events Although the problem is not a serious one repeated occurrences of the event number should be reported as soon as possible As a result of some events the system automatically restarts itself The table on the next two pages lists all the event numbers and identifies which of these events are associated with system restarts Most of these events are recorded in the System test log The few exceptions to this are recorded in the System administration log as indicated Event Message System Event Message System Restart Restart 101 106 Yes 400 Admin log Yes 107 No 401 403 No 108 112 Yes 405 411 No 113 No 412 419 Admin log No 114 116 Yes 421 423 Admin log No 117 No 424 425 No 118 120 Yes 426 430 Yes 121 123 No 431 No 124 125 Yes 432 Yes 126 129 No 433 No 130 Yes 441 442 No 131 132 No 453 No Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 265 Event Message System Event Message System Restart Restart 133 134 Yes 454 No 135 136 No 458 459 No 137 Yes 600 602 Yes 138 150 No 603 613 No 151 Yes 614 Yes 152 No 615 629 No 160 164 No 630 Yes 170 173 No 631 646 No 200 211 No 680 No 220 Admin log No 681 No 221 222 No 683 No 223 Admin log No 689 698 No 224 Yes 799 No 225 228 No 800 802 No 229 Admin log No 803 Yes 230 235 No 804 807 No 245 248 Yes 808 Yes 250 256 No 809 No 260 271 Yes 810 Yes 280 283 No 811 820 No 285 298 Yes 823 Yes 299 No 824 825 No 3
175. ation password Hospitality passwords Time and date 9 General settings Feature settings Direct dial CAP assignment Access codes Remote access Change DN type DN lengths Release Reasons Hospitalit P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 79 Hunt groups Hunt group 01 30 Members Line assignment Companion Registration Radio data Telco features Voice Message center numbers Outgoing Name and Number Blocking Software keys Hardware Module 01 Module 02 Module 03 Module 04 Module 05 Module 06 Module 07 Maintenance Module port status System test log System administration log Network event log Provisioning CSU statistics Tests DN to port conversion Link Status Q Metrics Hunt group metrics Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 80 Configuring Telephony Resources Terminals amp Sets The Terminals amp Sets heading allows you to assign settings to each telephone The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Terminals amp Sets programming map Terminals amp Sets DN 221 528 Line access OLI 9 Capabilities Handsfree Page zone Paging Direct dial Priority call Aux ringer Q Call Forward Hotline Type ATA settings ATA use Name Prime line Intercom keys Line assignment Line pool access Answer DNs DND on busy HF answerback Pickup group Allow redirect Redirect ring
176. ault Y DRT delay Allows you to specify the number of rings before Delayed Ring Transfer transfers a call to a prime telephone DRT to prime must be enabled before you can use this feature You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings by six Values 1 2 3 4 6 or 10 Default 4 Held line reminder Reminds you that a call at your telephone is still on hold You periodically hear two tones from your telephone until you return to the call on hold Values Y or N Default N HLR delay Allows you to choose the number of seconds before the Held line reminder feature begins at a telephone that has an external call on hold Values 30 60 90 120 150 or 180 Default 60 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 138 Configuring Telephony Resources Attribute Description Directed pickup Directed pickup allows you to answer any calls by specifying the ringing telephone s internal number For more information see page 139 Values Y or N Default Y Page tone Defines whether or not a tone sounds before a page begins Values Y or N Default Y Page timeout Defines the period of time after which the paging feature is automatically disconnected Values 15 30 60 120 180 300 600 2700 seconds Default 2700 Daylight savings time Defines whether or not the clock on the MSC automatically switches between standard time and day
177. auses a telephone to beep and display the message Om hold LIHEHAH when a call has been on hold for a programmable period of time This period is the Remind delay Remote access The ability to dial into an Enterprise Edge system from outside the system and make use of selected features The lines features and dialing capabilities available to a remote user are determined by the Class of Service remote access dial restriction See Remote restriction Remote access service RAS The RAS is the ability to get access to a computer or a network from a remote distance In corporations people at branch offices telecommuters and people who are travelling may need access to the corporation s network Home users get access to the Internet through remote access to an Internet service provider ISP A remote access server is the computer and associated software that is set up to handle users seeking access to network remotely Sometimes called a communication server a remote access server usually includes or is associated with a firewall server to ensure security and a router that can forward the remote access request to another part of the corporate network Remote capability A subset of Enterprise Edge features that are available to users connected through remote access Remote device A remote device is any network device that is accessible only by means of communication over a digital or analog dial up network Remote monitoring
178. be used to monitor the telephones within a system Central answering position CAP module A module connected to an M7324 telephone and provides 48 additional buttons that can be used as autodial buttons or feature buttons A maximum of two CAP modules can be connected to a single M7324 telephone Channel Service Unit CSU A device on the Digital Trunk Interface that is the termination point of the T1 lines from the T1 provider The CSU collects statistics on the quality of the T1 signal The CSU ensures network compliance with FCC rules and protects the network from harmful signals or voltages Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP CHAP is a method of establishing security on PPP links where the peers must share a plain text identifier The caller sends a challenge message to its receiving peer and the receiver responds with a value it calculates based on the identifier The first peer then matches the response with its own calculation If the values match the link is established CHAP is a more secure procedure for connecting to a system than the Password Authentication Procedure PAP P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 358 Glossary Class of Service COS The set of features and lines available to the user for a call The Class of Service for a call is determined by the restriction filters and remote access packages assigned to the telephone in Lines programming The Class of Se
179. box appears Inthe Destination Address box type the destination address In the Destination Mask box type the destination mask In the Next Hop Router box type the next hop router Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 201 6 Inthe Metric Value box type the metric value 7 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To add LAN static routes 1 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Static Route The Static Route dialog box appears 2 Inthe Static Route box type the static route 3 Inthe Destination Address box type the destination address 4 Inthe Destination Mask box type the destination mask 5 Inthe Next Hop Router box type the next hop router 6 Inthe Metric Value box type the appropriate metric value 7 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete LAN static routes 1 Click a static route in the Static Route table 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete Static Route 3 Follow the steps for deleting input filters WAN Routing To configure WAN routing services 1 Click the Routing navigation key to expand the navigation tree 2 On the navigation tree click WANI or WAN2 Clicking the WANI1 or WAN2 navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click WAN1 or WAN2 to view the configurable WAN resources The Summary RIP Parameters Input Filters Output Filters and Static Route
180. bsorb None To Public Network Services Routing Service Destination Code 9141A Normal route 004 Absorb 1 Destination Code 914A Normal route 004 Absorb 1 Destination Code 91A Normal route 004 Absorb 1 Destination Code 9A Normal route 004 Absorb 1 The implications on the configuration on each node are e each node must have the Private Network Access Code set to the value 9 e each node must have destination code s that match the Private Network Access Code plus digits corresponding to calls terminating in the local PSTN For example if the Private Network Access Code is 9 the node in Ottawa would require a destination code of 91613 Similarly Toronto would require the following destination code 91416 Note Ensure that Line Pool A is used for IP trunks To allow for fallback to PRI trunks when the IP trunks are congested you must also program the following Routing service settings e Set the start and end times for Sched 4 to 1 00 so that IP calls can be made 24 hours a day P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 330 Appendix A Network Examples e Program the Sched 4 Service setting to Auto and enable overflow routing by changing the Overflow setting to Y Yes e Acontrol set must be defined for all sets on the system that make calls over IP trunks See Control sets on page 126 for more information You must program Remote Packages so that the IP trunks in Pool A can access
181. button from above the left hand window The system displays a message indicating that this will remove all of the items Select Yes to continue If new items have been added since the log items were displayed these new items are not erased P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 260 Maintenance Network event log The Network event log keeps a record of events and alarms that are specific to the T1 network interface By using this feature you can check the items in the log check when each item in the log occurred and you can erase the log The Network event log holds a maximum of twenty items Erase the log after dealing with all the items Use the Network event log selection under Maintenance to perform one of the following procedures e Displaying information on the items in the Network event log on page 260 e Erase the log on page 260 Displaying information on the items in the Network event log You can display information on any item in the Network event log using the following procedure 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Network event log 2 Ifthe Unified Manager indicates that there are hidden subheadings double click on the heading to display all the items in the log If there are no log entries the Unified Manager will indicate that there are no hidden subheadings 3 Select any item Information about the log item is displayed The description attribute indicates
182. buttons to a telephone Intercom buttons provide a telephone with access to internal and external lines and line pools Values 0 to 8 OLI Defines the digits used for originating line identification number OLT Values up to 24 digits Default blank Prime line This setting assigns a prime line to the telephone A prime line is the first line that is automatically selected when a call is made from an Enterprise Edge telephone Only assigned lines and line pools appear PRI pools are not valid selections for a Prime line An assigned prime line is not associated with the assignment of a prime telephone An external line must be assigned to the telephone in Line assignment before it can be assigned as the prime line to the telephone A line pool must be assigned to the telephone in line pool access before a line pool can be assigned as the prime line to the telephone A target line cannot be a prime line for a telephone because it is incoming only A T1 DID line should not be assigned as the prime line for a telephone If assigned it is treated as if no prime line has been assigned The message Select a line appears when the receiver is lifted By assigning a line pool as a prime line a telephone can be made to search automatically for an idle line in a pool For more information see Line type on page 101 Intercom keys This attribute assigns the number of intercom buttons to a telephone which provide a teleph
183. c network dialing standard local or long distance telephone numbers e the digits received are delivered by the central office e answer with DISA cannot be administered to a PRI trunk As with a private network the dialed digits may be programmed to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or the Auto DN P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 308 Appendix A Network Examples Security Programming provides several ways of protecting Enterprise Edge from unauthorized access or use Class of Service Class of Service COS refers to the capabilities that Enterprise Edge provides to users who access the system from the public or a private network The COS includes e filters that restrict dialing on the line e an access package which defines the set of line pools that may be accessed and whether or not the user has access to the paging feature The COS that is applied to an incoming remote access call is determined by e the filters that you apply to the incoming trunk e the COS password that the caller used to gain access to Enterprise Edge In cases where DISA is not automatically applied to incoming calls the remote caller can change the COS by dialing the DISA DN and entering a COS password To program COS passwords see COS passwords on page 130 Restriction filters Restriction filters can be used to restrict the numbers that may be dialed on any external line within Enterprise Edge U
184. ccess specific areas of the Enterprise Edge system The main headings are e System on page 31 e Resources on page 31 e Services on page 31 e Management on page 31 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Overview 31 System The options under the System heading allow you to view system settings When you select the System heading the menu options Configuration Performance and Fault are enabled These menu options provide access to statistical information and allow you to enable or disable services For more information on configuring your system settings refer to the Configuring system settings on page 57 For information on Performance and Fault monitoring refer to Viewing system performance and fault alarms on page 283 and Enterprise Edge system diagnostics and utilities on page 241 Resources The subheadings under the Resources heading allow you to configure the following resources e LAN e WAN e Msc e Telephony For more information on LAN and WAN programming refer to Configuring networking resources on page 63 For more information on MSC and Telephony programming refer to Configuring Telephony Resources on page 77 Services Use the options under the Services heading to configure services for the Enterprise Edge system For more information on configuring these settings refer to Configuring Enterprise Edge Services on page 185 Management Use t
185. ce For information on how to replace any system components refer to the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide Monitoring the T1 or PRI signal If you are finding minimal faults with the T1 or PRI signal you can monitor the signal to try and isolate the problem The monitor jack on the EE DTM faceplate provides non intrusive bridged in service monitoring of the T1 or PRI signal Connect a protocol analyzer or other test equipment into the monitor jack to monitor the signal received from the network and the signal transmitted by Enterprise Edge Problems with Trunk or Station Modules 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance to ensure that the module is not disabled For more information refer to the procedure Display the module status on page 254 2 Disable the module using the procedure Disable a module on page 254 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 296 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 3 4 Enable the module using the procedure Enable a module on page 255 For an EE DTM EE CTM or EE DSM Check the external line by terminating a single line telephone directly on the distribution block or equivalent which connects to the Trunk Module For the EE ASM If the EE ASM is still down power down then power up the Enterprise Edge system If the problem persists l 2 3 4 If AC power is present and the LED indicator on the module i
186. ckup Directed pickup allows you to answer any calls by specifying the ringing telephone s internal number Tips Directed pickup is not to be confused with the Call Pickup Group feature in programming which allows you to answer a call at any telephone within a specific group without specifying the internal number of the ringing telephone Like Call Pickup Group Directed pickup is useful when not all the telephones have been assigned the same lines but you still want to allow your co workers to answer a call on any external line from their telephones Daylight savings time When this feature is turned on the clock on the MSC will automatically switch between standard time and daylight savings time Tips The hour falls back one hour on the last Sunday of October at 2 00 am and it advances one hour on the first Sunday of April at 2 00 am In regions where daylight savings time does not apply for example Saskatchewan make sure this setting is disabled P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 140 Configuring Telephony Resources Auto time amp date You can program the Automatic time and date feature for the clock on the MSC to enable the Enterprise Edge system to automatically update the time and date after a power failure Whenever the clock is out of sync by more than two minutes as a result of a power failure or a loss of power the first incoming call updates the clock aut
187. ction 308 DID trunks 307 on a private network 307 PRI trunk 307 security 308 remote dial in guidelines 52 remote restriction 309 remote routers setting up 349 remote system access 306 resource services settings 59 resource settings configuring 63 restricting feature use see Set Lock line at telephone 92 lines 106 remote access 146 remote callers 106 telephones 91 108 restriction default 92 dialing 123 P0908508 Issue 02 Index 399 service 91 106 108 line set 91 92 programming 114 schedules 91 restriction service 114 Restrictions using 308 310 retrieving voice messages 172 ringing service night schedule 112 ring group assignment 112 ringing groups 112 RIP enabling on network interfaces 36 Route adding a long distance access code 121 dialing plan to route outgoing PRI calls 123 dialing restrictions 123 for least cost routing 122 for local calling 119 for long distance calling 120 routing destination codes 115 dialing restrictions 123 LAN settings 193 programming 114 sample for local calling 119 sample for long distance calling 120 settings 192 WAN settings 201 routing and IPservices 33 routing IP information protocol 36 introduction 34 IP addressing overview 35 managing information 36 overview 34 packet filtering introduction 36 RIP protocol 36 static 36 routing LAN to LAN fast path 37 S sample rate 244 saving settings 241 schedule names 126 Schedule 4 127 Schedule 5 127 Schedule 6 127
188. ctions Specify the filter to be applied to this line to restrict the numbers that can be dialed on it You can assign a different restriction filter for normal service and for each of six schedules See the section on Services for more information about the schedules For PRI all line restriction changes are applicable to all 23 lines Enter the number of the restriction filter to be assigned as the line restriction for each schedule The default restrictions are as follows Schedule Restriction filter Normal 03 Schedule 1 Night 21 Schedule 2 Evening 22 Schedule 3 Lunch 23 Schedule 4 00 Schedule 5 00 Schedule 6 00 Tips When a remote user places an external call on a line any filters used with the line still apply Remote restrictions Specify the restriction filter to be applied to remote callers calling in to the Enterprise Edge system on this line A restriction filter is a set or group of restrictions and overrides As with line restrictions you can apply a different remote restriction for normal service and for each of six schedules Select the remote restrictions for each schedule The default restrictions are as follows Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 107 Schedule Restriction filter Normal 04 Schedule 1 Night 31 Schedule 2 Evening 32 Schedule 3 Lunch 33 Schedule 4 00 Schedul
189. d Full AutoHold is assigned in Lines programming Automatic Privacy See Privacy Automatic Daylight Savings Time A feature that switches the system to standard or daylight savings time at pre programmed times It is turned on or off under Daylight time in System programming Automatic Telephone Relocation A feature that lets a telephone retain its personal and system programming when it is plugged into a different modular jack Automatic Telephone Relocation is enabled under Set relocation in System programming auxiliary ringer A separate external telephone ringer or bell which can be programmed to ring when a line or a telephone rings An auxiliary ringer may be programmed to ring only when the system is in a particular schedule Programming of an auxiliary ringer is done in Services programming after the feature has been enabled under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 354 Glossary AWG American wire gauge B channel Bearer channel An ISDN standard transmission channel used for voice or data transmission Background Music A feature that lets you hear music from the speaker of your telephone It is available only if a music source has been attached to the system and the feature has been enabled under Feature settings in System programming Back up To make a duplicate copy of data files so that you can store the originals in
190. d Extended With the default Basic setting answer keys do not ring for e Prime set call capture e call forwarded calls e other answer key calls e priority calls e voice calls e ringing service e callbacks The Enhanced setting is the same as the Basic setting except that answer keys will ring for overflow call routed calls special case of Prime set call capture Answer keys will not ring for line transferred calls although Basic will ring Extended will ring for all call types except priority calls and voice calls Select the setting Basic Enhanced and Extended A Phantom DN is a line that can be programmed to appear and ring on a set that does not physically exist It allows you to create an Answer Key for the set that does not exist P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 142 Configuring Telephony Resources Call log space Call log space programming customizes how log space is allocated to telephones in the system Reset logs allows you to reallocate the Call log space equally to all telephones in your system To Reset logs 1 On the Configuration menu click Reset logs 2 Enter the space allocation for the Call log at each telephone You must use a three digit number for example 020 to give each set 20 spaces 3 Enter the number of sets with logs 4 Click OK 5 The system automatically reallocates Log space Select NO to keep existing settings Tips Use this heading
191. d during any of six different schedules There are three services Ringing service Restriction service and Routing service all found in Services programming set A telephone Set Copy A programming section that allows you to copy programmable settings from one telephone to another of the same type Set Copy provides two options duplicating System Data and User Data or duplicating System Data only Set Copy does not provide the same copy capability as COF which is more selective of the settings that can be duplicated Set filter See Restriction filter P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 384 Glossary Set lock telephone lock This feature allows you to limit the number of features that may be used at a telephone Full set lock allows very few changes or features Partial set lock allows some changes and features and No set lock allows any change to be made and any feature to be used Set lock is assigned under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming Set relocation See Automatic Telephone Relocation SIMM Single In line Memory Module The Enterprise Edge Server is equipped with one SIMM that provides 64 MB of SDRAM The memory can be increased with the addition of more SIMMs Simple Network Management Protocol SN MP SNMP is the protocol governing network management and the monitoring of network devices and their functions SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
192. d list of these statuses e Up This value is read only It indicates that the component is enabled and is operating normally For a component like a network interface this means the interface is enabled and connected to a valid link For a service like DHCP it means that the service is enabled and is running normally e When the current status is Up setting it to Enabled or Continue where available is a no operation Setting it to Disabled disables the service by shutting it down and then disabling it Where available setting it to Paused pauses the service e Down This value is read only This value indicates that the user has enabled the component and the component is unable to operate in an Up state because of normal or abnormal internal or external errors For example if a network interface is not in an Up state because of no connection to an actual physical link it is a normal external error If a service like DHCP service is not in an Up state because of internal errors it is an abnormal internal error e When the current status is Down setting it to Enabled attempts to bring it to Up state again As a result it may stay at a Down state Setting it to Disabled disables the service Where available setting it to a Paused or continued state fail as the service is not yet running Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 61 Enabled T
193. d to an overflow set The Hunt Groups subheading in Resources Telephony is the area where programming changes are made to the following e members of a group e member position in a group e what lines are assigned to a group e how incoming calls are distributed e how long the system looks for available members e where a call goes if all members are busy Note Videophones should not be programmed as members of a Hunt Group Hunt Groups allow one B channel connection at a time and videophones use two B channels P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 160 Configuring Telephony Resources The operation of some features varies if the Enterprise Edge set is part of a Hunt group Features affected are summarized in the table below Feature Description Call Forward all calls The Call Forward all calls feature is ignored and the Hunt group call rings at the set Call Forward no answer The Call Forward no answer is ignored and the Hunt group call continues to ring until the hunt time has expired Call Forward on busy The Call Forward on busy is ignored and the Hunt group call continues to ring until the hunt time has expired Do not Disturb on Busy If this feature is active the set will not receive notification of incoming Hunt group calls Group Pickup If a set is part of a Hunt group and a call pickup group then an incoming Hunt group call can be picked up from any
194. d when someone dials 9 during normal mode the mode used when the other Schedules are turned off e The route for the first schedule appears after Normal Enter the defined route number 001 The following illustrations show sample tables used for planning and recording routing service They are filled out to match the examples of routes for local and long distance calling Routing Service Services Routing Service Route Dial out if required Use Pool 000 999 max 24 digits or characters none A BCDEFGHIJKLMNO 002 none A CDEFGHIJKLMNO BCDEFGHIJKLMNO BCDEFGHIJKLMNO BCDEFGHIJKLMNO Destination codes Services Routing service Destination codes Service Schedule Normal Rte Night Rte Evening Rte Lunch Rte name max 7 char DestCode Use route Absorb Use route Absorb Use route Absorb Use route Absorb max 7 digits 000 999 Length 000 999 Length 000 999 Length 000 999 Length 9 00 001 A All All All T e00 002 bit O All All All 000 All All All All 000 All All All All Setting up a route for long distance calling An office may have leased lines or T1 E amp M trunks which make it cheaper to call long distance The routing should take place automatically when the number of the outgoing call begins with 1 Again the first step is to define a route under Services in Routing service e enter 002 or any other ava
195. de must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project http www apache org 4 The names Apache Server and Apache Group must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their names without prior written permission of the Apache Group 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project http www apache org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDE
196. de should match the DS Code field in frame relay settings so that frame relay network treats this traffic as high priority If rest of the network is diffserv capable all routers that carry VoIP traffic from theEnterprise Edge server must be configured to treat the traffic with this DS code as high priority or premium traffic Number of Phone Ports Lets users specify the number of phone ports This value specifies the number of concurrent phone calls user intends to carry over the WAN interface QoS Provider layer uses this value to determine how much of the bandwidth reserved for premium traffic is consumed by internal VoIP gateway and how much is left over for other H 323 or other classified premium traffic Filter Order Lets users specify the order that filters are evaluated If a filter name is listed in filter order but the actual filter is missing it is ignored If an actual filter is omitted from the filter order list the filter is not effective Filter Lets users specify the entry name that is used as a key to uniquely identify an individual filter entry in QoS layer Its value must follow certain conventions It must have the prefix F followed by a unique number that identifies this filter For example F2 is a valid value While adding specify non recurring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing filter entry name it modifies the existing filter entry Using non sequential numbers
197. delivered over IP but only as a best effort flow There is no fallback to PSTN if a packet has passes QMON checking QMON packets travel at the same priority as VoIP packets or at higher priority than normal IP packets If VoIP packets travel at a premium level but QMON packets travel at normal best effort level it is possible for QMON to report the IP network as bad and start fallback to the PSTN but the actual delay and jitter for VoIP packets are still good since VoIP packets have a higher priority To avoid this add UDP port 5000 to the high priority queue in all routers Enterprise Edge QoS Restrictions and Defaults Enterprise Edge QoS includes the following restrictions and defaults e By default the general bulk of traffic not defined by priority filters is routed to best effort Queue 5 with Queue 1 the highest priority and Queue 8 the lowest An administrator can define four classes of traffic above the generic traffic and three classes below it e A maximum of 31 priority filters for best effort traffic can be created e The QoS module can be ON or OFF The default setting is ON e The predetermined WAN bandwidth is always available to VoIP gateway channels That is VoIP gateway calls are always admitted The remaining WAN premium bandwidth can be used by other H 323 streams such as Microsoft NetMeeting If there is no VoIP gateway traffic the VoIP WAN bandwidth can be used only by best effort traffic not othe
198. des 212 718 and 415 Tip To restrict dialing from outside the system once a caller gains remote access apply restriction filters to incoming external lines as remote restrictions Remote restriction no long di Remote piste caller area codes 212 718 Line restriction no long distance except area codes 212 718 416 Line pool access code 81 no long distance except area codes 212 718 416 In this case dialed digits must pass both the remote restriction and the line restriction A remote caller can override these filters by dialing the DISA DN and entering a COS password P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 310 Appendix A N etwork Examples For restriction filter programming instructions see Restriction filters on page 108 in this guide Direct inward system access DISA To control access from the public or private network you can configure auto answer trunks to answer with DISA Remote callers hear a stuttered dial tone and must then enter a COS password that determines what they are allowed to do in the system Auto answer T1 loop start and T1 E amp M trunks are configured to answer with DISA by default For DISA programming instructions see Answer with DISA on page 103 Tips T1 DID trunks cannot be configured to answer with DISA If you want incoming T1 DID calls to be answered with DISA configure the system with a DISA DN I
199. des system wide settings and individual telephone and line settings Protocol A set of rules and procedures for exchanging data between computers or Enterprise Edge Servers on a network or through the Internet Proxy A proxy is a server that acts on behalf of another Power cable A cable that connects the Enterprise Edge Server to a power source public line An external line that can be assigned to any telephone and to many telephones A line is assigned as Public under Trunk Line data in Lines programming public network The regular telephone network that connects most homes and businesses pulse tone dialing An external line setting for pulse or tone dialing Pulse is the traditional method of dialing used by rotary dial or push button single line telephones Tone dialing allows telephones to communicate with other devices such as answering machines Tone dialing is required to access the features that PBX systems may offer or to use another system remotely PVC See permanent virtual circuit Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 379 Q Quality of Service QoS On the Internet and in other networks QoS is the idea that transmission rates error rates and other characteristics can be measured improved and to some extent guaranteed in advance QoS is of particular concern for the continuous transmission of high bandwidth video and multimedia information Using the
200. dge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix C Setting Up Remote Routers This appendix includes information on setting up Nortel Networks BayRS routers and how to set up a range of UDP as a high priority This chapter includes Creating an Outbound Traffic Filter Sample Criteria Ranges and Actions for UDP Filtering Creating an Outbound Traffic Filter To create an outbound traffic filter l In the Configuration Manager window click Circuits and then click Edit Circuits The Circuit List window appears Select a circuit Click the Edit button The Circuit Definition screen appears with the circuit you selected highlighted Click Protocols click Edit Protocol Priority and then click Priority Outbound Filters The Priority Outbound Filters window appears Click Template The Filter Template Management window appears Click Create The Create Priority Outbound Template window appears Enter a descriptive name in the Filter Name field Click Criteria click Add click Datalink click IP and then click Criterion The Add Range window appears If you choose the User Defined criterion the Add User Defined Field window appears first Type a minimum and maximum value to specify the range and click the OK button The Add Range window closes The new criterion and ranges now appear in the Filter Information field of the Create Priority Outbound Template window 10 Click Action click Add and the
201. dial codes display contrast and other settings to a specific telephone or person You do not have to program these settings at the person s telephone User preferences are assigned in Terminals and Sets programming User Speed Dial Two digit codes 71 94 can be programmed to dial external telephone numbers User Speed Dial numbers are programmed for each telephone and can be used only at the telephone on which they are programmed V Voice Call A feature you can use to make an announcement or begin a conversation through the speaker of another telephone in the system The telephone you call will not ring Instead the person you call will hear a beep and then your voice Their telephone will beep periodically to remind them that their microphone is open Voice Call deny A feature that prevents your telephone from receiving Voice Calls Voice message center If you have subscribed to Call Display services you can receive visual Voice Message Waiting Indication providing your telephone has a display If you have Voice Message Waiting Indication you can program the telephone numbers required to access up to five different Voice Message Centers You can also program which of the five Centers is to be accessed by each specific line Voice over IP VoIP Voice over IP VoIP is the capability to deliver voice using the Internet Protocol VoIP is a set of facilities for managing the delivery of voice information using the IP In
202. dialing restriction for remote callers 106 line filter 131 line set restriction 92 remote user 107 user filter 131 Dialing Plan PRI 344 Dialing plan PRI routing table 117 private DN length 125 public DN length 124 dialing plan 2 way DID 338 coordinated 310 shared line pools 315 using T1 E amp M lines 312 dialing restriction 308 defaults 109 exceptions 110 maximum length 110 maximum number 110 remote 309 removing a filter 110 Restriction service 308 restrictions 110 set restrictions 91 wild card character 109 118 DID Direct Inward Dial trunk 307 DiffServ networks introduction 43 packet marking 45 Digit Absorb 119 Digit Absorption 119 Digital Trunk Interface see DTT direct dial digit programming 141 142 direct dial digit programming 144 directed pickup 138 139 directory numbers changing 136 changing starting DN 136 coordinated dialing plan 310 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 394 Index in a network 310 length 148 DISA Direct Inward System Access DID trunk 307 DN 145 private networks 331 remote callers 310 disabling a device 256 a module 254 disconnect supervision 103 loop start trunks 306 timer 178 disconnect timer 178 display unreadable troubleshooting 284 DNIS number 105 DNS gateway 39 guidelines 39 introduction 39 proxy 39 DNS service settings overview 192 download system settings 241 DSX1 build out 182 DTI Digital Trunk Interface clock source 179 trunk 304 dynamic IP
203. digits and route the call to the corresponding IP address P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 324 Appendix A N etwork Examples Heading Parameter Setting West End office Trunk Line Data Line 241 Target line Received 2221 Line Access Set 2221 L241 Ring only Line pool access Line pool A To Head office M1 Service Routing Service Route 001 Use Pool A External leave blank DN type Private Destination Code 4 Normal route 001 Absorb None To East End Service Routing Service Destination Code 6 Normal route 001 Absorb None To Public Network Service Routing Service Route 002 Use Pool A External leave blank DN type Public Destination Code 9 Normal route 002 Absorb None East End office Trunk Line Data Line 241 Target line Received 6221 Line Access Set 6221 L241 Ring only Line pool access Line pool A To Head Office M1 Service Routing Service Route 001 Use Pool A External leave blank DN type Private Destination Code 4 Normal route 001 Absorb None Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 325 Heading Parameter Setting To West End Service Routing Service Destination Code 2 Normal route 001 Absorb None To Public Network Service Routing Service Route 002 Use Pool A External leave blank DN type Public Destination Code 9 Normal route 002 Absorb None In this examp
204. dressing might be referred to as being static fixed or dynamic IRQ Interrupt Request A signal sent by a hardware device to the microprocessor requesting its immediate attention For example each communications port has an interrupt request line for notifying the microprocessor when data has been received or transmitted Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 369 IRQ Conflict Two hardware devices are vying for same IRQ On installation of a device where an IRQ conflict occurs the user may have to manually configure the IRQ settings to resolve the conflict ISDN See integrated services digital network ISDN DN A directory number DN used by ISDN terminal equipment connected to the system The Enterprise Edge system uses a maximum of thirty ISDN DNs K Kbyte The abbreviation for kilobyte A kilobyte is equal to 1024 bytes L LAN A LAN is a network of interconnected workstations sharing the resources of a single processor or server within a relatively small geographic area Last Number Redial A feature that allows you to redial the last external number you dialed Least cost routing See Routing service line The complete path of a voice or data connection between one telephone or other device and another Lines A programming section that lets you assign settings to each trunk and external line Line number A number that identifies an external line The
205. e creating a new system speed dial The new programming overwrites the previous number and settings If you are creating a system speed dial for the first time you will need to choose the type of facility for the system speed dial For more information about programming line facilities see Line type on page 101 The system has a standard name to display so it is not necessary for you to program one however if you choose not to display the telephone number you may want to create a more descriptive name To create a system speed dial 1 Choose Resources Telephony System Speed dial 2 Click a speed dial Speed dial 01 to 70 3 Inthe External box type the telephone number up to 24 digits and press Enter If this is a new speed dial more fields appear after you press Enter Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 129 4 Click a Facility value Use prime line Use line nnn Pool code x or Use routing table where nnn is an integer between 001 and 238 x is a letter between A and O Note If you assign a specific line to a system speed dial number only telephones with an appearance of that line can use the speed dial number 5 Click a Display digits value Y Yes or N No Note If you choose not to display the digits the name of the Speed Dial code is displayed instead of the phone number The default is Y 6 Click a Bypass restrictions value Y Yes
206. e 5 00 Schedule 6 00 Tip The remote restriction restricts the numbers that can be dialed on an incoming auto answer line If a remote user then selects a line to place an external call any filter used with the line still applies Telco features Voice Message center If you subscribe to a voice message service you can specify which voice message center is used for each external line that can receive message waiting indication For each line select the setting Center 1 through Center 5 or None Enter the telephone numbers for each of the five voice message centers if required P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 108 Configuring Telephony Resources Restriction filters Restriction filters prevent a user from making certain kinds of calls from a telephone or from lines that are available at the telephone They also restrict some features The following illustration shows detailed view of the Restriction filters programming map Restriction filters 9 Filter 00 99 9 Restrictions 9 Restriction 01 Digits 9 Overrides Override 001 Digits Filters A restriction filter is a set or group of restrictions and overrides that specify the external numbers or feature codes that cannot be dialed from a telephone or on a line Rather than define individual restrictions and apply them repeatedly to telephones and to lines restriction filters let you assign them i
207. e DN number up to 3 digits To define an external number as a hotline 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 3 Choose Capabilities Hotline 4 Click External 5 Inthe External box type the telephone number up to 24 digits 6 Click a Facility value Use prime line Use line Pool code Use routing table Note For Pool type a letter from A to O and press Enter For Use line type a number from 001 to 238 and press Enter Target lines cannot be used as the facility ATA settings The ATA settings heading allows you to define general settings for analog terminal adapters To configure ATA settings 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 3 Choose Capabilities ATA Settings Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 89 4 Configure ATA Settings according to the table Attribute Description ATA answer Select the length of delay between the last digit you dial and when the timer Enterprise Edge ATA 2 device is ready to receive DTMF tone Values 3 5 7 10 Default 7 ATA use Select where the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 can be used Values On site Off site Default Off site Msge Indicate Select the type of message indicator Tone sends a Message Tone through the set s receiver and Lamp turns on the set s Message Lamp when a message is
208. e Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 249 MIB Il Information Here is the mapping between Enterprise Edge counters shown in statistics windows an d standard MIB II variables where applicable This section includes Counters shown at LAN and WAN interface levels ICMP Counters UDP Counters QoS Session Counters QoS Best Effort Traffic Counters QoS Dropped Packets Counter QoS Graph Counters QoS Best Effort Queue Counters Counters Shown at LAN and WAN Interface Levels 1 Byte Received ifInOctets 2 Byte Sent ifOutOctets 3 Byte Total no equivalent ifInOctets and ifOutOctets 4 Current Bandwidth ifSpeed 5 Output Queue Length ifOutQLen 6 Packets Outbound Discarded ifOutDiscards 7 Packets Outbound Errors ifOutErrors 8 Packets Received Discarded ifInDiscards 9 Packets Received Errors ifInErrors 10 Packets Received Non Unicast ifInNUcastPkts 11 Packets Received Unicast ifInUcastPkts 12 Packets Received Unknown ifInUnknownProtos 13 Packets Received no equivalent 14 Packets Sent Non Unicast ifOutNUcastPkts 15 Packets Sent Unicast ifOutUcastPkts 16 Packets Sent no equivalent 17 Packets no equivalent ICMP Counters Note Shown under Performance Menu under Resources P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 250 Messages Outbound Errors Messages Received Errors Messages Received Messages Sent
209. e Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 189 Attribute Description Default Gateway Lets users specify the client s default next hop router The value for this parameter is automatically assigned by Enterprise Edge s auto configuration system If the IP Address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface is changed this value gets overwritten Use caution when changing this value Lease Time Lets users specify the time in seconds for an address assignment until the client s lease expires Scope Status Lets users enable or disable the scope Address Range Lets users specify the valid IP addresses that are assigned to DHCP clients Excluded Address Lets users specify IP addresses that are not available to DHCP clients To modify the attributes of the Scope Specific Options screen 1 Inthe DNS Server box type the name of the DNS server This field is configured automatically Use caution when you change it 2 Inthe WINS Server box type the name of the WINS server This field is configured automatically Use caution when you change it 3 Inthe Default Gateway box type the default gateway This field is configured automatically Use caution when you change it 4 Inthe Lease Time box type the lease time This field is configured automatically Use caution when you change it 5 From the Scope Status list box select the
210. e Edge provides detailed performance information for the system and its components The statistics are shown in charts or tables If a performance display is active it is automatically updated with real time performance information in time increments that you set Note Generating statistics puts a significant workload on the Enterprise Edge server CPU connecting network and web client Exercise caution when running statistics for long durations Generating Statistics Enterprise Edge provides statistical information on Enterprise Edge throughput and other performance related information The data is formatted in a chart or table format To generate statistics 1 Select the appropriate item in the navigation tree 2 Select Performance from the menu and select the appropriate command to display statistical information z 3 The chart or table appears Statistical Chart wlan Graph Slatin Chast Wan Graph Statistic Chart Bods Den Beeb be ee De ce es igs os Jgls oe Bs de iL Sail a cinene ba te Meta bed F Tiai zj Paena T Cia Awa Faak loa late Thala G o 4 De ET reed dea Applet otra P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 244 The following is the same information in table format Statistical Table Wan Table Stativtic Table Sekt a pooling mima Sen 2 8 M Sample Rate You can set the sample rate by selecting the buttons on the statistical display The polling i
211. e PRI networks can be used for voice data and video calls e no usage costs when placing calls over private networks Lines External lines provide the physical connection between Enterprise Edge and other systems in a private or public network Lines are numbered 061 to 238 Lines 001 to 008 are used for Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway IP telephony functionality Enterprise Edge includes different types of modules that are configured for different types of lines e A DTI EE DTM configured for PRI is used for incoming and outgoing calls two way DID Incoming calls are routed directly to an Enterprise Edge telephone Outgoing calls are made using the intercom key and dialing destination codes e A DTI EE DTM configured for T1 has digital lines that are configured as Groundstart E amp M Loop and DID Target lines are virtual communication paths between trunks and telephones on the Enterprise Edge system They are incoming lines only and cannot be selected for outgoing calls With target lines you can concentrate incoming calls on fewer trunks This type of concentration is an advantage of DID lines and Enterprise Edge target lines allow you to direct each DID number to one or more telephones Target lines are numbered 241 to 336 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 305 Telephones can be configured to have an appearance of any type of trunk and line including target li
212. e a coordinated dialing plan Line pools offer an alternate method of creating a dialing plan or supplementing the routing and destination codes If the Enterprise Edge systems are close to each other geographically you can conserve resources by not duplicating access For example system A B and C are all within the same area code System A has a line pool to Santa Clara System B has a line pool to Montreal and system C has a line pool to Miami An Enterprise Edge user in system A can reach Miami by calling system C and using their line pool to Miami To simplify access between Enterprise Edge systems all line pools that go to the same destination should have the same line pool access code For example system A and system B both have a line pool to Ottawa You can configure both systems with the same line pool access code for the Ottawa line pool A dialing plan similar to the one in the following figure will let you create a company directory that uses line pool access codes and unique DNs of a uniform length Network 5234 Network 6334 Received 234 Received 334 Internal 234 Internal 334 ee System A System B Pool A 6 Pool A 5 Pool B 7 Pool B 8 Pool C 8 Pool C 7 System D System C Pool A 6 Pool B 5 Pool C 8 Network 8534 Network 7434 E Received 534 Received 434 Ele Internal 534 Internal 434 For instance the person on sys
213. e and press Enter The Module type displayed depends on the hardware unit that is installed and is defined in the table below Module Type Hardware unit Station module Digital Station Media Bay Module EE DSM 16 or EE DSM32 Analog station module Analog Station Media Bay Module EE ASM 8 Trunk module Digital Trunk Media Bay Module EE DTM CLID Trunk Media Bay Module EE CTM Card The Card heading allows you to configure settings for the card Options displayed depend on the type of hardware module installed in your system and the card type you select To program a card 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hardware Module Trunk Module and Card 1 to access the card configuration settings 2 Click a Card type Loop PRI or T1 and press Enter Note Provisioning PRI lines is done from the Maintenance heading For more information see Maintenance on page 233 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 177 3 Configure the card settings according to the table Attribute Description Low line loop Automatically assigned based on the card type and the module number For more information see page 178 Values View only High line loop Automatically assigned based on the card type and the module number For more information see page 178 Values View only Disconnect timer Allows you to specify the durat
214. e automatically or when it is turned on at a control telephone Service setting Change the service setting for each schedule Off Automatic or Manual See Ringing service on page 112 for descriptions of the three settings Overflow routing If all the lines used by a route are busy when a call is made the mode may be programmed to overflow to the route used for normal mode If this happens the set will sound a warning tone and display the message Expensive route The caller can then release the call to avoid using the normal route or continue with the call Overflow routing is turned on or off for each Schedule in Schedule programming Click the checkbox to enable Overflow routing Tips A schedule must be active for overflow routing to be in effect Overflow routing is not available in normal mode You must create an overflow route to be used with each destination code In this way every route used with a scheduled mode that has overflow service must have an alternate route in normal service Using dialing restrictions with routing Routing service can be further customized by adding dialing filters to lines in line pools Filters restrict the use of the line to specific area codes Tips Host system signaling codes can be part of the dial out You can also use routing as an alternate method for a direct dial number For example create a destination code 0 and program the number of the internal or external d
215. e for each PRI interface Depending on the order that the modules are configured as PRI Pool PRI A represents lines 061 to 083 Pool PRI B represents lines 085 to 107 and Pool PRI C represents lines 109 to 131 etc to Pool PRI F If all PRIs are connected to the same service provider and use the same protocol lines 061 to 083 085 to 107 and 109 to 1311 etc can be put in the same pool PRI A PRI B PRI C up to PRI F Hospitality Hospitality Services HS is a group of features that increases the value of the Enterprise Edge system in small to medium sized facilities such as hotels motels or hospitals In a hotel setting guests gain improved services through immediate access to basic functions like e wake up service or reminders e accurate tracking of the room s service requirements Enterprise Edge telephones are classified as one of three types of sets a common set a room set or a Hospitality Services HS admin set Common set A common set can be a telephone found in a lobby office or common area It is not associated with a room and does not have access to all of the HS features Common sets are Enterprise Edge telephones or analog telephones connected to an analog terminal adapter ATA or an analog station module ASM Room set A Room set is a set assigned to a room Up to five sets can be assigned to the same room they all share same room number Room sets can be any Enterprise Edge telephone or an anal
216. e gateways 1 On the navigation tree click the VoIP Gateway navigation key to expand the navigation tree 2 On the navigation tree click Local Gateway Clicking the Local Gateway navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Local Gateway Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 213 The VoIP Local Gateway attributes are Attribute Description Preferred Codecs Lets users specify the local VoIP gateway used to convert voice to data packets and vice versa These parameters are always negotiated during call setup with the other VoIP gateway involved in the call Codecs are negotiated in the order of preference specified here Refer to the VoIP Gateway User Guide for a discussion on these values Echo Lets users enable or disable the Echo Cancellation feature in the VoIP calls Cancellation Non Linear Lets users enable or disable non linear processing Processing Silence Lets users enable or disable silence compression Compression Fallback to Lets users enable or disable fallback to the circuit switched network PSTN Circuit Switched Voice Jitter Buffer Lets users specify the voice jitter buffer size in the range of 20 200 The default setting is 50 Fax Jitter Buffer Lets users specify the FAX jitter buffer size in the range of 20 200 The default setting is 50 Local Gateway IP Lets users specif
217. e line telephones using an Analog Terminal Adapter external line A line on your telephone used for making calls to destinations outside the system Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 363 external music source See Music source external paging A feature you can use to make voice announcements over an externally mounted loudspeaker connected to the Enterprise Edge Server The external speaker is not an Enterprise Edge component and must be supplied by the customer F FAX FAX works with Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging offering a caller the capability of sending a fax document to a mailbox as easily as sending a voice message Feature Code A unique code used to access Enterprise Edge features and options File A collection of related information stored on a disk under a given name for later reference and used by an operating system or application program Each application program that you use saves the data you create in files Files are identified by a file name and optional extension File name A name that identifies a file and consists of one to eight characters filtering Filtering is the process of examining a data packet on the network to determine the destination of the data and whether the packet should be passed along on the local LAN copied to another LAN or dropped Forward See Call Forward frame A frame is a unit of data transmission in a local area
218. e line pool contains loop start trunks enter programming and move the under utilized loop start trunks from other line pools into the deficient line pool Problems with optional equipment For more information on problems with optional equipment attached to the Enterprise Edge system refer to one of the following problems Problems with the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 on page 291 Problems with the auxiliary ringer on page 292 Problems with external paging on page 292 Problems with Music on Hold and Background Music on page 293 Problems with the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 l 2 Check the connections to the jack Check the connections to the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 Disconnect the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 and replace it with a working digital telephone If the telephone still works properly the system and the EE DSM are operating properly Verify that the programming has been performed correctly Ifthe trouble seems to be in the system or EE DSM double check all wiring and programming options OR If the trouble seems to be with the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 disable the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 and replace it with a known working one For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 Installation Guide Running a Maintenance session to test a Enterprise Edge ATA 2 l Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance to ensure that the Enterprise Edge ATA 2 is not disabled See Identify a device connected to the system on page 255
219. e messaging Voice messaging records caller s messages and stores them in a mailbox for easy retrieval Each Enterprise Edge telephone in your system can have its own mailbox as well as personal greeting Auto attendant Auto attendant answers business calls with a Company Greeting A voice prompt then offers callers a menu of options to direct their call by selecting a digit on the dialpad key pad Custom Call Routing CCR CCR replaces the Automated Attendant menu with a customized CCR Home Menu to offer callers a wider range of call routing options and access to sub menus and information messages CCR allows you to determine the menu options and record the voice prompts that guide callers along call paths P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 24 Enterprise Edge Overview Audio Messaging Interchange Specification AMIS Networking AMIS Networking includes General Networking parameters Audio Messaging Interchange Specification AMIS specific parameters and AMIS Site Administration For more information about AMIS Networking refer to the Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging AMIS Set Up and Operation Guide Enterprise Edge Networking The Enterprise Edge Networking option serves as a link between Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging Meridian Mail and other voice mail systems at different locations Enterprise Edge Networking allows the exchange of voice and fax messages between users at different sites on a
220. e of the remote gateway 5 In the Destination IP box type the destination IP address and press the Tab key 6 From the Qos Monitor list box enable or disable the QoS 7 Inthe Transmit Threshold box type the transmit threshold and press the Tab key Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 10 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 215 In the Receive Threshold box type the appropriate receive threshold In the Destination Digits box type the destination digits and press the Tab key Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To add a remote gateway l On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Entry The Remote Gateway dialog box appears In the Name box type the user name In the Destination IP box type the destination IP address From the Qos Monitor list box enable or disable the QoS monitor In the Transmit Threshold box type the transmit threshold and press the Tab key In the Receive Threshold box type the receive threshold In the Destination Digits box type the destination digits Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete remote gateways 1 Inthe Remote Gateway table click the remote gateway you want to delete 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete Entry A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion 3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager 4 Click the VoIP Gateway navigatio
221. e records from people who use the network e information about other hardware and non Enterprise Edge features within the public or private network Notify service provider of T1 or PRI signaling disruption A Notify your T1 or PRI service provider before disconnecting your T1 or PRI lines removing power to your system or performing any other action that disrupts your T1 or PRI signaling Failure to notify your T1 or PRI service provider may result in a loss of Tlor PRI service Types of problems The problems you encounter will likely fall into one of the following categories Misunderstanding of a feature A problem may be reported because an Enterprise Edge user is unfamiliar with the operation of a given feature You may be able to solve the problem simply by demonstrating how to use the feature correctly Programming errors You may encounter problems caused by errors in programming A feature may have been programmed incorrectly or may not have been programmed at all Wiring connections Wiring problems are caused by loose unconnected or incorrect wiring Use the procedures in the section on checking the hardware as a guide Equipment defects You may encounter problems caused by Enterprise Edge equipment defects See the appropriate section for problems related to the system hardware Basic troubleshooting procedure Use the following basic troubleshooting procedure as well as the detailed descriptions in this guide W
222. e system rejected the date for various reasons The reasons could be that it is beyond the range of dates supported For example 01 01 0001 is invalid date This is an invalid data error There was an error in setting system time Reason The hour or minute component contains a negative value Provide the correct date value These are various errors related to an etror in setting system time Correct the error in the time format This is an invalid data error There was an error in setting system name Reason The system name does not follow the standard conventions Make sure that your system name does not contain any special characters in the name hyphens are allowed in addition to letters and digits and that it does not exceed 15 characters in length 5 4 59 This is an invalid configuration error There was an error getting or setting DHCP parameters Reason You were adding an IP Address Range and or Excluded Address Range and the first field you entered had a wrong key value In the dialog boxes that appear to add the entries the first field is a key that should match certain naming conventions The conventions are given the label to those fields Follow the conventions given on the dialog boxes For IP Address Ranges use keys like Rxx and for Excluded Address Ranges use keys like Exx 5 5 39 This is an invalid data value There are invalid values for the new excluded addres
223. e that allows you to establish a three person call at your telephone Conventions The way certain information is described For example using underlined text to represent second line display prompt information cos See Class of Service Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 359 D D channel Data channel An ISDN standard transmission channel which is packet switched and is used for call setup signalling and data transmission Data channel See D channel Data link connection indentifier DLCI The DLCI is used to identify a PVC in frame relay networks Defaults The settings for all features when the system is first installed Settings are changed from their defaults in programming Delayed Ring Transfer DRT to prime After a specified number of rings this feature transfers an unanswered call on an external line to the prime telephone associated with that line This feature is activated under Feature settings in System programming destination code A two to seven digit number that the system interprets and then translates into the digits that you want dialed out Both the code and its associated dialed digits are assigned under Routing service in Services programming DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol dialing restriction See Restriction filter dial up connection A dial up connection is a temporary connection between computers that is establi
224. e user dials to access private facilities It provides access to tandem and toll bypass functionality For example a PSTN user in Toronto could call a PSTN user in Ottawa and have the call routed over the private network connection from the Toronto office to Ottawa office and then out to the PSTN from the Ottawa office This would bypass any long distance toll charges To add this functionality the destination code has to include the private access number For an example of a toll bypass network configuration and its associated programming see Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway on page 325 The private access code can be up to two digits in length Line pool codes This setting allows you to assign a line pool access code for each of the fifteen line pools A to O These codes are used to specify the line pool you want to use for making an outgoing external call Enter the access code The default access code is 9 for Line Pool A for Line Pool B to O No default is specified for Line Pools B to O For PRI see Line Pools on page 155 Tips The code can be one to four digits in length A line pool access code can be the same as an external line access code In this case the line pool access code takes priority over the external line access code and a line from the line pool is selected A line pool access code cannot conflict with the Park prefix the Direct dial digit the first digit of any Received number the first
225. ect Enterprise Edge and a Central Office CO Both incoming DID and outgoing DOD calls are supported Dialed digits conform to the standard North American dialing plan E 164 standard Foreign Exchange FX Foreign exchange service connects an Enterprise Edge site to a remote central office CO This provides the equivalent of local service at the remote location Tie Tie lines are private incoming and outgoing lines that connect Private Branch Exchanges PBXs such as Enterprise Edge Outward Wide Area Telecommunications OUTWATS This outgoing call service allows an Enterprise Edge user to call telephones in a specific geographical area referred to as a zone or band Typically a flat monthly fee is charged for this service Inward Wide Area Telecommunications INWATS This long distance service allows an Enterprise Edge user to receive calls orig inating from specified areas without charge to the caller A toll free number is assigned to permit reverse billing International INWATS An international long distance service that allows an Enterprise Edge user to receive international calls originating from specified areas without charge to the caller A toll free number is assigned to permit reverse billing Switched Digital This service provides premises to premises voice and data transport with call management and monitoring features Nine Hundred This service is commonly referred to as fixed charge dialing Private
226. ect the appropriate pulse density and close the list box In the Channel List box type the channel list Specify a list of channels numbers or their ranges separated by a comma or hyphen Ranges can be mixed with individual entries Press the Tab key to save the settings P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 70 Configuring networking resources WAN Primary Link Frame Relay Parameters If you chose Frame Relay as your link protocol scroll down from the WAN Line Parameters screen to find the WAN Frame Relay Parameters screen The WAN Frame Relay Parameters are Attribute Description LMI Type Lets users set the type of link management protocol used on this link This type must match the corresponding type set in the Frame Relay service provider s switch Permitted types are ANSI LMI and CCITT The default setting is ANSI Polling Interval Lets users set an interval in seconds between LMI status inquiry messages This value must match the corresponding value set in the Frame Relay provider s switch Permitted values are between 5 30 seconds The default setting is 10 Full Enquiry Interval Lets users set the maximum number of LMI Status Enquiry messages sent before sending a Full Status Enquiry request This value must match the corresponding value set in the Frame Relay provider s switch Permitted values are between 1 and 255 in seconds The default setting is 6
227. ed IP Address users can choose this value This value is automatically set to the IP Address of the first LAN interface and changes when the latter changes Exercise caution if modifying this value Cache Mode Lets users enable or disable the cache mode of operation Cache Size Lets users specify the maximum size in KB of the cache Garbage Collection Lets users specify the interval in hours between garbage collection Interval operations on the cache Cache Maximum Lets users specify the maximum life in hours on the proxy server for the Life HTTP pages cached in it Maximum Server Lets users specify the number of threads ready to serve HTTP requests in the Threads proxy server 2 Inthe Server Address box type the server address This setting is automatically set to the LAN interface IP address Use caution when changing 3 From the Cache Mode list box select Enable or Disable 4 Inthe Cache Size box type the cache size in KB 5 Inthe Garbage Collection Interval box type the interval in hours 6 Inthe Cache Maximum Life box type the cache maximum in hours 7 Inthe Maximum Server Threads box type the number of threads 8 Press the Tab key to save the settings Net Link Manager To configure Net Link Manager settings 1 On the navigation tree click Services Net Link Manager The Net Link Manager Summary screen appears P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 218
228. edules See the section on Services for more information about the schedules Enter the number of the restriction filter to be assigned to the set for each schedule P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 92 Configuring Telephony Resources Schedule Restriction filter Normal 02 Schedule 1 Night 11 Schedule 2 Evening 12 Schedule 3 Lunch 13 Schedule 4 00 Schedule 5 00 Schedule 6 00 This means for example that if you enter a set of restrictions for filter 11 they will be automatically applied when the Night schedule is in use Line set restrictions Line set restrictions lets you assign a restriction filter to a specific line that can be used for outgoing calls at a specific telephone This type of filter replaces any line or set restriction filters which might otherwise apply It restricts the numbers you can dial on a line but only from that telephone The same line on another telephone can have different restrictions As with set restrictions you can apply a different line restriction for normal service and for each of six schedules Choose None or Filter Enter the number to be assigned as the line set restriction for each schedule and click Save There are no default line set restrictions Tips A maximum of 255 line set restrictions may be applied to lines at telephones If a line set restriction is assigned to a line at a particular telephone it over
229. elected log items You only have the option of removing all the log items 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance System test log 2 Ifthe Unified Manager indicates that there are hidden subheadings double click on the heading to display all the items in the log If there are no log entries the Unified Manager will indicate that there are no hidden subheadings 3 Select the Del All button from above the left hand window The system displays a message asking you to confirm that you wish to remove all of the items 4 Select Yes to continue If new items have been added since the log items were displayed these new items are not erased System administration log The System administration log keeps a record of administrative events such as sessions in which a change was made invalid password attempts and password changes By using this feature you can check the items in the log check when each item in the log occurred and you can erase the log The System administration log holds a maximum of ten items Erase the log after dealing with all the items Use the System admin log selection under Maintenance to perform one of the following procedures e Display information on the items in the System Administration log on page 259 e Erase the log on page 259 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 259 Display information on the items in the System Administration log You can disp
230. elephony the Tools menu is enabled which allows you access to the Backup and Restore tool For more information on using the Backup and Restore tool refer to Backup and restore on page 234 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 78 Configuring Telephony Resources Programming order The following programming order is recommended when you initially start programming your Enterprise Edge system 1 Hardware 2 Software keys 3 Lines 4 Terminals amp Sets 5 General settings 6 Services 7 Companion and Hunt groups 8 System speed dial and Telco features 9 Passwords 10 Time amp date Programming affects system operation A Only a qualified person should perform startup installation and maintenance programming Many of the settings affect the correct operation of the system The following illustration shows an overview of the Enterprise Edge programming that is accessible through the Unified Manager Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Terminals amp Sets DN 221 528 Line access Capabilities Name User preferences Restrictions Telco features Q Lines Line 001 364 Trunk Line data Restrictions Telco features Q Restriction filters Filter 00 99 Services Ringing service Restriction service Routing service Common settings System speed dial Speed dial 01 70 Passwords COS passwords Call log passwords Registr
231. elp you plan your access codes so there are no conflicts P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 144 Configuring Telephony Resources Digit Use Heading 0 direct dial digit Access Codes 1 Park prefix Access Codes 2 the first digit of B1 DNs Startup 9 line pool A access code Access Codes Takes precedence over the External Line access code if there is a conflict external line access code Access Codes destination code Services Double click on Access codes to view settings in the Unified Manager window Park prefix The Park prefix is the first digit of the call park retrieval code that must be entered to retrieve a parked call If the Park prefix is set to None calls cannot be parked Select the setting None or 1 7 8 Tips The Park prefix cannot be the same as the Direct dial digit the External Line access code the first digit of a DN the first digit of a line pool access code or the first digit of a destination code Other programmable settings may affect which numbers appear on the window during programming Although the numbers 0 to 9 are valid Park prefix settings some may have been already assigned elsewhere by default or by programming changes To avoid a conflict refer to the table of default settings in the description of External code If DN length is changed and the changed DNs conflict with the Park prefix the setting chan
232. enance and Metrics headings are described in Maintenance on page 233 Note To jump to any section for more information click the blue underlined text and the information is automatically displayed Terminals amp Sets Lines Restriction filters Services System speed dial Passwords Time and date General settings Hunt groups Companion Telco features Software keys Hardware Maintenance Metrics Allows you to assign settings to each telephone Allows you to assign settings to each trunk and target line Allows you to apply restriction filters for external calls Allows you to create services such as night ringing routing and restrictions for making external calls Allows you to create speed dial codes that can be used by any telephone in the system Allows you to view and change passwords Allows you to set the time and date on the system clock Allows you to change system wide settings Allows you to create and manage hunt groups Allows you to assign settings for portable telephones Allows you to assign settings for external voice message services Allows you to access system identification and enter software keys when adding features to the system Allows you to configure the trunks and modules used by the system Allows you to perform routine system maintenance such as backup and restore and allows you to provision modules Allows you to see diagnostic information about the system By selecting T
233. eneral settings 135 Business name 136 Feature settings 136 Call log space 142 Direct dial 142 CAP assignment 143 Access codes 143 Remote access 146 DN lengths 148 Network Name Display 149 Programming Network Name Display 150 Call by Call service selection for PRI 151 Programming Call by Call service selection 154 Hospitality 155 Hunt groups 159 Adding or removing members from a group 160 Moving members of a group 161 Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 162 Setting the distribution mode 163 Setting the hunt delay 163 Programming busy line setting 164 Programming the queue time out 164 Programming the overflow set 164 Setting the name 165 Companion 166 Registration 166 Changing the Registration password 167 Radio data 168 Register individual portables 170 System programming 170 Directed Call Pickup 171 Group Pickup 171 Wireless Call Forward No Answer 171 Telco features 172 Voice Message center numbers 172 Outgoing Name and Number Blocking 172 Software keys 173 System Identification Number 173 Entering the software keys 173 Hardware 175 Module 175 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Contents vii Card 176 Tl Parameters 181 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 185 Viewing Enterprise Edge services 186 DHCP 186 DHCP LAN settings 187 DNS settings 192 Routing 192 LAN Routing 193 WAN Routing 201 SNMP 202 SNMP Community List Manager List and Trap Com
234. ent Problems with external paging Use the Button Inquiry feature Feature 0J to verify the feature of a programmable memory button Check the wiring between the 50 pin connector and the paging amplifier or between the connections shown in the external paging wiring chart Feature Pin Page out Tip 40 Black Slate Page out Ring 15 Slate Black Page M ake 41 Yellow Blue Page Common 16 Blue Yellow Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 293 3 Test external paging Feature 6 2 to ensure that it is working The nominal output signal from the Enterprise Edge is 100 mV across 600 Q Problems with Music on Hold and Background Music Although Music on Hold and Background Music are separate features they share the same wiring and customer supplied music source 1 Ensure that the proper feature access code Feature _ 8 6J is turned on Adjust the volume using the volume control bar Use the Button Inquiry feature Feature 0J to verify the feature on a programmable memory button If there is trouble with Music on Hold or Background Music check the feature settings in the Unified Manager by selecting Resources Telephony General settings and then Feature settings Check the wiring between the music source and the 50 pin connector Ensure that the music source is turned o
235. ent over this interface the router includes the routes learned over this interface but poisoned metrics All metric values are set to RIP infinity 16 for the routes learned through this interface This results in the fastest convergence Triggered Lets users enable triggered updates or immediate route update Updates announcements whenever a metric or other parameter changes in the route table entries If triggered updates are enabled the changes are gathered for the interval specified in the global parameter Triggered Update Interval and then sent over this interface Triggered updates results in more frequent smaller RIP updates Announce Lets users enable or disable announcing default routes in incoming route Default Route announcements Use caution when enabling this feature as improper configuration causes a loss of network connectivity Default routes are always set statically on the router Accept Default Lets users enable or disable accepting incoming default routes Route Set default routes as static routes If you are run Net Link Manager to automatically backup primary WAN link using a dial up link it manages the default routes and the default routes that you add are non operational as soon as a link breaks or comes up P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 196 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services To modify the configuration of the LAN1 routing summary screen
236. eone working at a telephone with answer buttons an attendant for example can receive all ringing and visual indication of incoming calls for other telephones and answer those calls when necessary One telephone can have up to four Answer buttons An Answer button is automatically assigned to a telephone when that telephone is assigned an Answer DN Answer DN The internal or directory number DN of a telephone that is monitored by an Answer button You can assign up to four Answer DNs to a telephone under Line Access in Terminals and Sets programming Application Program Interface API An API is the specific method prescribed by an operating system or by another application program when a programmer writes an application program The API is used to make requests of the operating system or another application Unlike the graphical user interface or command interface which are direct user interfaces the API is an interface to an operating system or a program Application A computer program that performs a wide range of tasks as specified by the user Examples of application programs include word processing packages spreadsheet packages and accounting packages ARP See Address Resolution Protocol asynchronous A method of transmission where the time intervals between characters are not required to be equal and signals are sourced from independent clocks with different frequencies and phase relationships Start and stop bi
237. eport parameters 1 On the navigation tree click the Call Detail Recording navigation key to expand the navigation tree 2 Click Report Params from the navigation tree Clicking the Report Parameters navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Report Params The Report Parameters screen appears The Call Detail Recording report parameters are Attribute Description Format Lets user specify the record format from SL 1 Norstar The default format is SL 1 Report Type Lets users select the report type from Standard Standard call information only CLID Standard call information with CLID records Real time Report real time call information for incoming calls only available only when Norstar format is selected All Report standard call information with CLID records and real time call information available only when Norstar format is selected The default report type is Standard Language Lets users select the language from English French The default language is English Report Filter Lets users select the report filter type from Outgoing Report only outgoing calls Incoming calls are not reported Account Code Reports only calls with account code stamped Prefix Report only calls with digits matched that long distance code in the prefix table All Reports all calls The default report filter is All Feature Code F9 Lets users specify the Feature Code F
238. epresentative determines how calls are routed Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your service provider Dialing Plan and PRI The Dialing Plan supports PRI connectivity to public and private networks The dialing plan is a collection of features responsible for processing and routing incoming and outgoing calls All PRI calls must go through a dialing plan The Dialing Plan e allows incoming calls to be routed to sets based on service type and digits received e provides the ability to map user dialed digits to a service type on a Call by Call basis e allows long distance carrier selection through user dialed Carrier Access Codes Consult your customer service representative to determine how your dialing plan is configured ISDN hardware The Digital Trunk Media Bay Module EE DTM is configured for PRI The EE DTM is also referred to as the Digital Trunk Interface DTI In most PRI network configurations you need one EE DTM configured as PRI to act as the primary clock reference The only time when you may not have an EE DTM designated as the PRI primary clock reference is in a network where your Enterprise Edge system is connected back to back with another switch using a PRI link If the other switch is loop timed to your Enterprise Edge system your EE DTM PRI can be designated as a timing master If your Enterprise Edge has two EE DTMs configured as PRI you
239. er Headsets are not Enterprise Edge system components and must be supplied by the customer Held Line Reminder A telephone rings and displays the message On hold LINENAM when an external call has been placed on hold for a certain period of time The Held Line Reminder feature and Remind delay are set under Ftr settings in System programming HF Answerback See Handsfree Answerback High level Data Link Control HDLC HDLC is a group of protocols or rules for transmitting data between network points or nodes Data is organized into a unit called a frame and sent across a network to a destination that verifies its successful arrival The HDLC protocol also manages the flow or pacing at which data is sent HDLC is one of the most commonly used protocols in Layer 2 of the industry communication reference model Open Systems Interconnection OSI P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 366 Glossary Hold button This button is used to suspend calls so that the person using the telephone can perform another task without disconnecting the caller Hook Switch Flash See Link time Host Name In networking the name of a computer that primarily provides services such as database access to other computers or Enterprise Edge Servers in the domain The host name is associated with a unique IP address Since the Enterprise Edge Server has a unique IP address it qualifies as a host Host system sign
240. erations G uide 252 QoS Graph Counters 1 Total Octets Total number of octets sent by QoS 2 Total Packets Total number of packets sent by QoS 3 Total Priority Octets Total number of octets carried in premium priority QoS Best Effort Queue Counters Note This is a proprietory counter 1 Total Queue XX Octets Total number of octets carried at specified queue s priority 2 Total Queue XX Packets Total number of packets carried at specified queue s priority 3 Total Queue XX Packets Dropped Total number of packets dropped at specified queue probably due to insufficient buffer space Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 253 Maintenance programming for telephony resources You can view the Maintenance programming by choosing Resources Telephony Maintenance The Maintenance section of programming has ten headings For detailed information on maintenance programming select one of the following System version displays the version number of the system processor Module port status allows you to check and change the status of modules and ports in your system System test log displays a list of test results event messages and alarm codes System administration log _ displays a list of system initialization sessions invalid password attempts and password changes Network event log displays a list of events and alarms Provisioning allows yo
241. erprise Edge system has two EE DTMs you cannot assign both EE DTMs as primary reference or both EE DTMs as secondary reference You can only have one primary reference and one secondary reference per system Call by call service selection By default incoming calls are routed based on the Called Party Number The last N digits of the called party number are used as Received Digits to find a target line where N is the Received Number Length For example the incoming calling party number is 800 555 1234 The received digit number length is 4 and the result is 1234 These last four digits are used to route the call Depending on the protocol and the service alternate routing maps may be defined 1 To change the incoming call routing for a service select a different service under Protocol Call by Call Routing FX The first applicable service for the given protocol is displayed In this example the service is FX Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 181 2 Change the mapping that is applied to incoming calls of this service type to obtain the received digits In all cases the received digits are used to find a target line or to activate Remote Access None No mapping is applied The last N digits of the Called Party Number are used as received digits Note that if there is no called party number may occur with some FX calls the call wil
242. ers including those from Cisco and Nortel Networks allow administrators to set up priorities by IP addresses port numbers or protocol types which is similar to the priority filters described above Note This information is specific to H 323 traffic in legacy networks In this environment Enterprise Edge allows H 323 voice and optional video packets to travel across the WAN link with high priority in both directions using existing router features P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 44 Using Enterprise Edge Services An administrator must reserve a block of UDP port numbers and configure them as high priority in both Enterprise Edge and the remote router at the other end of the WAN link Enterprise Edge forces all of the admitted H 323 streams to fall into the reserved port range by using a proprietary technique so that these H 323 voice video packets can get high priority This is completely transparent to the end H 323 terminals See Appendix C Setting Up Remote Routers on page 349 for additional information on setting UDP port ranges for remote routers Note If an administrator configures all routers in their corporate network with the same reserved port numbers both in and out admitted H 323 streams can get end to end high priority However routers connected to WAN links are more critical because WAN links are typically the bottlenecks You can set up best effort traffic priorities through t
243. ers when denying numbers or creating overrides 7 Youcan delete a restriction The overrides will be deleted as well and the restrictions will renumber to fill the gap Default filters Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing and cannot be changed Filter 01 is pre programmed with five restrictions and some associated overrides In Filter 01 restriction 02 and override 005 allow long distance directory assistance calls Filter 01 reflects the fact that area codes can now have any digit as a second digit This is designed to be used with the North American dialing plan The dialing string 911 the number for emergency assistance in North America is included as both a restriction and an override in filter 01 This arrangement prevents anyone from blocking calls for emergency assistance on lines or sets using the default filter Filter Restrictions denied Overrides 00 Unrestricted dialing 01 01 0 02 1 001 1800 002 1877 003 1888 03 911 001 911 04 411 05 976 06 1976 07 1AAA976 08 1900 09 L AAA900 10 5551212 02 99 Norestrictions or exceptions programmed Note Default filters are only loaded at a cold start Filters 02 03 and 04 although not preset with restrictions and overrides are used as default filters in these programming headings Filter Heading Sub heading 02 Terminals amp Sets Set restrictions 03 Lines Line restriction 04
244. ervices available for each resource on the Enterprise Edge Unified Manager system The resources and resource services are Column Definition Name Shows each configurable resource service Status Shows the status of each configurable resource service Version Shows the version of each configurable resource service Description Shows a brief description of each configurable resource service System name Unified Manager often shows an example of how to format information to the right of the box Type the information in that format To enter the system name 1 Inthe System Name box type the system name Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 59 2 Press the Tab key to save your changes To configure system resources and services 1 Inthe Resource options click the resource you want to configure 2 In the Services options click the resource service you want to configure Scroll to see any settings that do not appear 3 On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Services The services dialog box appears 4 From the Status list box enable or disable the resource service defined in the Name box 5 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager 6 Repeat this process to enable or disable DHCP DNS Routing SNMP QoS VoIP Gateway Qos Monitor Web Cache Voice Record TAPI Service Provider Vo
245. established router that has not updated its table eligible for removal Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 195 Attribute Description Route Removal Interval Lets users specify in seconds the time interval between route expires and when it is removed from the routing table Route Lets users specify in seconds the time interval between route Announcement announcements Interval Route Tag Lets users create a special tag that is included in routes announced over the interface This helps identify route packets while debugging routing problems using a network sniffer Poisoned Reverse Lets users enable poison reverse The choices are Actual the actual original RIP updates are performed over this interface All the routes learned through this interface are also included as is in the RIP updates sent over this interface This leads to mutually deceiving route updates that require multiple routing updates that is termed counting to infinity in RIP terms Split in the routing updates sent over this interface router does not include the routes learned over this interface This mode performs better than Actual but still requires significant amount of time to converge routes It requires all routes corresponding to an unreachable network expire before removing them from the routing table Poison Reverse in the routing updates s
246. ested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with ICES 003 CLASS A Canadian EMI Requirements Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Telecommunication registration Enterprise Edge equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Canada CS 03 and US Federal Commission FCC Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry Canada 332 5980 A and FCC AB6CAN 20705 KF E key system AB6CAN 20706 MF E hybrid system and AB6CAN 23740 PF E PBX system Connection of the Enterprise Edge telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local telecommunications company This type of customer provided equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 About this document 15 Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some
247. estination as the dial out Digit absorption should be set to 1 Because overflow routing directs calls using alternate line pools a call may be affected by different line filters when it is handled by overflow routing Using a dialing plan to route outgoing PRI calls The Dialing Plan supports PRI connectivity to public and private networks The dialing plan is a collection of features responsible for processing and routing outgoing calls All PRI calls must go through a dialing plan The Dialing Plan e allows Enbloc dialing by buffering user dialed digits until a complete DN has been dialed Enbloc dialing is a requirement for PRI P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 124 Configuring Telephony Resources provides the ability to map user dialed digits to a service type on a Call by Call basis allows long distance carrier selection via user dialed Carrier Access Codes allows incoming calls to be routed according to the service type and the digits received Enbloc dialing The Private DN Length must be set to the number of digits users dial to reach other nodes in the private network The Private DN Length parameter is used by the PRI trunk to determine when a complete number has been dialed The PSTN DN Length Table is used by the PRI trunk to determine when a complete PSTN DN has been dialed Entries in the table consist of two fields Prefix and DN Length Carrier codes A multi digit Carrie
248. et protocol IP PPP is sometimes considered a member of the TCP IP suite of protocols Relative to the Open Systems Interconnection OSI reference model PPP provides layer 2 data link layer service Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 51 PPP is a full duplex protocol that can be used on various physical media including twisted pair or fiber optic lines or satellite transmission It uses a variation of High Speed Data Link Control HDLC for packet encapsulation PPP can process synchronous as well as asynchronous communication PPP can share a line with other users and it has error detection PPP on the primary WAN link uses synchronous point to point communication Because the physical media is point to point authentication attributes are not supported in this mode Enterprise Edge supports PPP Compression Control Protocol CCP RFC 1962 with STAC compression algorithm This compression is done by software and can be enabled or disabled by using a parameter in PPP configurations Backup Up WAN Connection In Enterprise Edge the back up WAN connection is a V 90 modem that is used as a dial up WAN link The modem is provided through an RJ 11 connector The modem has the following features V 90 56 kbps ITU standard V 34 33 6 kbps ITU standard e V 42 MNP 2 4 error control V 42 bis MNP 5 data compression e Compatible with ITU and Bell Standards from
249. eters 74 primary links access parameters 67 frame relay parameters 70 line parameters 68 overview 66 performance graphs and tables 73 PPP parameters 73 WAN routing services 201 warm start definition 239 Web cache settings overview 216 web caching proxy guidelines 40 introduction 40 web based administration setting up 55 wild card character 109 118 WinkStart signal type 105 wiring loopback test 272 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02
250. etion and return to Unified Manager 4 Click the DHCP navigation key to close the navigation tree P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 192 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services DNS settings To configure DNS services settings select Services DNS from the navigation tree This brings you to the DNS Summary screen The DNS Summary attributes are Attribute Description Description Lets users view the description of the server in cache mode Version Lets users view the version of the software interface Status Lets users enable or disable the DNS cache proxy in Enterprise Edge Domain Lets users specify the domain name that Enterprise Edge and its DHCP clients uses When modified contents of this setting are automatically copied to Domain Name global options O15 under DHCP Primary Server Lets users specify the primary server IP address in a valid dot format More than one address can be specified separated by a space DNS cache uses them in the specified order to resolve names Forward Timeout Lets users specify the time out in seconds used in resolving queries using the DNS servers that are specified in DNS server To modify the configuration of the DNS summary 1 From the Status list box select the status 2 Inthe Domain box type the domain 3 Inthe Primary Server box type the primary server 4 Inthe Forward Timeout box type the forward timeout 5 P
251. ettings for one telephone you can copy those settings to other telephones Set restrictions Set restrictions lets you assign a restriction filter to a telephone to prevent certain numbers from being dialed from that telephone and prevent certain features from being used by a telephone Set lock You can adjust the amount of personal programming and customizing that can be done at a telephone Select the setting None Partial or Full None allows you to access all features on your telephone Partial prevents programming autodial buttons changing dialing modes Automatic Dial programming user speed dial numbers Pre Dial and Standard Dial programming feature buttons e using Voice Call Deny moving line buttons saving a number with Saved Number e changing the display language Redial Full in addition to the restrictions outlined for Partial lock prevents changing Background Music changing Privacy changing Do Not Disturb using Ring Again using Call Forward all calls using Send Message using Trunk Answer activating Services Allow last number Click Y or N to allow a set to use the Last Number Redial feature Allow saved number Click Y or N to allow a set to use the Saved Number Redial feature Allow link Click Y or N to allow a set to use the Link feature a host signaling option Schedules You can assign a different restriction filter for normal service and for each of six sch
252. external line or telephone but a line or telephone cannot be assigned to more than one control set One recommendation is to have one control set for all lines and a different control set for all telephones A service can be turned on manually or automatically for all external lines and telephones controlled by a given control set but you cannot combine schedules In other words a service can only be active as normal service or one of the six schedules at any one time You can have several schedules active as long as they are using different services The default control set for all lines and telephones is 221 Schedule names The schedule name is shown on the display of the control set when the schedule is turned on It identifies the active schedule Enter a name of one to seven characters in the Name field at the top of the Unified Manager window Tips The default names of the six possible schedules are only suggestions and may be changed to any other name A schedule name can be one to seven characters long It is recommended that you reserve certain schedules 4 5 and 6 exclusively for alternate call routing Routing service Schedule times Schedule start and stop times are set at times you are most likely to want each service to be active Under Common settings Schedule times enter the start and stop times for each schedule on each day Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02
253. f no manager entries are created the Enterprise Edge device accepts SNMP requests from all stations If there is a list of manager entries Enterprise Edge server accepts SNMP requests from the IP Addresses specified in the list Trap List Lets users specify the entry name used to identify an individual trap community entry on the SNMP agent Its value must follow certain conventions It must have the prefix T followed by a unique number that identifies the trap community entry on the agent For example T2 is a valid value While adding specify non recurring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing trap community entry name it modifies the existing trap community entry Using non sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers While modifying a trap community entry you can t change the name The trap community entry name does not have any significance other than to uniquely identify an entry To modify the Community List Manager List and Trap Community List use the following procedures P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 204 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services To add to the community list l On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Community The Community List dialog box appears Click the Community List box and type the community list Click the Community Name box and type the community name Scroll to vie
254. ffice hear a caller through your telephone speaker The caller hears you only when you speak into the receiver and cannot hear other people in the office You can cancel Group Listen for the current call Group Listen is cancelled automatically when you hang up the Group Listen call H H 323 H 323 is the standard for using IP to send voice and video within intranets and on the public Internet Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 365 Handsfree A feature you can use to make calls without using the telephone receiver Full Handsfree is activated under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming When it is activated a Handsfree Mute button is automatically assigned to the telephone Handsfree HF Answerback When activated this feature automatically turns on the microphone at a telephone receiving a Voice Call so that the person receiving the call can respond without lifting the receiver It is activated under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming Handsfree Mute button See Handsfree Hard disk drive A data storage device that uses non removable rigid magnetic platters Hard disk drives work faster and store more data than disk drives do for diskettes Hardware The physical components of the Enterprise Edge system HDLC See High level Data Link Control Headset A head mounted or ear mounted telephone receiver that is used instead of the hand held receiv
255. filters in other routers to give higher priority to VoIP traffic In all the routers that carry VoIP traffic from the Enterprise Edge server you must set filters that classify the traffic to and from these port ranges as high priority P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 212 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services To delete port ranges 1 Inthe Port Ranges table click the port ranges you want to delete 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete PortRange A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion 3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager 4 Click the QoS navigation key to close the navigation tree VoIP Gateway To configure VoIP gateway settings 1 On the navigation tree click VoIP Gateway Clicking the VoIP Gateway navigation key expands the navigation tree but doesn t display the summary of configurable VoIP Gateway services You must click VoIP Gateway The VoIP Gateway Summary screen appears The VoIP Gateway Summary attributes are Attribute Description Description Shows the description of the VoIP gateway Version Shows the version of the VoIP gateway Status Lets users enable disable pause or continue the VoIP gateway service 2 From the Status list box select Enable or Disable 3 Press the Tab key to save the settings VoIP local and remote gateways To configure VoIP local and remot
256. following guidelines when using DNS e Ifthe Enterprise Edge DNS service is enabled make sure that clients always use Enterprise Edge as their DNS server e When it is disabled set the DNS Server field in DHCP configuration to the remote DNS server IP address If DHCP service is also disabled in Enterprise Edge tell all clients to set the DNS server in their IP configuration to the remote DNS server e The DNS proxy carries security features because it keeps all of the internal IP addresses from external web servers e You are required to fill in the remote Primary DNS server IP address See DNS settings on page 192 for instructions P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 40 Using Enterprise Edge Services Web Caching Proxy When you use Enterprise Edge as a web proxy Enterprise Edge can store or cache information downloaded from the Internet A proxy is a server that acts on behalf of another Web caching allows LAN workstations to share common information downloaded from the Internet Data is usually cached on individual workstations Each time a workstation on the LAN requests information from the Internet the individual s request is sent to the Internet and the information is returned to their workstation If multiple LAN workstations request common data a web cache on the network reduces download time from the Internet With Enterprise Edge configured as a web proxy with web caching e LAN wo
257. formation is passed between trunks in cases where Direct System Inward Access DISA has resulted in tandeming of trunks Programming Network Name Display The Business Name and the Set Name make up the information that is used for the outgoing Calling name or connected name Calling connected name is only sent once the Business Name is programmed To program the Business Name use Hunt groups BusName Enter a Business Name You can enter a maximum of eight letters It is recommended that you use a blank space for the last character to act as a separator between the Business name and Set name To program the Set Name 1 Under Terminals amp Sets select the set number of the telephone 2 Under Line access Name enter a maximum of seven letters Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 151 3 Other areas that must also be programmed include e the OLI number see OLI on page 83 e under Telco features the Call ID must be set to yes see Auto called ID on page 93 e under lines you need to enter the set number where you want the CLID to appear see CLID set on page 102 Outgoing Name and Number Blocking When activated Feature 8 blocks the outgoing name and number ONN on a per call basis When this feature is used the call is flagged to the CO so that the name and number will not be presented to the person being called The CO is alerted by two methods
258. fy the subnet mask of the LAN interface Type the data in the following format 255 255 255 255 Physical Address Lets users to view the physical address of the LAN interface If the IP Address or subnet mask of the LAN interfaces changes a DHCP scope associated with the LAN interface is created in the DHCP server running on the Enterprise Edge server This scope contains all necessary parameters to the clients of the DHCP server configured so that they use Enterprise Edge as their default gateway and a WINS server The scope also contains default parameters for the range of the addresses based on the address of the Enterprise Edge interface and subnet mask Navigate the services screen in the user interface to see DHCP settings for the scope Description Lets users view a description of the network interface card supporting the LAN interface Version Lets users view the version indicator of the LAN interface Speed Lets users view the speed of the connection to the LAN interface The value for this field is valid only if the LAN interface is enabled Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring networking resources 65 Attribute Description Connection Type Lets users specify the connection type to the LAN interface The following values are supported and are interpreted as follows Auto Sense The interface uses auto negotiation protocol to choose the maximum
259. ges to None External code External code allows you to assign the external line access code This code is used to allow M7100 telephones and Enterprise Edge ATA 2 to access external lines Select the setting None or 7 8 9 Tips The external line access code cannot conflict with the Park prefix the direct dial digit the first digit of a line pool access code the first digit of a DN or the first digit of a destination code If DN range and the changed DNs conflict with the external line access code the setting changes to None Direct dial digit Direct dial digit allows you to dial a single system wide digit that can be used to call a specific telephone called a direct dial telephone Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 145 Select the setting None or 0 7 8 Tips Another direct dial telephone an extra dial telephone can be assigned for each schedule in Services programming The direct dial digit cannot be the same as the first digit of a DN of a line pool access code the external line access code or the Call Park prefix It cannot be the first digit of a destination code If DN length is changed and the changed DNs conflict with the direct dial digit the setting changes to None Auto DN For calls answered without DISA no password is required to access the Enterprise Edge system The Class of Service COS that
260. gth This feature allows you to change the number of digits for all DNs The maximum length is seven The default and minimum length is 3 1 Select the setting 3 4 5 6 or 7 You will be prompted If NNV Message is installed all messages and mailboxes will be deleted 2 Select OK to save the new DN length Cancel restores the original value Do not change DN length immediately after a system startup You must wait for at least two minutes after a system startup before you change the DN length Data devices drop calls when the DN length is changed These data devices use the B2 channel The M7100 M7310 and M7324 telephones use the B1 channel Calls are not dropped for these telephones The DN length change is completed within two minutes depending on the size of the installed Enterprise Edge system System response may briefly slow down during this time Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 149 Tips A DN length change if required should be the first programming change on a newly installed Enterprise Edge system Each increase in length places the digit 2 in front of any existing DN For example if DN 234 was increased to a length of 4 the new DN would be 2234 If the DN length is changed so that a conflict is created with the Park prefix external line access code direct dial digit or any line pool access code the setting for the p
261. gure the prime set for a Hunt Group s line to None to avoid delayed ring transfer of external Hunt Group calls to the prime set before the Hunt Group can receive the call For more information about programming line settings see Prime set on page 102 A line can be assigned to only one group To assign a line to a hunt group 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Click Line Assignment a Click the Add button Nn Type a line number for example 061 in the line number box 6 Click the Save button To unassign a line 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Click Line Assignment 4 Click the line number for example Line 061 to be deleted 5 Click the Delete button To unassign all line in a hunt group 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Click Line Assignment Click the Delete All button Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 163 Setting the distribution mode There are three modes of call distribution e Broadcast trings each set in the group simultaneously Calls are handled one at a time other calls are queued As soon as a call is picked up the call next in the queue is presented to the Hunt Group without having to wait for queue time out e In Broadcast mode a single incoming call
262. he Domain setting in the DNS Summary to make a change in this setting Occasionally you can change the value of Domain in DHCP If you do first make any changes to Domain in the DNS Summary to avoid overwriting your changes WINS Node Type Lets users specify a clients WINS node type Enterprise Edge automatically sets this value to 8 indicating H Node if the IP Address is changed on any of the LAN interfaces All DHCP clients of Enterprise Edge are set to h node type when they get their IP properties from Enterprise Edge This setting configures the DHCP client PCs to use p node name resolution before resorting to b node name resolution which is efficient when there is a WINS server configured for the network Enterprise Edge also includes a WINS server Other options available for this field are 1 indicates a b node that uses broadcast mechanism for NetBIOS name resolution 2 indicates a p node that uses point to point mechanism involving a WINS Server for NetBIOS name resolution 4 indicates a m node that first uses broadcast and then point to point mechanism for NetBIOS name resolution Description Shows a description of the Enterprise Edge server Version Shows the version number of the Enterprise Edge server Status Lets users enable or disable the DHCP server When disabled clients need to be assigned static IP addresses 2 Inthe Domain Name box type the appropriate domain name This is
263. he options under the Management heading to configure network management parameters For more information on configuring these parameters refer to Configuring Management Settings on page 229 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 32 Enterprise Edge Overview Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 3 This chapter includes information on IP routing Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Domain Name Server DNS Service Web Caching Proxy Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Quality of Service QoS Using Traffic Filters Using Protocol Prioritization Queues LAN Connections WAN Connections Routing and IP services supported by Enterprise Edge Enterprise Edge supports the following routing and IP Services Routing Services IP Routing Protocol RAS Service and Dial In Capabilities for Management Purposes Only RIP Packet Filtering IP Services DHCP DNS Web Caching VoIP voice over IP Service P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 34 Using Enterprise Edge Services IP Routing This section includes information on e IP Routing Overview e Enterprise Edge IP routing specifics e IP addressing overview e Static routing e Routing Information Protocol RIP e Packet Filtering source address destination address IP Protocol ID TCP Port UDP
264. he web based Unified Manager by using the following filter criteria e Source IP address with mask e Destination IP address with mask e IP protocol ID e g TCP UDP or ICMP e Source port range e Destination port range e Incoming TOS field There are a total of 8 priority classes for best effort traffic in Enterprise Edge By default all best effort traffic is sent to Class 5 queue 5 with Class 1 the highest and Class 8 the lowest in priority Admission Control Enterprise Edge allows users to set a certain percentage of the WAN bandwidth for premium traffic This traffic takes strict priority over best effort traffic In this version H 323 VoIP flows need to pass the admission control process to be treated as premium traffic For admission control Enterprise Edge uses the WAN Premium Bandwidth parameter Specifically for each H 323 flow QoS performs admission control using the negotiated coding algorithm A flow is admitted as a premium flow if the current total WAN premium usage plus the new flow is lower than the allocated WAN premium bandwidth Otherwise the flow is rejected and the flow is still delivered as best effort traffic Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 45 As areference point for a typical G 729 codec each VoIP flow requires the following WAN bandwidth depending on the codec sample rate G 729 Sample Rate Sample Rate Sample R
265. hen allocate a block of IP addresses for that scope Note Enterprise Edge retrieves many default DHCP parameters from the LAN interface parameters Therefore you must configure a LAN interface before you configure the DHCP server for that interface You must define one DHCP scope for each LAN interface For DHCP service there are global parameters that affect all scopes and there are parameters that are specific for each scope To configure global attributes for DHCP 1 On the navigation tree click Services DHCP to view the Global Options and Summary screens for DHCP Click the DHCP navigation key to expand the navigation tree but clicking on the key doesn t display the Global Options and Summary screens You must click DHCP The DHCP Global Options and Summary settings appear Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 187 The settings in the DHCP Global Options and DHCP Summary screen are Setting Definition Domain Name Lets users specify a domain name that is passed to the client when Enterprise Edge responds to a client s DHCP requests This setting is automatically set to Domain field in DNS Summary page This means that all the DHCP clients of an Enterprise Edge server are in the same DNS domain as the Enterprise Edge server This is also correct since Enterprise Edge runs only a DNS cache and does not introduce another DNS zone Change t
266. here more than one procedure is given for a particular problem the procedures represent different options from which you should select just one 1 Diagnose the trouble by determining e the types of problems users have experienced e the frequency of the problems e how many telephones are affected 2 Access the system performance graphs and tables to view the system usage and any system faults For more information refer to Viewing system performance and fault alarms on page 283 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 283 Check how a feature is being used A problem may have been reported because of a misunderstanding about how a feature works Confirm that the person who reported a problem understands the intended use and operation of any feature in question Run a Station set test Feature J 8 0 6J Check the wiring and hardware connections If the problem persists run a Maintenance session as described in Maintenance programming for telephony resources on page 253 If hardware is defective replace it If the trouble requires expert advice use the instructions in How to Get Help on page 283 How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If you purchased a Nortel
267. hes to call a user in the east end branch within the private network they dial 6221 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 323 Note The quality of the IP trunk connection is assessed during initial call setup and if the quality is poor Enterprise Edge will try to find an alternate route to complete the call fallback based on the programming definitions in the routing table For simplicity this example does not show programming for fallback In this example if the quality of the IP connection is considered too low during the call setup phase the call would fail For an example of fallback programming see Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway on page 325 Note Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway requires a software keycode In the table that follows private network routing information is highlighted in gray Public network routing information is shown in white Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 s I IP IP o i co Enterprise Edge Enterprise Edge West end Branch East end Branch P Address 192 1 1 2 P Address 192 1 1 3 Meridian M1 DN 4221 I P Address 192 1 1 4 PRI public protocol Remote Gateway Configuration West end 6 192 1 1 3 centi 4 192 1 1 4 Office 9 192 1 1 4 East end 2 192 1 1 2 4 192 1 1 4 9 192 1 1 4 The Call Managers examine the Called Party Number
268. hey list Each route in the list can be any combination of the following packet filtering features By default no packet filter is configured Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 37 Enterprise Edge supports the following packet filtering features for IP Packet Filter Feature Comments Source Address The source address field of the packet to be filtered Source Mask The source address mask of the packet to be filtered Destination Address The destination address field of the packet to be filtered Destination Mask The destination address mask of the packet to be filtered Protocol The protocol type of the packet to be filtered Source Port The source port of the packet to be filtered This field applies only if protocol value is TCP or UDP Destination Port The destination port of the packet to be filtered This field applies only if protocol value is TCP or UDP ICMP Type The ICMP type field of the packet to be filtered This field applies only if protocol value is ICMP ICMP Code The ICMP type field of the packet to be filtered This field applies only if protocol value is ICMP Note When you set filters you must forward packets going to the RPC port port 135 TCP or UDP for correct Unified Manager operation LAN to LAN Fast Path Routing Enterprise Edge provides an optional second 10 100 LAN interface If the second LAN i
269. his disable then enable the affected modules using Module port status Use the following procedure to disable a device immediately 1 Identify which device you wish to disable For information on how to perform this procedure refer to Identify a device connected to the system on page 255 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 257 2 Select Disable The system displays a warning that this action will disable the port 3 Select OK The system disables the device in one minute or immediately if the device is idle Press Cancel to leave this display without disabling the device Enable a device Use the following procedure to enable a disabled device 1 Identify which device you wish to disable For information on how to perform this procedure refer to Identify a device connected to the system on page 255 2 Select the device and then select Enable The system displays a messaging indicating that the device is being enabled System test log The System test log shows you a list of diagnostic test results audits event messages and alarm codes By using this feature you can check log items any current alarms timing of log events and the number of consecutive occurrences of an event or an alarm In addition you can use the System test log selection to erase the log The System test log holds a maximum of 20 items You should check and record these items at regular in
270. his value is write only This value never appears when read For a service that is enabled one of its operational statuses that is Up or Down appears when its Status field is read When this value is set it indicates that the user wants to enable the corresponding component and bring it to an Up state It is probable that the first happens The second action depends on the component For a network interface the Up state does not happen unless user connects a link to the interface For a service this may not happen only if the system encounters an error of some kind during the requested action Disabled This value can be either read or set When read this indicates that the component is disabled from operation When set it indicates the same in addition to taking the component to a Down state before disabling Paused This value can be either read or set When read this indicates that the service is enabled and is given the command to pause When set it indicates the same pausing the service further Continue This value can only be set It can be set only when the service in a Paused state It resumes paused service System name date and time To change the system name date and time 1 Click the System navigation key to expand the navigation tree The System Settings dialog box appears Clicking the System navigation key expands the navigation tree but doesn t display the summary of configurable Identifica
271. hold box type the error threshold 5 Inthe Monitored Events box type the appropriate monitored events 6 Inthe DS Code box type the DS code 7 Inthe Compression Enabled PVCs box type the compression enabled PVCs list 8 Inthe Access Rate box type the access rate in kbps 9 Press the Tab key to save the settings Scroll down from the WAN Frame Relay Parameters screen to find the PVC Congestion Control table The WAN PVC Congestion Control settings are Column Description Entry CC Uniquely identifies the congestion control entry on the interface Use the format specified for the entry identifier It must include the prefix CC followed by a unique number in the table For example CC2 is a valid number If you don t use consecutive numbers while adding the entry the system adjusts them to be consecutive If you specify an existing entry while adding an entry the existing entry is modified with new values While modifying an entry the name can t be changed DLCI Lets users set the DLCI number for the PVC to be congestion controlled If a DLCI is not configured it is not congestion controlled Enterprise Edge uses one second intervals to measure this parameter CIR Lets users set in kbits the carrier guarantees the router transmits over a specified time interval when congestion is not present Enterprise Edge uses one second intervals to measure this parameter Committed Burst bC
272. hows the version of the voice mail service Description Shows the description of the voice mail service 2 Click the Services navigation key to close the navigation tree P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 228 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Management Settings Q The following shows the programming map for Management Management User Manager Alarm Manager In the Enterprise Edge Unified Manager Management enables you to manage user and alarm settings Within Management you have the following options e User Manager which brings up the User Profile screen Here you can add modify and delete user names along with their passwords and access privileges e Alarm Manager which brings up the Alarm Database and SNMP Trap screens Here you can modify the collection parameters of the Alarm Database You can also enable or disable the sending of various SNMP traps User Manager When Enterprise Edge ships the following user IDs are available e manager administrator user with manager as the default password e user read only user with user as the default password e supervisor administrator user with super as the default password Note After installation change the password for all administrator users or delete them after creating your own administrator users To access the User Manager se
273. ialing the digits 9 1 1 State and local requirements for support of Emergency 911 Dialing service by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your local telecommunications service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations emergency telephone A single line telephone also referred to as a 500 2500 telephone that becomes active when there is no power to the Enterprise Edge Server Ethernet A widely used Local Area Network LAN protocol that is the original Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detect CSMA CD LAN that lets PCs and or Enterprise Edge Servers listen for pauses before they communicate Ethernet LANs use coaxial cable or twisted pair wiring for connecting computers evening schedule See Schedules and Services event message Event messages are stored in the system log and displayed during a Maintenance session They record a variety of events and activities in the system exceptions See Overrides Extended Data O ut EDO Extended Data Out EDO is a form of Dynamic Random Access Memory RAM in which storing data to and reading data from the memory is performed at a faster rate external call A call to a destination outside the system external code The number you dial to get an external line By default it is 9 but this can be changed under Access codes in System programming You do not always need an external code It is primarily to support the M7100 telephone and singl
274. ice Service eAlarm Service Voice Mail resource service Msc P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 60 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system Telephony resource If a resource service is not highlighted prior to prompting resource modification an error message appears that asks you to select a row in the table Click the OK button to continue Note For more information on configuring Enterprise Edge resources and services refer to Configuring networking resources on page 63 and Configuring Enterprise Edge Services on page 185 Status fields where available are the accumulation of administrative and operational status of the component queried The three administrative statuses that can be assumed by a component are e Enabled the component is enabled to operate in its normal mode with all normal parameters set When the component is enabled the component can assume any of its operational statuses e Disabled the component is disabled from operation None of the component s operational statuses are valid in this state e Paused the component is enabled and is running but is currently not accepting additional service requests The two operational statuses that can be assumed by a component are e Up the component is up and running normally e Down the component is down due to some reason normal or abnormal internal or external The Status column supports the combine
275. idual telephone and are not programmed for the system User Data is programmed at each telephone These settings for example include Personal Speed Dial and the assignment of programmable memory buttons User Datagram Protocol UDP The UDP is a protocol that offers a limited amount of service when messages are exchanged between computers in a network that uses IP UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and together with IP is sometimes referred to as UDP IP Like the Transmission Control Protocol UDP uses IP to actually transfer a data unit called a datagram from one computer to another Unlike TCP however UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packets datagrams and reassembling it at the other end Specifically UDP doesn t provide sequencing of the packets that the data arrives in This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange and therefore very little message reassembling to do may prefer UDP to TCP The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP uses UDP instead of TCP Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 389 User Filter See Restriction filter User Preferences A programming section that lets you assign autodialers user speed
276. iew 47 port ranges QoS 211 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 398 Index QoS adding 211 QoS deleting 212 QoS modifying 211 service settings 211 portable telephone disabling 166 enabling 166 troubleshooting 302 PPP parameters WAN 73 PRI Primary Rate Interface trunk 305 PRI channel disabling 272 PRI dialing plan 2 way DID 338 PRI line provisioning 271 PRI line pools 155 PRI Networking additional configuration 319 Call by call services example 319 Meridian 1 316 Meridian M1 configuration 319 prime line 82 prime set 102 prime telephone 137 139 private line 101 private network 303 remote access 307 sample configurations 333 337 tie lines 331 programming alarm telephone 138 allow last number redial 91 auto DN 145 backing up 238 CAP assignment 143 features on a set 89 93 114 hardware 175 ISDN 346 least cost routing 122 line access 81 lines 95 107 maintenance 233 278 on lines dialing restrictions 114 ISDN PRI lines 346 trunk line data programming 96 voice message center 107 passwords 130 132 routing 114 services 108 127 software keys 173 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide system 135 149 system features auxiliary ringer 114 called ID 93 CLASS assignment 93 DN length 148 extra dial telephone 113 log space 94 remote restrictions 106 restriction service 91 92 108 114 ringing 112 ringing group 113 schedule times 126 services 126 System Speed Dial 128 telco fea
277. igation key causes the key to disappear You must click Remote Gateway The VoIP Remote Gateway screen appears To modify a remote gateway 2 Inthe Remote Gateway table click the remote gateway you want to modify 3 On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Entry The Remote Gateway dialog box appears The VoIP Remote Gateway attributes are Setting Definition Name Lets users specify a logical name for the remote VoIP gateway This setting is editable only when adding a new gateway entry While modifying an existing entry this name can not be changed Destination IP Lets users specify IP Address for the remote VoIP gateway Fully qualified DNS Name or just host name where applicable or IP address in dotted format may be entered here QoS Monitor Lets users enable or disable QoS Monitor for this VoIP gateway Transmit Lets users specify the transmit threshold that is used while interacting with this Threshold VoIP gateway Receive Lets users specify the receive threshold that is used while interacting with this Threshold VoIP gateway Gateway Type Lets users specify the VoIP gateway type VoiceNet is the only permitted value in Release 1 0 Destination Lets users specify the destination digits for this gateway When the local Digits gateway sees this prefix it forwards the call to the VoIP gateway at the specified destination IP Address 4 Inthe Name box type the nam
278. igi 55 Evitise7 Biasige 55 Evt 388 8163 Evti664 Evti6es Evti666 Evtiae Evti668 Evtiaed Evtia7a Evtierl Eut irz Eut i673 55 55 S4 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Cause An unrecoverable RIM fault has occurred The radio 0109 1 in this case is disabled and taken out of service If a link is active when this error occurs the link is dropped A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs The built in self test on the Base Station has failed The radio 0109 1 in this case is disabled and taken out of service If a link is active when this error occurs the link is dropped A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs The Base Station is connected to a system that supports a radio protocol that the Enterprise Edge does not understand There is a bad signature U S only there are insufficient radio credits U S only radio credits decreased U S only UTAM keys are required U S only UTAM test failed Evaluation override is finished Disablement test is active Disablement test is finished System initialization is beginning System initialization is finished P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 268 Maintenance Event message display Evtia s Evita Evtiasz Evtigas Evties4 Evtisas Eut iS36 Evtiaa Evtis4a Evtisdl Evtisd Evtisds Evtis4s 55 55 55 55 53 53 53 55 55 55
279. ilable route number at Route e assuming that the discounted lines for calling long distance have been placed in Line pool B choose it as the line pool e enter 1 at Destination Code Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 121 A valid destination code must be used See Destination codes on page 117 View existing destination codes before entering a new code The destination code can use a different route depending on the Schedule In this example the system uses Route 002 which uses Line pool B to take advantage of the lower cost when the system is in normal mode e The route for the first schedule appears Normal Enter the defined route number 002 Tips The digit absorption setting Absorbed Length only applies to a maximum of two schedules Setting Absorbed Length to 0 minimizes the effort involved in preparing destination codes With a 0 setting the actual digits dialed by a caller are preserved in the dialout sequence Programming a dial out sequence as part of the route is not necessary If rates change depending on the time of the day or week a different route can be used for the same destination code when a particular schedule is in use See Programming for least cost routing on page 122 Adding a long distance carrier access code In many cases long distance service uses the same lines as local service but is switched to a specific car
280. ilter name does not have any significance other than to identify an entry Source address Lets users specify the source IP address in a valid dot format If you don t want to match the source address field in your filter leave this setting and the source mask empty Source mask Lets users specify the source mask for the IP address in a valid dot format If you specify a source address you must specify the source mask If you don t specify the source address you must not specify the source mask The source address and source mask must match Bitwise the source address and the source mask must be equal to the source address Destination address Lets users specify the destination IP address in a valid dot format If you are specifying a filter this field specifies the destination address of the IP packet that matches the filter If you don t want to match the destination address leave this field empty If you are specifying a static route this field must not be empty It must be a valid network or host address The destination mask must match the address specified in this setting Destination mask Lets users specify the mask of the destination address in a valid dot format If you specify a destination address you must specify a destination mask If you don t specify the destination address you must not specify the source mask The destination address and destination mask must match i e bitwise AND of
281. ilure Evt 327 s5 short term alarm threshold has been surpassed in the EE DTM Evt 328 s5 short term alarm threshold has been surpassed in the EE DTM Evt 329 s5 short term alarm threshold has been surpassed in the EE DTM Evt 330 s5 short term alarm threshold has been surpassed in the EE DTM Evt 336 S5 long term alarm has been surpassed in the EE DTM Evt 373 S5 the system restart diagnostic tool has been activated Evt 407 S2 there are no more codes for Speed Dial numbers Evt 408 S2 there is no more memory for Speed Dial codes Evt 415 3546 S3 an invalid customer password has been entered by the DN 3546 in this case Evt 418 S7 a DN change is successful Evt 419 S2 the time setting has been changed Evt 421 S8 a DN change failed Evt 422 3546 S6 a length change by the DN 3546 in this case has been requested Evt 423 3546 S6 an individual DN change has been requested by the DN 3546 in this case Evt 441 S2 a timeout occurred while waiting for ANI or DNIS digits to be received Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 263 Event message Evt 442 Evt 454 Evt 458 Evt 459 Evt 680 Evt 681 Evt 683 Evt 687 Evt 688 Evt 689 Evt 690 Evt 691 Evt 692 Evt 693 Evt 694 Evt 695 Evt 696 Evt 697 Evt 698 Evt 799 Evt 822 Evt 882 Evt 883 Evt 992 S5 S5 S4 S9 S9 S9 S9 S4 S4 S4 S4 S4 S4 S3 S4 S4 S2 S2 S8 S7 S8 S9 S4 S6 The event message is reco
282. incurred by using the public network Note When a call gets rerouted over the PSTN due to congestion the user may see a prompt Expensive route The warning indicates that toll charges may be applied to this call P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 326 Appendix A N etwork Examples Users at both locations access the public network by dialing 9 followed by the public number For example a user in Toronto might dial 9 555 1212 for a local call or 9 1 613 555 1212 for a long distance call to Ottawa Local calls would be sent directly to the Central Office over PRI trunks Long distance calls to Ottawa would be sent over IP trunks the Ottawa system would tandem these calls to the local Central Office over PRI trunks Private network calls are made by dialing a 4 digit private network DN For example if a user in Toronto wants to call a user in Ottawa within the private network they dial 6221 Note Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway requires a software keycode Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Corporate Internal 2221 Fe Netwerk Internal 6221 Enterprise Edge Enterprise Edge Toronto Branch Ottawa Branch PRI I P Address 192 1 1 2 I P Address 192 1 1 3 PRI public protocol public protocol Public Public Network Remote Gateway Configuration Network Toronto 9 192 1 1 3 6 192 1 1 3 Ottawa 9 192 1 1 2 2 192 1 1 2 The Call Manage
283. ing Call Pickup Directed A feature that lets you answer a call ringing at any telephone by entering the internal number of that telephone before taking the call Call Pickup Directed is enabled under Feature settings in System programming Call Pickup Group See Pickup Group Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 357 Call Queuing If you have several calls waiting at your telephone you can invoke the Call Queuing feature to answer them in order of priority Priority is given to incoming calls followed by callback and camped calls Callback If you park camp or transfer a call to another telephone and it is not answered there it will ring again at your telephone How long the system will wait before Callback occurs is set under Feature settings in System programming Camp on A feature that lets you reroute a call to a telephone even if all the lines on that telephone are busy To answer a camped call use Call Queuing or select a line if the camped call appears on your telephone Priority is given to queued calls over camped calls Camp timeout The length of a delay before a camped call is returned to the telephone that camped the call The length of delay is set under Feature settings in System programming Central answering position CAP An M7324 telephone that has been designated as a CAP under CAP assignment in System programming The CAP provides backup answering and can
284. ing Call by Call CbC Service routing to map the call type to the DISA DN Refer to Call by Call service selection for PRI on page 151 for more information With FX INWATS 900 and SDS service types either a Service Id SID ora CDN is mapped to Target Line Receive Digits This is programmed under Call by Call Routing DISA may be accessed by having the SID or CDN map to the DISA DN This example has a Receive Digit Length 4 DISA DN 1234 and CbC Routing with Service Type FX Map from SID 2 Map to digits 1234 A call presented to the Enterprise Edge system with service type FX and SID 2 will be handled as follows e The ISDN setup message will specify FX with SID 2 e The FX SID 2 will be mapped to DISA DN digits 1234 The call will be answered with DISA Program ISDN equipment ISDN router By connecting an ISDN router to your Enterprise Edge system a group of PCs can share Internet access This arrangement is best for a workplace where each PC uses an Internet connection PCs with applications Internet service provider ISDN router Enterprise Edge To support Internet access you must order PRI lines from your service provider and subscribe to Internet service from an Internet service provider ISP Your PCs must have an Internet browser and any applications supplied by your ISP P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 348 Appendix B ISDN Overview Enterprise E
285. ing telephony programming with the default programming 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance The Configuration menu is enabled 2 Access the Configuration menu and click System startup The system displays a dialog box with two parameters template and start dn 3 Select one of two templates from the template drop down menu PBX or DID 4 Type any valid value in the start dn box The box displays the current value 5 Click OK to apply these changes The system displays a warning that the telephone system will restart and that default programming values will be restored P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 234 Maintenance Warm reset A warm reset restores the system but does not affect the current telephony programming 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance The Configuration menu option is enabled 2 Access the Configuration menu and click Warm reset The system displays a warning that all active calls will be dropped 3 Click OK to continue Backup and restore e Backup restore upgrade utility BRU for Enterprise Edge system on page 234 e Backup and restore telephony programming on page 237 Backup restore upgrade utility BRU for Enterprise Edge system The BRU utility manages local remote and Web enabled Enterprise Edge software BRU works with xml files to perform step by step backup restore or upgrade of the full Enterprise Edge system or selected components
286. ing this content dependably is difficult in public networks using ordinary best effort protocols Real time applications that include voice and video are time sensitive Delivering voice and video over the Internet requires control of packet delay and jitter Differentiated Services DiffServ is a QoS framework standardized by IETF that focuses on DiffServ standards for real time and mission critical applications The DiffServ standards are evolving and vendors are starting to develop network devices that support DiffServ The purpose of the Enterprise Edge QoS module is to prioritize IP traffic and to provide an acceptable quality of service to delay and jitter sensitive applications such as audio and video as well as mission critical applications The Enterprise Edge QoS module serves two primary purposes e Ina DiffServ network it acts as an edge device and performs the packet classification marking and prioritization e Inanon DiffServ or legacy network it manages the WAN link to make sure premium voice and optional video packets get high priority when crossing the slow WAN link in both directions Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 43 DiffServ Networks For DiffServ networks Enterprise Edge e Intercepts all H 323 traffic e Identifies call setup packets e Performs admission control based on the WAN link usage e Marks the packets as premium once admitted
287. ing to ensure basic operation e Execute ipconfig release and ipconfig renew on each of the workstations For Windows 95 and Windows 98 use its equivalent winipcfg e For clients that do not support ipconfig and winipcfg reboot is required to renew their IP addresses 2 Ifachange occurs in the DNS server or DNS name options users must repeat the tasks in step 1 to ensure proper connectivity with the organization 3 Always schedule a down time associated with these changes 4 Nortel Networks recommends that you reboot Enterprise Edge to initialize changes Using Enterprise Edge you can define a DHCP scope for each LAN interface DHCP server parameters are divided into two categories global and scope specific Global parameters apply to all scopes Specific parameters apply to a specific scope Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 39 Domain Name Service DNS The domain name service DNS is the system within the Internet that maps names of objects usually host names into IP numbers or other resource record values The name space of the Internet is divided into domains The responsibility for managing names in each domain is usually delegated to systems in each domain Enterprise Edge functions as both a gateway to the Internet and as a DNS proxy e Gateway a system that links two different types of networks and enables them to communicate with each other Enter
288. inked together electronically to share programs and exchange data Joining computers over a network requires adding specialized hardware and software to each computer network device A network device is a hardware entity characterized by its use as a communications component within a networking infrastructure Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 373 Network DN A number supplied by the ISDN network service provider for ISDN terminal equipment Network Interface Card NIC An adapter card containing the hardware necessary to connect an Enterprise Edge Server to a local area network NIC A network interface card NIC is a computer circuit board or card that is installed in a computer so that it can be connected to a network Personal computers and workstations on local area networks LANs typically contain a network interface card specifically designed for the LAN transmission technology such as Ethernet or Token Ring Network interface cards provide a dedicated full time connection to a network Night schedule See Schedules and Services 0 On hold A setting programmed under Feature settings in System programming that controls whether external callers hear music periodic tones or silence when they are placed on hold Operating system The disk based software that manages the operation of the Enterprise Edge Server An operating system controls the flow of information
289. ion of an Open Switch Interval OSI For more information see page 178 Values 60 100 260 460 or 600 milliseconds Default 460 Answer timer Allows you to set the minimum duration of an answer signal before a call is considered to be answered Values 1 2 3 4 or 5 seconds Default 2 Protocol 3 Allows you to define a trunk protocol For more information see page 178 Values NI 2 DMS100 DMS250 AT amp T4ESS SL 1 Protocol type i Allows you to define a protocol type This settings applies to the SL 1 private networking protocol only For more information see page 178 Values User Slave Network Master Default User Slave NSF Extension 3 Allows you to define the Network Specific Facilities NSF information element If the prompt Clear Routes is displayed click Yes to confirm your selection For more information see page 179 Values None WATS ALL B channel selection sequence 2 Allows you to define how B channels are selected For more information see page 179 Values Ascending Sequential Descending Sequential Clock Source Allows you to designate which EE DTM acts as a primary or secondary clock source For more information see page 179 Values Primary Secondary Notes 1 Applies to Loop and T1 card types only 2 Applies to T1 card types only 3 Applies to PRI card types only 4 Applies to PRI and T1 card types only Note There must be an
290. ires you to program various areas of the Enterprise Edge system such as e under Line access assign the line pool e under Services in routing services section assign which pool to use for routing and which service type and service id if required e under General settings specify the minimum and maximum values for the pools e under Hardware choose DTI PRI and select the protocol P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 154 Configuring Telephony Resources Programming Call by Call service selection Programming the Enterprise Edge system for Call by Call Service Selection with a PRI interface requires e provisioning a DTI as PRI if a DTI configured as PRI is not already a part of the system see the Maintenance section e selecting a protocol on page 178 e programming incoming call routing on page 180 e programming routes that use the PRI pools under Services see Routing service on page 114 PRI Call by Call Limits PRI pool limits for Call by Call services allows you to configure limits for service types without interacting with the CO This feature sets the minimum and maximum number of incoming and outgoing calls per service type for the PRI pool The number of active calls will be tracked and whenever a call is being setup a check will be made to determine if it will be allowed Calls will not be allowed if they exceed the maximum value for that service type or if they will use lines needed t
291. isable CLID with Call Type 5 From the Support Call Charge list box enable or disable Call Charge Support 6 From the Answer Supervision list box enable or disable answer supervision 7 Inthe Call Filter Duration box enter the call filter duration from 1 30 8 Press the Tab key to save the settings PreFix Bins The prefix bins let users enter the long distance call prefixes in conjunction with the report filter option To set the Call Detail Recording PreFix Bins settings 1 On the navigation tree select Services Call Detail Recording PreFix Bins Clicking the PreFix Bins navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click PreFix Bins The PreFix Bin Settings screen appears where you can define up to eight prefixes 2 Inthe PreFix Bin Settings boxes type the appropriate prefixes 3 Press the Tab key to save the settings Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 223 Access Bin Settings To configure Call Detail Recording access bin settings l On the navigation tree select Services Call Detail Recording Access Bin Settings Clicking the Access Bin Settings navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Access Bin Settings The Access Bin Settings and Suppress Length Settings screens appear The Access Bin Settings attributes are Attribute Description Access Setting Lets users enter the secondary call provide
292. ise Edge and select lines to the public network Gord is working from home and needs to make a long distance business call from home To avoid being charged he dials the telephone number 555 4321 that maps onto the Auto DN at work After hearing the dial tone Gord dials a line pool access code 1234 to select a line to the public network He then dials the long distance number Central Office DID line pool Sra zM Enterprise Edge business client D Central Office Hardware Enterprise Edge EE DTM with several T1 DID lines Heading Parameter Setting Incoming trunk Trunk Line Data Line 061 T1 DID Access codes Auto DN 4321 Rec d length Rec d length 4 digits can be from 2 to 7 digits but must match number of digits sent by central office Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 333 Heading Parameter Setting Lines Restrictions and Define restriction filters Define Remote access remote access packages Assign a remote restriction and remote package to the line Outgoing trunk Trunk Line Data Line 001 Loop Line type Pool A Access codes Line pool A 1234 Lines Restrictions Assign a restriction filter to the line Private network Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones The production supervisor in Houston selects the less expensive company tie line to
293. ise Edge set is eight Every Answer DN assigned to the telephone automatically assigns an Answer button with an indicator to the telephone These buttons should be labeled accordingly identifying the telephone with its name or DN The maximum number of Answer DNs that can be assigned to a particular Enterprise Edge set is eight More than one telephone can have an Answer button for the same DN In this way more than one telephone can provide call alerting and call answering for any calls directed to that DN To create an answer DN 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 86 Configuring Telephony Resources 3 Choose Line access Answer DNs 4 Click the Add button 5 Type the Answer DN 6 Click the Save button 7 Click one of the following to define the Answer type Unassigned Ring only Appear amp Ring or Appear only Capabilities Settings that control how the system interacts with individual telephones and the calls they receive are found in Capabilities To define telephone capabilities l 2 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets Click the telephone set DN 221 528 Choose Capabilities Configure Capabilities according to the table Attribute Description DND on busy Defines whether an incoming call rings if the user is already on another call Values Y or N
294. ise Edge system Power down the system by unplugging it Refer to Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide for information on replacing components Refer to the following sections for more information e Digital Trunk Computer Module trouble on page 294 e Monitoring the T1 or PRI signal on page 295 Digital Trunk Computer Module trouble 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance to verify that the EE DTM is enabled and that it s lines are provisioned For more information refer to the procedure Display the module status on page 254 2 Check the LEDs on the front of the EE DTM Front view Power LED Status LED In Service LED Loopback Test LED Continuity loopback Receive LEDs Transmit LEDs Loopback Telecom connector e Receive Alarm yellow LED on indicates a problem with the digital transmission being received This half duplex link is unusable e Receive Error yellow LED indicates a minor error as a result of degraded digital transmission Possible causes are an ohmic connection water ingress or too long a loop e Transmit Alarm red LED on indicates an inability to transmit Alarm indication signal AIS is being transmitted to the terminating switch This half duplex link in unusable e Transmit Error yellow LED on indicates a remote alarm indication RAI carrier failure alarm CFA is being sent to the terminating switch If the Transmit Alarm is not on this indicates a far end or
295. itch is sending the correct number of digits for the Received number length defined in your system 3 Ifthe switch at the far end is sending pulse signals make sure they are being sent at the proper rate Pulse digits must be 300 ms or more apart for the Enterprise Edge system to receive them Dialed feature code gets overflow tone Possible problem The remote caller does not have access to that feature Solution Check the remote package that you assigned to the incoming trunk Make sure that it gives the appropriate access to the remote caller Possible problem The feature code is not valid Solution 1 Make sure that remote callers have a correct listing of the features that are programmed for remote access 2 Ensure that remote callers are programming the feature code correctly Press followed by the feature code to activate a remote feature Possible problem The caller may be dialing on a rotary dial telephone or on a push button telephone that uses pulse signaling Solution Inform remote callers that they must dial from a push button telephone that uses DTMF tone signaling P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 300 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system Dialed feature code gets busy tone Possible problem A resource that the remote feature uses may currently be in use For example a remote caller trying to use the paging feature would get a busy tone if the a
296. ith the column you are moving Use the following procedure to change the column width 1 Keeping the pointer in the heading row move it over any column edge until it changes to a double headed arrow 2 Pull the column edge to the appropriate location Menu descriptions You access Enterprise Edge functions using the menu The menu is dynamic which means that the menu commands change depending on the action a user takes P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 30 Enterprise Edge Overview Enterprise Edge menu ENTERPRISE menu root tale E tee zanm Menu descriptions Use To Group View the system resources services and management Edit Edit parameters Configuration Access configuration dialog boxes and screens Performance Access performance graphs and tables Fault Access fault management settings Report Generate a report Tools Use Enterprise Edge tools Logoff Log off the Enterprise Edge server View Change the appearance from Windows Motif or Sun Swing Help Access online help Enterprise Edge system access Note User access must be controlled by providing one userid the administrator with read write privileges All other users must be given read only privileges This prevents concurrent configuration of the Enterprise Edge system The Unified Manager s navigation tree contains four main headings that allow you to a
297. ity entry you can t change the name The community entry name does not have any significance other than to identify an entry Community Name Lets users specify the name of the community that the individual managers use to interact with this agent When creating community entries various access permissions are associated with these names Manager stations that use different community names get different permissions on the SNMP agent While creating trap communities various manager IP addresses are associated with these values All the manager stations in a trap community get traps with the community name specified in the entry Manager List Lets users specify the entry name used to identify an individual manager entry on the SNMP agent Its value must follow certain conventions It must have the prefix M followed by a unique number that identifies the manager entry on the agent For example M2 is a valid value While adding specify non recutring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing manager entry name it modifies the existing manager entry Using non sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers While modifying a manager entry you can t change the name The manager entry name does not have any significance other than to uniquely identify an entry Manager IP address Lets users specify the IP Address of the SNMP Manager station corresponding to this entry I
298. ivated while a set is moved that set s internal number and programming data remain with the physical port on Enterprise Edge and the set does not receive the original programming when it is reconnected elsewhere Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 141 Message reply enhancement The Message reply enhancement feature allows for the message waiting indicator on analog telephones connected to an Enterprise Edge Analog Station Media Bay Module EE ASM to be deactivated automatically if the reply call from the analog telephone to the designated direct dial telephone is answered no matter where the call is answered from by the user This feature also functions if the user invokes the Call Pickup feature to answer the reply call from the analog set It does not however work with the Retrieve Parked Call feature Tips Direct dial sets are the only sets that can send messages using Feature 1 to analog telephones connected to an Enterprise Edge Analog Station Media Bay Module EE ASM The direct dial set must be the designated direct dial set for the analog telephone receiving a message Answer key There are up to eight answer keys that can be assigned per set The Answer key setting in Feature settings programming lets you determine what types of calls will alert at the telephone Answer key changes do not apply to portables Your choices are Basic Enhanced an
299. l From the Routing Protocol list box select NONE or RIP If you choose RIP press the Tab key to update the screen A configurable RIP Parameters screen appears From the Input Filter Action list box select the input filter action From the Output Filter Action list box select the output filter action Press the Tab key to save the settings This operation fails if filters have not been added to the interface To modify the configuration of the RIP Parameters 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 Scroll to locate the RIP Parameters screen In the Metric box type the cost integer value From the Routing Table Update Mode list box select the mode From the Route Announcement Type list box select the routing announcement From the Route Accept Type list box select the route accept type In the Route Expiration Interval box type the expiration interval value in seconds In the Route Removal Interval box type the removal interval value in seconds In the Route Announcement Interval box type the announcement interval value in seconds In the Route Tag box type the route tag From the Poisoned Reverse list box select the appropriate mode From the Triggered Updates list box enable or disable triggered updates From the Announce Default Route list box enable or disable announcing default routes From the Accept Default Route list box enable or disable accepting default routes Press the Tab key to save the settings
300. l ring at the incoming trunk s Prime set All Allows you to define the received digits used for all calls with this service type regardless of the called party number or service identifier SID For this option all calls with this service type on this PRI will ring the same target line Map table Allows you to associate different received digits with different calls of this service type depending on the call party number and or the service identifier Incoming calls that do not match any entry defined in the map table will ring at the prime set Depending on the service type and the protocol you may be able to map the called party number By number and the service identifier SID The following table shows the different options Service Protocol FX 800 1 800 SDS 900 NI 2 SID By number n a n a n a DMS 100 SID SID or By number n a n a n a DMS 250 SID SID or By number n a n a SID or By number 4ESS n a By number By number By number By number Note This setting is available for T1 trunks configured as T1 E amp M See Trunk Line data on page 96 for more information about configuring Trunk types Tl Parameters The T1 Parameters heading appears for card types that have been configured as T1 or PRI It allows you define a number of settings that are dependent on your T1 service provider settings To program T1 Parameters 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hardware Module Trunk Modu
301. lan is explained in Coordinated dialing plan on page 310 Plan your routing service before doing any programming Routing affects every call placed in the system and must be carefully planned to avoid conflicts and gaps in the programming Use tables to design routes and destination codes then check for potential problems before you start programming It will also save you time to have all the settings written out in front of you Routes and destination codes Programming for a route makes use of e a 3 digit route number 000 999 e External digits up to 24 e a line pool e destination codes max of 500 available up to 7 digits e Public DN lengths e a schedule programmed in Services Tips To dial a telephone number which does not match any of the programmed destination codes the user will have to choose a line and dial the number For long distance dialing area codes in the North American numbering plan can be programmed as destination codes Route Select Routing Service Routes Click Add Enter a 3 digit route number 000 999 and click Save External External number or dial out number is the number you want the route to use Enter the digits up to 24 You can press F78 to insert a 1 5 second pause in the dialing string or F804 to wait for dial tone if necessary Route 000 has no External by default and cannot be changed Use Pool Select a line pool to be used with the route Pool A
302. lan recognizes this as a public DN and routes the call using Public service Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 321 Incoming DID calls will be routed to sets based on the trailing portion of the digits received by the network For example if a public network user dials an employee in the Toronto office the network will deliver digits 4167632221 Enterprise Edge will route the call using the last four digits 2221 In the table that follows private network routing information is highlighted in gray Public network information is shown in white Heading Parameter Setting Toronto office Hardware EE DTM PRI Protocol NI 2 Trunk Line Data Line 245 Target line Received 2221 Line Access Set 2221 L245 Ring only Line pool access Line pool PRI A To New York Routing Service Route 001 External No number Use Pool PRI A Service type Tie ServiceID 1 DN type Private Destination Code 6 Normal route 001 Absorb 0 To Public Network Routing Service Route 002 External No number Use Pool PRI A Service type Public Destination Code 9 Normal route 002 Absorb ALL New York office Hardware EE DTM PRI Protocol NI 2 Trunk Line Data Line 245 Target line Received 6221 Line Access Set 6221 L245 Ring only Line pool access Line pool PRI A P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 322 Appendix A N etwork Examples Heading Paramete
303. lation PPP can process synchronous as well as asynchronous communication PPP can share a line with other users and it has error detection Pool See Line pool Port A connector on the Enterprise Edge Server that allows data exchange with other devices such as a printer or mouse portable telephone See Companion portable telephone PPP See Point to Point protocol Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 377 Pre dial A feature that allows you to enter a number and check it on your telephone display before it is actually dialed If the number is incorrect you can edit it The number is dialed only when you pick up the receiver or select a line Primary Rate Interface PRI An ISDN interface which uses twenty three B channels and a D channel 23B D Prime line The line on your telephone that is automatically selected when you lift the receiver press the Handsfree Mute button or use an external dialing feature A Prime Line is assigned to a telephone under Line access in Terminals and Sets programming Prime Set prime telephone A telephone that provides backup answering for incoming calls on external lines The prime telephone for a line will ring for any unanswered calls on that line A prime telephone is assigned to a line under Trunk Line data in Lines programming Priority Call If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your office you can interrupt them
304. lay information on any item in the System administration log using the following procedure 1 2 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance System admin log If the Unified Manager indicates that there are hidden subheadings double click on the heading to display all the items in the log If there are no log entries the Unified Manager will indicate that there are no hidden subheadings Select any item Information about the log item is displayed The description attribute indicates if the item is an event or alarm and includes the associated code The time the event or alarm occurred is displayed For more information on the event or alarm refer to Alarm codes on page 261 or Event messages on page 261 Note Alarms are also displayed in the Windows NT event log Write down the item on the System administration log record and repeat these steps until you have recorded all the items Erase the log You can erase the displayed log items from the System Administration log using the following procedure Note You cannot remove selected log items You only have the option of removing all the log items l 2 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance System admin log If the Unified Manager indicates that there are hidden subheadings double click on the heading to display all the items in the log If there are no log entries the Unified Manager will indicate that there are no hidden subheadings Select the Del All
305. ld memorize their COS passwords instead of writing them down Employees COS passwords should be deleted when they leave the company Typically each user has a separate password Alternately several users can share a password or one user can have several passwords A system can have a maximum of 100 six digit COS passwords 00 to 99 You can copy the restriction filters and remote package from one COS password to another COS passwords must be unique Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 131 To assign a COS password 1 Choose Resources Telephony Passwords COS passwords 2 Click a COS group COS 00 99 3 Type a 6 digit password in the Password box and press Enter 4 Click a User filter value None or Filter If Filter is selected type the 2 digit user filter and press Enter 5 Click a Line filter value None or Filter If Filter is selected type the 2 digit line filter and press Enter 6 Click a Remote package value None or Package If Package is selected type the 2 digit remote package and press Enter User filter User filter lets you assign a restriction filter to a Class of Service password The user filter associated with the Class of Service password replaces any normally applicable set restriction line set restriction and remote restriction The default setting None means that any normally applicable filters set restriction line se
306. ld work In order to make digits available for use with destination codes you must change the DN length of B1 and B2 DNs depending on your system size This can be done either at system startup or in General settings P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 118 Configuring Telephony Resources Wild card character When programming destination codes you can use wild cards in the destination code string As a result of wild card characters the number of destination codes programmed in the system is reduced thus maximizing the use of destination codes in the system 1 At Destination codes enter the destination code you want to modify or enter a new destination code 2 When you enter a destination code enter the letter A as a wild card character in the destination code The wild card character can be used only for the last digit of a destination code and represents any digit from 0 to 9 except for digits already programmed or used by other numbering plans Should there be a conflict with other digits already programmed or used by other destination codes the digit will not be displayed The wild card character can only be used to group destination codes that use the same Route and Digit Absorbed Length Route External Line Pool 555 763 4018 Line Pool C 565 763 3492 Line Pool A Destination codes Route Digit Absorb Dial Out 9201 555 3 763 4018 9202
307. le NetLink Manager dials the backup link and changes the default route 4 Inthe Up Poll Interval box type the up poll interval in seconds The up poll interval is the interval between successive pings when the next hop in primary link is available Use a relatively larger value to save bandwidth 5 Inthe Down Poll Interval box type the down poll interval in seconds The down poll interval is used to ping the next hop on primary link when it is recognized as unreachable Use a smaller interval for faster recovery 6 Inthe Switch Over Delay box type the switch over delay in seconds 7 Press the Tab key to save the settings Call Detail Recording To view Call Detail Recording settings 1 On the navigation tree click Services Call Detail Recording Clicking the Call Detail Recording navigation key expands the navigation tree but doesn t display the read only summary You must click Call Detail Recording The read only Call Detail Recording Summary screen appears Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 219 The Call Detail Recording Summary screen attributes are Attribute Description Name Shows the component name which is CDR Status Shows the status of the component Version Shows the version of the component Description Shows a description of the component Report parameters To configure the Call Detail Recording r
308. le and T1 Parameters P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 182 Configuring Telephony Resources 2 Configure the T1 parameters according to the table Attribute Description CO fail Allows you to select the carrier failure standard used by your T1 or PRI service provider Consult your T1 or PRI service provider for the proper setting Values TIA 547A or TR62411 Default TIA 547A Interface levels Allows you to define a loss plan setting For more information see page 182 Values ISDN or PSTN Default ISDN Framing Allows you to select the framing format used by your T1 or PRI service provider Extended Superframe ESF or Superframe SF Contact your T1 or PRI service provider for the proper setting SF or Superframe is sometimes known as D4 Values ESF or SF Default ESF Internal CSU Allows you to turn the internal T1 channel service unit on or off For more information see page 183 Values On or Off Default On CSU line build Allows you to set the gain level of the transmitted signal This setting only appears when the Internal CSU is set to On Values 0 7 5 or 15 dB Default 0 DSX1 build Allows you to set the distance between Enterprise Edge and an external channel service unit This setting only appears when the Internal CSU is set to Off Contact your service provider for the proper settings Values 000 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600
309. le outgoing public network calls dialed from an Enterprise Edge set are passed to the Meridian M1 and the Meridian M1 is responsible for seizing a public trunk For this reason the 9 prefix is left in the number passed to the Meridian 1 Note Ensure that Line Pool A is used for IP trunks In order for the digit counting algorithm for outgoing IP calls to take into account this extra digit the Private Network Access Code must be set to 9 on each Enterprise Edge system The Meridian M1 must recognize incoming 2xxx and 6xxx DID calls and route the call over IP trunks to either the East or West end offices The Meridian M1 must recognize numbers starting with 9 as public numbers whether the numbers are dialed by Meridian M1 users or by Enterprise Edge users Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway This example shows a private network composed of one Enterprise Edge system in Toronto and one Enterprise Edge system in Ottawa connected over IP trunks through a corporate IP network In this network each Enterprise Edge system has a PRI trunk to the Central Office and IP trunks to the other Enterprise Edge system Calls from the Toronto system to the Ottawa system and the Ottawa public network are made over IP trunks with fallback to the PRI trunks when IP trunks are congested This configuration allows for cost savings by using the corporate IP network whenever possible thereby bypassing toll charges that would be
310. le each module under Maintenance 4 Configure the EE DTM for PRI in Hardware and provision the module 5 Re enable the module in Maintenance If required the module goes through a firmware download process which takes five to six minutes Program PRI lines When the configuration programming under Hardware is complete your PRI lines are ready to be programmed For information on programming your PRI lines see Call by Call service selection for PRI on page 151 Program Direct Inward System Access DISA on PRI lines When an EE DTM is configured for PRI all lines on that module are set to Auto Answer without Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA can however be accessed by one of two methods 1 Define the DISA DN to match the trailing digits of the Called Party Number CDN With Public Private and Tie service types the CDN is simply truncated to the Target Line Receive Digit Length and is parsed to match the Target Line Receive Digits DISA can be accessed by having the DISA DN match the trailing digits of the CDN For example with a Receive Digit Length 4 and DISA DN 1234 a call made to Public DN 763 1234 will be handled as follows e the ISDN setup message will contain a CDN of 763 1234 e the CDN will be truncated to the 4 digits 1234 e 1234 matches the DISA DN e the call will be answered with DISA Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix B ISDN Overview 347 2 Use incom
311. lect Management User Manager from the navigation tree The User Profile screen appears The attributes on the User Profile screen are Attribute Description User Name Lets users specify the user name while adding a new user While modifying an existing user profile this field is read only This attribute is case sensitive and cannot exceed 50 characters in length Password Lets users specify the password for the user This attribute is case sensitive and cannot exceed 15 characters in length Confirmed Lets users confirm the modified password This attribute must match the Password Password attribute Privilege Lets users specify what privileges the user has in administering the Enterprise Edge server The options are READ ONLY Lets users view attributes but not alter them READ WRITE Lets users view and change attributes P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 230 Configuring Management Settings To add user profiles l 2 Click any line in the User Profile table On the menu click Configuration and then click Add User The User Profile dialog box appears In the User Name box type the user name In the Password box type the password In the Confirmed Password box type the password again From the Privilege list box select the appropriate user privilege Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager Note Maintain only one user profile with administrative p
312. led into the original file A packet switching scheme is an efficient way to handle transmissions on a connectionless network such as the Internet An alternative scheme circuit switching is used for networks allocated for voice connections In circuit switching lines in the network are shared among many users as with packet switching but each connection requires the dedication of a particular path for the duration of the connection Packet and datagram are similar in meaning A protocol similar to TCP the User Datagram Protocol UDP uses the term datagram Page A feature you can use to make announcements over the Enterprise Edge system You can make page announcements over the telephone speakers and or external speakers Page Time out A setting that controls how long a Page Announcement can last It can be assigned under Feature settings in System programming Page zone An area in the office that receives internal page announcements independently of the rest of the office Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 375 Each page zone is identified by a number Telephones are assigned to page zones under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming PAP The Password Authentication Protocol PAP is a procedure used by PPP servers to validate a connection request PAP works as follows 1 After the link is established the requestor sends a password and an id to the server
313. lephones are plugged into their place This allows the moved telephones to retain their programmed settings If a new telephone is plugged into the system before the old telephone is reconnected at a new location the system will give the old telephone s information to the new telephone and the old telephone will no longer be recognized by the system When changing a telephone s internal number in programming wait one minute after Automatic Telephone Relocation When you relocate a telephone the telephone must remain installed and connected in the new location for at least 3 minutes for the programming relocation to be complete Moving the telephone again before the 3 minute period may result in losing the telephone s programming Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge 10 system These troubleshooting procedures allow you to solve many problems in the Enterprise Edge system Follow these procedures before replacing any components Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this unit is to be performed only by service A personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this
314. lephony voice messaging and integrated QoS routing functionality plus the following additional features e Enterprise Edge Companion Wireless on page 23 e Enterprise Edge Unified Manager on page 23 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Overview 23 Enterprise Edge Companion Wireless The Enterprise Edge Companion Wireless software provides wireless functionality without losing the benefits of the wireline system The system can be programmed so that users can publish one telephone number and receive all calls on both their desk set and their portable allowing them to answer whichever is most convenient Enterprise Edge Unified Manager The Enterprise Edge Unified Manager software provides programming administration and maintenance Enterprise Edge Unified Manager provides a series of windows and menus which allow you to navigate through the different areas of the application and program the system For more information on the Unified Manager refer to Unified Manager on page 26 Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging is a Windows based application that allows the user to set up and administer the following Voice Messaging features e Voice messaging on page 23 e Auto attendant on page 23 e Custom Call Routing CCR on page 23 e Audio Messaging Interchange Specification AMIS Networking on page 24 e Enterprise Edge Networking on page 24 Voic
315. lick Delete Trap Community A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion 3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager QoS To configure QoS services settings 1 On the navigation tree click QoS Clicking the QoS navigation key expands the navigation tree but doesn t display the summary of configurable QoS services You must click QoS The QoS Summary screen appears The QoS Services Summary attributes are Attribute Description Description Shows the description of the QoS provider Version Shows the driver version of the QoS provider Status Lets users enable or disable the QoS module Premium Bandwidth Lets users specify in percentages the WAN bandwidth reserved for premium traffics Choose a value for this field based on the link speed the codecs used by VoIP gateway the sample rate and the number of concurrent phone calls from internal VoIP gateway and other H 323 sessions like Microsoft NetMeeting traffic you intend to carry over the WAN link Refer to the figure WAN_ Overview on page 49 for more information on this topic Make sure you allocate at least the bandwidth necessary to carry as many phone calls as specified in Number of Phone Ports field below Otherwise the QoS provider sees the inconsistent configuration and disables itself when system boots next time resulting in broken connectivity Any additional bandwidth that is more
316. light savings time For more information see page 139 Values Y or N Default Y Auto time amp date Defines whether or not the system to automatically updates the time and date after a power failure For more information see page 140 Values Y or N Default Y Host delay Assigns the delay between the moment an outgoing line is selected to make an external call for example by lifting the receiver off the telephone and the moment that Enterprise Edge sends dialed digits or codes on the line This ensures that a dial tone is present before the dialing sequence is sent Minimizing this delay provides faster access to the requested features Values 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 or 2000 milliseconds Default 1000 Link time Allows you to specify the duration of a signal required to access a feature through a remote system For more information see page 140 Values 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 or 1000 milliseconds Default 600 Alarm set Alarm set allows you to assign a telephone on which alarm messages appear when a problem has been detected in the system Alarms are recorded in the Windows NT event log Values None DN Default 221 Set relocation Allows you to move any telephone to a new location within the Enterprise Edge system without losing the directory number autodial settings personal speed dial codes and any programming for that telephone For mo
317. lls For external calls you can display the caller s name telephone number and the line name For an internal call you can display the name of the caller and their internal number You can obtain information about ringing answered or held calls Call Log Enter your Call Log to view a record of incoming calls The log could contain the following information for each call sequence number in the Call Log name and number of caller long distance indication indication if the call was answered time and date of the call number of repeated calls from the same source and name of the line that the call came in on See Autobumping Autolog options and Call Log for further information Call Park With this feature you can place a call on hold so that someone can retrieve it from any other telephone in the system by selecting an internal line and entering a retrieval code The retrieval code appears on the display of your telephone when you park the call You can park up to twenty five calls on the system at one time Call Park Callback See Callback Call Park prefix The first digit of the retrieval code of a parked call This digit cannot conflict with the first digit of any existing DNs Line Pool access codes the Direct dial digit or the external line access code The default Call Park prefix digit is 1 It may be set to none in which case Call Park is disabled Call Park prefix is assigned under Access codes in System programm
318. ls Call park external lines Direct Dial telephone and Auto DN address A unique identifier assigned to networks and stations that allows each device to receive and reply to messages Address Resolution Protocol ARP The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an IP address to a physical machine address that is recognized in the local network For example in IP Version 4 an address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet local area network however addresses for attached devices are 48 bits long The physical machine address is also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address A table usually called the ARP cache is used to maintain a correlation between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address ARP provides the protocol rules for making this correlation and providing address conversion in both directions alarm code A number that is displayed informing you that a fault has been detected in the system Analog Terminal Adapter A device that permits the connection of analog telecommunication devices such as fax machines answering machines and single line telephones to the Enterprise Edge system ANSI American National Standards Institute P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 352 Glossary Answer button A telephone button with an indicator that is used to monitor another telephone The answer button indicates incoming calls destined for the other telephone Som
319. ls use the port number IP address combinations and avoid specifying the protocol field Nortel Networks recommends that you specify a protocol field only if you manage an unusual condition in your network This reduces the consumption of CPU cycles e Users can configure the precedence of the filters Packets are matched against each filter sequentially until a match is found Pay attention when specifying the precedence of filters Placing popular filters ahead of unpopular filters can significantly speed up the processing Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 47 Port Range Setting for Legacy Networks Enterprise Edge uses UDP port ranges to provide high priority to VoIP packets in existing legacy IP networks These same port ranges must be reserved and set to high priority on all routers that an administrator expects to have QoS support Reserving port ranges is not required for DiffServ networks You can select any port ranges that are not used by well known protocols or applications Each H 323 or VoIP RTP flow uses two ports The total number of UDP port numbers to be reserved depends on how many concurrent RTP flows are expected to cross a router interface In general e Backbone routers reserve more ports than edge routers e Edge routers port ranges are a subset of the backbone router port ranges e Add UDP 5000 to high priority e Enterprise Edge s por
320. mE m mnnm Eovia IED Page Gepoewt 11e Emi SEES Page Layo oe Far Begin Configurer on Sie napinania a a p n Pyle Aen Bhin Lae Lago Hainin 1 iHerier jiena rii Dode nh i Lafcontig aubrpr ciy 30 W ONIP 1 20f Melre LLLI Provwlder en ere DLL Cee here cape ae Seve dec Wd ified see San Facbod Maci y Markei Propere Method apply Bethed Pot dds L eli rind isc e TOR IF Cd Pod eer Ar CIP Qoniins Voroder Vite od 0H REC Bagi Rented Bourne aH ponsnca a TATED IF HE HEFP Qo Dasr Egr OCP gedan Wotoder Tice Bol SAG Ft Bakoa Race houces SAF Bagcurcee LEJ PAR ES fee ro Enc Tal I Jerrica F DHI Gd Bourer IHEF FOIF GICH kp cha TeaLirkigr OA TSF oicedecrica Alera ioport re ESTER IF OS OEC SINE FOTIR Do bans Aap LALI SRR are eee Tor caly firar a gharapter DASS JHRELCITE CigihiLam nt kll SPST iT IP IF LEH IHS boomer pee Dyna dE lame nod SHAE CF PiIN Te Deaclgr VOLF TOtu Bod Eec kaa HacTal Lierige vocoder COF TAF hiari Dhopl lemaac EP DEF AELT seweBagin dctcibete Jetting See eres es ee DEP RULTLASEG Label cst cy 20 cone GEFETETSELeab Led cede oe a Pex Led Ge DEFETETS 31sen Ie 08 4 0 Peal eaj FLSA lea Parasa Gon inet ORF rRACH anne To ToS DIN one ODER Eoee C T A ED rira remeEed teribtra Decne eee ee mnnn Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 243 Graphs and tables Enterpris
321. me does not have any significance other than identifying an entry In the Start Address box type the start address In the End Address box type the end address Scroll to see any fields that are not displayed Make sure the start address and end address are in the same subnet Click the Save button to save the address range and return to Unified Manager To delete an address range 1 2 Click an address in the Address Range table On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete Address Ranges A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager Note Deleting or modifying an IP Address range removes any excluded addresses that are completely contained in the original address range value To modify excluded address ranges l 2 Click an excluded address in the Excluded Address Range table On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Excluded Address Ranges The Excluded Address Range dialog box appears In any box that requires modification type the necessary changes Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 191 4 Click the Save button to save the modifications and return to Unified Manager To add excluded address ranges 1 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Excluded Address Range The Excluded Address Range dialog box appears 2
322. menu The LAN1 Routing Services Summary and RIP Parameters attributes are Attribute Description Routing Protocol Lets users select the Routing protocol to run over the interface Select RIP to run RIP protocol or select NONE to disable running any routing protocol If RIP is selected interface specific RIP parameters appear in the bottom of the screen You can configure other RIP parameters on this interface Input Filter Action Determines what action is performed for the packets that match the filter criteria You can either forward them to upper layer possibly for further routing or drop them You can select the action only if you have set any of the input or output filters Otherwise they show up as N A and you can t modify them Output Filter Action Determines what action is performed for the packets that match the filter criteria You can either forward them to the next hop or drop them You can select the action only if you have set any of the input or output filters Otherwise they show up as N A and you can t modify them Metric Specifies the associated metric value for the routes through this interface Metric values of all routes learned through this interface are incremented by this value The final value used in making routing decisions is forwarded to other routes through RIP updates Routing Table Update Mode Lets users specify the routing table update mode for the interface In On
323. ming O perations Guide 290 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system Selected lines reads Not in service or Not available Possible problem The line is connected to an EE DTM which is currently not in service Solution 1 Check if the green LED on the EE DTM is flashing to indicate that service is suspended 2 Check if any yellow LEDs are on to indicate an alarm or error condition 3 Check if the red test LED is on to indicate that a continuity loopback test is running 4 Check that the cable connecting the EE DTM to the termination point from the central office or network is properly connected 5 Check that the EE DTM is properly inserted in the module bay 6 Inthe Unified Manager verify the status of the EE DTM For more information refer to the procedure Display the module status on page 254 Possible problem The line has been disabled for maintenance purposes Solution Enable the line OR If the line will be out of service for some time configure another line to replace it on the telephone Possible problem The line has not been provisioned Solution Provision the line Selected line pool shows No free lines Possible problem If this happens often there are not enough lines in the line pool to serve the number of line pool users Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 291 Solution If th
324. mium traffic 45 priority filters 45 transfer callback 137 troubleshooting 281 auxiliary ringer 292 background music 293 Enterprise Edge Link 291 external paging 292 line pools 300 lines 285 modules 293 295 P0908508 Issue 02 Index 401 network or remote users 296 301 302 optional equipment 291 293 portable telephone 302 T1 signal 295 trunk module 295 trunk modules 293 types of problems 282 trunk answer programming 113 DTI 304 ground start 305 mode 103 module troubleshooting 293 295 numbering 304 PRI 305 types 304 trunk line data 96 U UDP counters 250 unsupervised trunk mode 103 Usage metrics Call by Call 279 Hunt groups 279 user manager settings overview 229 utilities overview 241 performance 243 V voice mail settings overview 227 voice message accessing 93 external center 172 waiting indication 93 voice record access suppress settings 223 market parameters settings 221 prefix settings 222 report options settings 220 service settings 218 voice service settings 224 VOIP 100 VoIP gateway settings local gateway 212 overview 212 remote gateway 212 VoIP QoS Monitor relationship with the QoS module overview 48 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 402 Index WwW WAN bandwidth for admission control 44 WAN connections backup 51 overview 49 permanent 50 frame relay 50 PPP 50 WAN resource settings backup links access parameters 76 link parameters 74 overview 73 summary param
325. munity List 203 QoS 206 QoS performance graphs and tables 209 QoS filters 209 QoS Port Ranges 211 VoIP Gateway 212 VoIP local and remote gateways 212 QoS monitor 215 QoS Monitor Mean Opinion Score 216 Web cache 216 Net Link Manager 217 Call Detail Recording 218 Report parameters 219 Report options 220 Market parameters 221 PreFix Bins 222 Access Bin Settings 223 TAPI Service Provider 223 Console Service 224 Server Configuration 225 General Information 225 Diagnostic Logging 226 Alarm Service 226 Voice Mail 227 Configuring Management Settings 229 User Manager 229 Alarm Manager 231 Maintenance 233 System startup 233 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide viii Contents Chapter 10 Warm reset 234 Backup and restore 234 Backup restore upgrade utility BRU for Enterprise Edge system 234 Backup and restore telephony programming 237 Enterprise Edge system diagnostics and utilities 241 Saving System Settings 241 Downloading System Settings 241 Graphs and tables 243 Error Messages 244 MIB II Information 249 Maintenance programming for telephony resources 253 System version 253 Module port status 254 System test log 257 System administration log 258 Network event log 260 Alarm codes 261 Event messages 261 Provisioning 271 Tests 272 CSU statistics 274 Link Status 278 Metrics 279 Moving telephones 279 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 281 General troubleshooting information 281
326. must obtain an IP address from the remote end and use it The address obtained depends on the RAS server that the Enterprise Edge server connects to Description Shows a description for the subsystem that is encapsulated by the DLL Version Shows the version for the subsystem that is encapsulated by the DLL Status Lets users set the modem interface resource status The possible states are Up the auto WAN backup service is enabled and the dial up link is currently connected Down the auto WAN backup service is enabled and the dial up link is currently disconnected Enabled the interface is enabled for use by the auto backup server Disabled the auto WAN backup service is disabled To set the WAN Summary attributes for the WAN backup link 1 From the IP Address list box select the appropriate IP address assignment or type a new value 2 From the Status list box enable or disable the connection to the backup link 3 Press the Tab key to save the settings WAN Backup Link Parameters Scroll down from the WAN Summary screen to find the WAN Link Parameters screen The WAN Link Parameters are Attribute Description Telephone Number Lets users specify a telephone number to be used to connect using the modem interface If needed include area codes if any and all necessary digits to dial an external number Alternate Telephone Lets users specify an alternate number to be used to connect using Number the modem
327. n is operational and the volume control is set properly Any music source with a low output impedance for example less than 3 300 ohms can be connected The output level must be less than one volt Problems with module service Check first for user problems then wiring connections and programming errors before replacing Enterprise Edge equipment Notify service provider of T1 or PRI signaling disruption Notify your T1 or PRI service provider before disconnecting your T1 or PRI lines removing power to your system or performing any other action that disrupts your T1 or PRI signaling Failure to notify your T1 or PRI service provider may result in a loss of T1 or PRI service 1 Check that the module is properly inserted in the server or expansion cabinet 2 Access Resources Telephony and then Feature settings ensure that the module is not disabled For more information refer to the procedure Display the module status on page 254 If the problem persists If the AC power is present and the LED indicator on the module is off contact your customer service representative If AC power is present and the LED indicator on the Enterprise Edge system is off replace the system power supply P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 294 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system Note Before you replace the system power supply disconnect all central office and station lines from the Enterpr
328. n Alarm duration value 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 or 50 and press Enter The default value is 15 seconds 5 Click a Time format 12 hour or 24 hour and press Enter Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 159 Hunt groups The Hunt Groups heading allows a group of Enterprise Edge sets to be called by a single directory number ensuring that calls are easily routed to the appropriate group The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Hunt groups programming map Hunt groups Q Hunt groups 01 30 Mode Hunt delay If busy Queue time out Overflow Name Members Member xxx DN Appearance type 9 Line assignment Line xxx Hunt Groups are used in situations where a group of people performing the same task are required to answer a number of related phone queries Some typical uses of Hunt Groups are e asales department answering questions on product prices or availability e asupport department answering questions concerning the operation of a product e an emergency department answering calls for help Hunt Groups can be used to route calls to a support service such as a Help Line for a software company Specialists dealing with Product A can be in one group and specialists dealing with Product B can be in another group Incoming calls hunt for the next available set in the group If no set is available the call can be placed in a queue or route
329. n and return to Unified Manager To modify the configuration of LAN1 output filters 1 Click an output filter in the Output Filter table P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 200 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 2 3 On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Output Filter Follow the steps for modifying input filters To add LAN1 output filters 1 10 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Output Filter The Output Filter dialog box appears In the Output Filter box type the output filter Inthe Source Address box type the source address In the Source Mask box type the source mask In the Destination Address box type the destination address In the Destination Mask box type the destination mask From the Protocol list box select the response In the Source Port ICMP type box type the source port ICMP type In the Destination Port ICMP type box type the destination port ICMP type Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete LAN output filters l 2 3 Click on an output filter in the Output Filter table On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete Output Filter Follow the steps for deleting input filters To modify the configuration of static routes 1 2 Click a static route in the Static Route table On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Static Route The Static Route dialog
330. n click action P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 350 Appendix C Setting Up Remote Routers 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Click the OK button The Filter Template Management window opens The new template appears in the templates list Click Done The Priority Outbound Filters window opens Click Create The Create Filter window opens Select a circuit in the Interfaces field Select a template in the Templates field Enter a descriptive name in the Filter Name field Click OK The Priority Outbound Filters window opens Click Apply The filter is applied to the circuit Sample Criteria Ranges and Actions for UDP Filtering The filtering goal is to place all VoIP H 323 traffic leaving a particular interface in the high priority queue From the BayRS Site Manager Use a criteria path of Criteria Add IP IP UDP Destination Port The range is 2065 to 2067 The action path is Action IP Add High Queue Note This example shows how to give H 323 traffic priority over other protocols on the interface Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary A AbsorbLength A setting that determines how many of the digits in a destination code will not be dialed by the system AbsorbLength is assigned under Destination codes in Services access code Different sequences of characters used to gain access to the features Line poo
331. n contain the optional ICMP code Static Route Specifies the static route name and is used as a key to uniquely identify an individual static route on the specified interface Its value must follow certain conventions It must have the prefix SR followed by a unique number that identifies this static route on this interface For example SR2 is a valid value While adding specify non recurring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing static route name it modifies the existing static route Using non sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers While modifying a static route you can t change the name The static route name does not have any significance other than to identify an entry Next Hop Router Lets users specify the IP address in a valid dot format for the next hop router Metric Value Lets users specify the metric value associated with the interface The metric is added to the hop count of the routes received through the interface Note If input and output filters are not defined for the LAN1 interface modifying input filter action or output filter action in the summary causes an error message To modify the configuration of LAN1 input filters 1 Select an input filter in the input filter table 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Input Filter The Input Filters dialog box appears 3 Inthe Source Address box type the
332. n each domain Do Not Disturb A feature that stops calls from ringing at your telephone Only Priority Calls will ring at your telephone A line button will flash when you receive a call but the call will not ring Driver Device A program that allows a hardware peripheral such as a NIC to communicate with the Enterprise Edge Server DTMF See Dual tone multifrequency dual tone multifrequency Two distinct telephone signaling tones used for dialing Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP DHCP is a protocol that lets network administrators centrally manage and automate the assignment of IP addresses in an organization s network Using the Internet s set of protocols TCP IP each machine that can connect to the Internet needs a unique IP address When an organization sets up its computer users with a connection to the Internet an IP address must be assigned to each machine Without DHCP the IP address must be entered manually at each computer and if computers move to another location in another part of the network a new IP address must be entered DHCP lets a network administrator supervise and distribute IP addresses from a central point and automatically sends a new IP address when a computer is plugged into a different place in the network P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 362 Glossary Emergency 911 dialing The capability to access a public emergency response system by d
333. n key to close the navigation tree QoS monitor To set the QoS monitor l On the navigation tree click Services QoS Monitor Clicking the QoS Monitor navigation key expands the navigation tree doesn t display the summary of configurable QoS monitor services You must click QoS Monitor The QoS Monitor Summary screen appears P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 216 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services The QoS Monitor Summary attributes are Attribute Description Description Shows the description of the service monitor Version Shows the version of the service monitor Status Lets users enable or disable the service monitor 2 From the Status list box select enable or disable 3 Press the Tab key to save the settings QoS Monitor Mean Opinion Score To view the QoS Monitor Mean Opinion Score 1 Click the Qos Monitor navigation key 2 On the navigation tree click Mean Opinion Score 3 Clicking the Mean Opinion Score navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Mean Opinion Score to view the Mean Opinion Score Services table If you configure or create remote gateways by clicking the Voice Net Remote Gateway navigation key the mean opinion scores of the connections to these remote gateways which are a measure of quality of the voice link while using IP trunk for each codec type are displayed in the screen Each configured gateway appear
334. n one step as a single package of dialing sequences that are not permitted In addition to restricting telephone numbers you can prevent people from entering dialing sequences used by the central office the public network to deliver special services and features Because some of these features provide the caller with dial tone after they have entered the special code which often uses or users may have an opportunity to bypass restrictions To prevent this from happening you should create filters that block these special codes You create a filter by defining the dialing sequences that are denied There will also be variations of each sequence that you will want users to be able to dial Sequences that can be dialed are called overrides Once you create the filters you can assign the restrictions to a telephone under Terminals amp Sets to a line under Lines to a particular line on a telephone under Terminals amp Sets and to remote callers under Lines Remote access 1 Select the number of the restriction filter you want to program 2 The restrictions are displayed in the right window 3 Enter a restriction for each filter 4 View any overrides to the restriction 5 Enter overrides for each restriction filter Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 109 6 Enter the letter A as a wild card character that represents any digit in a sequence of numb
335. n the call has been forwarded to its new destination The portable user can still answer the call but it does not ring The settings for Call Forward No Answer are found under Terminals amp Sets Capabilities in the Unified Manager P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 172 Configuring Telephony Resources Telco features The Telco features heading allows you define settings for voice message center numbers and outgoing name and number blocking The following illustration shows a detailed view of the Telco features programming map Telco features 9 Voice Message center numbers Center 1 5 External ONN blocking Tone Pulse Voice Message center numbers If you subscribe to a voice message service outside your office you can access it through your Enterprise Edge system This setting specifies the external telephone numbers that are dialed by the Message feature to retrieve voice messages Enter the external number for Center 1 through Center 5 The default for each voice message center number is No number Tips A telephone does not show that external voice messages are waiting unless External Voice Message set is enabled in programming The setting is in CLASS assignment under Terminals amp Sets You can program up to five voice message center numbers but most systems require only one Outgoing Name and Number Blocking Outgoing Name and Number blocking blocks
336. n the menu click Configuration and then click Add Filter The Filters dialog box appears In the Filter box type the appropriate filter Type a name that looks like Fxx where xx is a unique integer in the filter table In the Source Address box type the source address if it is required or leave this box empty In the Source Mask box type the source mask If you specify a source address you must specify a source mask In the Destination Address box type the destination address if it is required or leave this box empty In the Destination Mask box type the destination mask or leave this box empty From the Source Port list box if required select the source port or select ignore From the Destination Port list box select the destination port From the Protocol list box if required select the protocol or click ignore to ignore this field In the DSCode TOS Criteria box select a DS code in hex or leave this setting blank From the Priority list box select the priority Use caution when selecting a priority Lower values have precedence over higher values For priority 0 Enterprise Edge gives the same precedence as voice traffic possibly affecting the latter adversely In the Outbound DS Code TOS box type the outbound DS code Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete QoS filters l 2 On the Filter table click the filter you want to delete On the menu click Configuration
337. ncoming T1 DID calls that map onto the DISA DN are then routed to a line that has DISA For DISA programming instructions see Answer with DISA on page 103 Coordinated dialing plan Enterprise Edge has a routing feature that allows you to set up a coordinated dialing plan with other systems in the public network The goal is to have a network wide dialing plan where all telephone numbers are unique and of a uniform length Coordinated dialing plans are typically used with a network of systems with a three to seven digit dialing access between them Any programming for routing should be carefully planned using tables For more information about routing and destination codes see Routing service on page 114 This section deals with applying the programming in network situations Coordinated dialing plan using public lines The following illustrations provide an example of how you might record dialing plan information in a spreadsheet The example shows dialing plan information for a Toronto system in a network of three offices Toronto Halifax and Vancouver Without routing an Enterprise Edge user in Toronto would have to select a line pool and dial 1 902 585 3027 to reach extension 27 in Halifax 902 By creating a destination code of 30 and creating a route that uses the proper line pool and dial out number referred to as External in programming the user simply dials 3027 The same feature is available for Vancouve
338. ncoming calls but cannot be used to make outgoing calls Target lines are assigned by default for all templates except the DID template Target lines are assigned line numbers for example 241 to 336 similar to physical lines You can program auto answer T1 loop start T1 E amp M trunks T1 DID T1 ground start trunks PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass calling directly to a department or individual and line concentration one trunk can map onto several target lines P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 306 Appendix A Network Examples Remote system access The remote access feature allows callers elsewhere on the private or the public network to access Enterprise Edge by dialing directly without going through an attendant Once in the system the remote user can use some of the system s resources The remote access must be enabled in programming before callers can use it Enterprise Edge supports remote system access on the following trunk types which may require the remote caller to enter a password for direct inward system access DISA e auto answer loop start trunks e auto answer E amp M trunks e DID trunks by means of the DISA DN e PRI trunks by means of the DISA DN The system resources dialing capabilities line pool access and feature access that a remote user may access depends on the Class of Service COS assigned to them See COS passwords on
339. nd PRI A to PRI F Tips You can copy settings from one remote package to another The line pool access display shows an alphabetic line pool identifier followed by a numeric line pool access code in brackets for example Pool A 9 N If no access code has been identified there is nothing between the brackets for example Pool A N The line pool access code can be programmed under Terminals amp Sets Remote package 00 is the default setting for the Remote package setting It permits no access to line pools Unlike packages 01 to 15 package 00 cannot be changed You can define up to 15 remote access packages 01 to 15 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 148 Configuring Telephony Resources DN lengths Received number length The Received number length setting allows you to change the number of digits received on auto answer trunks These digits are used to identify target lines Auto DNs and DISA DNs Select the setting 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Tips The target line number for example line 241 and the Received number for the target line for example Received number 123 for line 241 are two different numbers The Received number length may be the same as the system DN length or may because of network or central office constraints be set to some other value Changing the Received number length causes all programmed received digits to be cleared DN len
340. ne is disconnected Check the line cord Problems with lines The troubleshooting problems listed here focus on trouble with making calls or using lines For more information refer to one of the following problems Calls cannot be made but can be received on page 285 Dial tone absent on external lines on page 286 Hung lines at a telephone on page 286 Auto answer line rings at a telephone on page 288 Prime telephone gets misdialed calls on page 289 Selected lines reads Not in service or Not available on page 290 Selected line pool shows No free lines on page 290 Calls cannot be made but can be received l If an incorrect line number or name appears or if neither appears on the telephone display check the programming settings OR If the correct line number or name appears on the telephone display make sure the external lines are properly cross connected P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 286 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 2 Check external lines by attaching a test telephone directly on the distribution block Ensure that the 25 pair cable is properly connected from the EE DSM to the station set termination In the Unified Manager verify that the EE DSM module is not disabled or unequipped by selecting Resources Telephony Maintenance and accessing Module port status For more information refer to Display the module sta
341. nes excluding PRI trunks If assigned they are used for monitoring call usage PRI lines Primary Rate Interface PRI lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are auto answer trunks PRI lines are set to auto answer by default and cannot be changed The DTI EE DTM is configured to provide PRI lines PRI lines provide a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving data images text and voice information Using PRI lines allows for faster transmission speeds and the addition of a variety of powerful business applications including remote LAN access video conferencing file transfer and Internet access T1 lines Loop E amp M DID Ground start Ground start lines offer the same features as loop start trunks but are used when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks Ground start trunks work with T1 only By configuring lines as ground start the system will be able to recognize when a call is released at the far end Tips You cannot change the trunk mode for a ground start trunk on an EE DTM or DTI It always has disconnect supervision An EE DTM configured for T1 can provide a maximum of 24 ground start trunks Analog ground start trunks are not supported Target lines A target line is a specific communication path that is reached by means of digits received from an incoming trunk Target lines are used to answer i
342. nes 001 to 014 are reserved for IP functionality The number of lines available for use is a function of software key codes and currently eight of the fourteen lines are available for IP functionality Note VolP trunks should not be accessed through Line appearances as the user will not receive dial tone VoIP trunks should be configured to use PRI pool A This way you can configure your IP trunks to use the fallback feature The use of Line pool codes is not recommended as you will not be able to configure for fallback The quality of the IP trunk connection is assessed during initial call setup and if the quality is above the configured threshold Enterprise Edge will try to find an alternate route to complete the call fallback based on the programming definitions in the routing table If you do not configure your network for fallback and the call quality is below threshold the IP call will fail For an example of a network configuration that supports fallback see Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway on page 325 When fallback is configured the IP call will be rerouted to a circuit switched connection This could be either a private network trunk or it could be a public network trunk Ideally you would want to configure fallback to use the least cost route if possible For more information about configuring VoIP trunks see the Enterprise Edge IP Telephony Configuration Guide Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908
343. ng calls on the lines Line pool access This setting allows a telephone to access one or more of the fifteen line pools available A to O Six exclusive line pools PRI A to PRI F are available for PRI lines Only three are currently supported Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 85 Only PRI lines can belong to a PRI pool PRI lines cannot belong to Line Pools A through O and all lines on a single EE DTM PRI belong to the same pool Lines from multiple EE DTM PRI can belong to the same pool if they are configured with the same protocol PRI lines are assigned to pools with the Line type setting To assign a telephone to a line pool 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 3 Choose Line access Line pool access 4 Click the Add button 5 Enter a letter from A to O 6 Click the Save button The set can now access any lines in that line pool Answer DNs Calls for other Enterprise Edge telephones can appear and be answered at the telephone being programmed The DNs of the other telephones are referred to as Answer DNs Every Answer DN assigned to the telephone automatically assigns an Answer button with an indicator to the telephone These buttons should be labeled accordingly identifying the telephone with its name or DN The maximum number of Answer DNs that can be assigned to a particular Enterpr
344. ng group to a line for each schedule See Ring groups on page 112 to create groups of extra ringing telephones Select the line number to see which ring group is assigned to the line Select the ring group number 001 100 to choose a different ring group assignment Tip Only one ring group can be assigned to a line for each schedule To combine groups of ringing sets you must create a new ring group which contains all the sets you want to ring and assign it to the line P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 114 Configuring Telephony Resources Auxiliary ringer Indicate whether the auxiliary ringer if installed also rings when Ringing service is on Click Y or N to enable Auxiliary ringer Tips The default ringing telephone is 221 This means that all lines ring at telephone 221 when Ringing service is on You can copy Ringing set and Auxiliary ringer programming from one line to another If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on an external line and you transfer a call on that line without announcing the transfer the auxiliary ringer will ring for the call transfer Restriction service Indicate how the alternate dialing restrictions should be activated for each of the schedules Select the schedule e g Night and the Service setting Select the service setting for each schedule Off Automatic or Manual See Ringing service in this section for descriptio
345. ning the appropriate protocol software and the correct version of that software to support ISDN PRI Each protocol is different and supports different services Contact your service provider to make sure that your ISDN connection has the protocol you require For more information on the supported protocols and services refer to Call by Call service selection for PRI on page 151 ISDN programming Most of the programming for PRI is done under Hardware PRI programming activity Programming heading View or change the Digital Trunk Media Bay Module Hardware Modules EE DTM also referred to as the Digital Trunk Interface DTT Configure EE DTM for PRI Provision or pre provision lines Maintenance Provisioning Enable or disable EE DTM Maintenance Module status View status of line Maintenance Module port status P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 346 Appendix B ISDN Overview Program PRI resources Some steps will not be necessary depending on the service you are using More detailed information is included under the individual headings and settings in the System Programming and Maintenance sections of the Unified Manager For complete module installation instructions and safety precautions see the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Manual 1 Collect the information supplied by your service provider to support your ISDN package 2 Install the EE DTM 3 Disab
346. nment CAP 1 5 CAP set Access codes Park prefix External code Direct dial digit Auto DN DISA DN Private access code Line pool codes Pool A O Access code Carrier codes Prefix xxx Code prefix ID length General settings cont d Q Remote access 9 Remote access packages Package 00 Remote page 9 Remote line access Line 001 364 Use remote package Q Change DN type DN type DN lengths Received length DN length Release Reasons Q Hospitality Service change time Set room settings DN 221 344 Room number Requires desk password Call permissions Vacant filter Basic filter Mid filter Full filter Alarm data Attempts Retry interval Alarm duration Time format P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 136 Configuring Telephony Resources Business name Select General settings in the navigation list to view the Business name field in the Unified Manager window To change the business name 1 Choose Resources Telephony General settings Feature settings 2 Type a name up to 7 characters and press Enter Change DNs Change DNs allows you to change the directory number DN or internal number of a telephone in the Change DNs dialog box Changing DN locks programming session Changing an individual DN locks the programming session into the Change DNs programming mode To unlock the programming session exit and restart the Unified Manager
347. ns purposes Internet Engineering Task Force IETF The IETF is the committee that defines standard Internet operating protocols such as TCP IP The IETF is supervised by the Internet Society s Internet Architecture Board IAB Internet standard Network Management Framework Device configuration and monitoring via SNMP IP The Internet Protocol IP is the protocol that supports data being sent from one computer to another on the Internet Each computer on the Internet has at least one address that uniquely identifies it from all other computers on the Internet When you send or receive data the message gets divided into units called packets Each of these packets contains both the sender s Internet address and the receiver s address IP is aconnectionless protocol which means that there is no established connection between the end points that are communicating Each packet that travels through the Internet is treated as an independent unit of data without any relation to any other unit of data In the Open Systems Interconnection OSI communication model IP is in layer 3 the Networking Layer IP address The Internet Protocol address is a unique identifier that allows communication over the Internet to be directed to the appropriate destination Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address IP addresses are allocated by an ISP in following format nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a numeric value from 0 to 255 IP ad
348. ns Assign a restriction filter to the line P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 336 Appendix A Network Examples Select T1 E amp M trunks to the private network For a confidential call the Montana sales manager presses the line button for a private E amp M trunk to the Oregon office This automatically alerts at the line appearance on the telephone of the Oregon sales manager Montana Oregon sales manager sales manager telephone 372 telephone 641 Enterprise Edge Enterprise Edge Hardware for both systems Enterprise Edge an EE DTM with a T1 E amp M line Heading Parameter Setting Montana Outgoing trunk Trunk Data Line Tl E amp M Line 049 Line Data Line type Private to 372 Line 049 Oregon Incoming trunk Trunk Data Line Tl E amp M Line 057 Answer mode Manual Line type Private to 641 Enterprise Edge Line Redirection feature The branch office is receiving more calls than it can handle so it redirects one of its lines to the main office All calls that come in on target line 241 will be routed out on line 003 to the main office Whenever a call is redirected the target line and outgoing line will be busy for the duration of the call Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 337 The branch office only routes out one call at a time on the redirected line If the ta
349. ns in the system Both radios belonging to the Base Station are disabled The Base Station hardware is faulty Two events are raised one for the B1 channel radio as in this case and another for the B2 channel radio A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs A B2 channel radio radio 2 on port 0103 in this case cannot be synchronized with other radios because of system overload A B2 channel radio radio 2 on port 0103 in this case cannot be synchronized because the B1 radio was disabled in maintenance Both radios belonging to the Base Station on port 0103 in this case are disabled The B1 radio must be operational to synchronize both radios of the Base Station with other radios in the system Two events are raised one for the B1 channel radio and another for the B2 channel radio A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs A radio 0103 1 in this case cannot be synchronized because there are no B2 channel radios Both radios belonging to the Base Station on port 0103 in this case are disabled Two events are raised one for the B1 channel radio in this case and another for the B2 channel radio A corresponding alarm code 53 occurs A recoverable RIM fault has occurred The RIM is reset If a link is active when this error occurs the link is dropped The radio 0109 1 in this case is returned to service Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 267 Event message display Evi ise7 Bieg
350. ns of the three settings Routing service The programming for routing decides what path an outgoing call takes using the digits that are dialed It is sometimes called Automatic Route Selection ARS When you select an internal line and dial the numbers you enter are checked against the routing tables If the number you dialed starts with a destination code the system uses the line pool and dials out digits specified by the route assigned to that destination code and then dials the rest of the number that you dialed Routing service replaces a number of tasks that otherwise have to be done manually including e entering a line pool code e dialing an access code for a long distance carrier e deciding which line pool to use according to the time and day You can set up routing to take advantage of any leased or discounted routes using information supplied by the customer The system itself cannot tell which lines are cheaper to use For Call by Call service selection PRI only the installer defines destination codes for various call types over PRI lines e g Foreign Exchange Tie Trunk and OUTWATS The user simply dials a number via the intercom button without having to enter any special information For more information see Call by Call service selection for PRI on page 151 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 115 Using routing to create a coordinated dialing p
351. nt Authentication Lets users enable or disable authentication failure traps Failure Traps When enabled the SNMP agent sends authentication failure traps if there is an authentication failure Authentication failure happens if an SNMP manager application provides a wrong community string or performs an operation that is not permitted for a community To modify the SNMP Summary attributes 1 From the Status list box select enable or disable 2 From the Authentication Failure Traps list box select enable or disable 3 Press the Tab key to save the changes Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 203 SNMP Community List Manager List and Trap Community List The SNMP community list manager list and trap community list attributes are Attribute Description Community List Lets users specify the entry name used as a key to uniquely identify an individual community entry on the SNMP agent Its value must follow certain conventions It must have the prefix C followed by a unique number that identifies the community name entry on the agent For example C2 is a valid value While adding specify non recurring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing community entry name it modifies the existing community entry Using non sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers While modifying a commun
352. nterface is used Enterprise Edge uses optimized software for high performance routing This includes an innovative design that speeds up the performance for LAN to LAN routing by over three times the rate that is normally achieved with traditional software architecture Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a protocol that lets network administrators manage and automate the assignment of Internet Protocol IP addresses in an organization s network Using the Internet s set of protocols TCP IP each machine that connects to the Internet needs a unique IP address If an organization sets up its computer users with a connection to the Internet an IP address must be assigned to each machine Without DHCP the IP address must be entered manually at each computer If computers move to another location in another part of the network a new IP address must be entered DHCP lets a network administrator supervise and distribute IP addresses from a central point and automatically sends a new IP address if a computer connects to a different place in the network You can set up Enterprise Edge to be your LAN s DHCP server and let it assign IP addresses to the workstations on your LAN as necessary This is the recommended configuration P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 38 Using Enterprise Edge Services If you set up the Enterprise Edge server as a DHCP server you mus
353. nterprise Edge model M7310 telephone that has a two line display with three display buttons 10 programmable buttons with indicators and 12 dual programmable buttons without indicators M7324 telephone The Enterprise Edge model M7324 telephone that has a two line display with three display buttons and 24 programmable buttons with indicators Names Names can be assigned to System Speed Dial numbers external lines telephones mailboxes ACD Queues and service schedules This is done in programming You can use up to sixteen characters to name a System Speed Dial number 13 characters for mailbox and ACD Queue names and seven characters to name a telephone line or schedule If a Name has not been assigned the line number or DN will appear on the display instead of a name name server A name server provides the means of translating readable host computer names into actual IP addresses so you do not have to remember long numbers in order to access other computers and destinations on the Internet For example DNS servers and WINS servers are name servers NetBIOS The Network Basic Input Output System NetBIOS is an interface and upper level protocol developed by IBM for use with a proprietary adapter for its PC network product NetBIOS provides a standard interface to the lower networking layers The protocol provides higher level programs with access to the network Windows NT systems use NetBIOS Network Two or more computers l
354. ntervals include 2 5 10 30 and 60 seconds Error Messages Messages appear if there is a system or processing error The messages include two parts the error string and the error number The error string includes the error description and the context of the error The error number is a three part number that uniquely identifies the error Be sure to note the error number when communicating with TSC to resolve the problem User Actions Some Enterprise Edge errors are caused by a wrong parameter value For these errors the recommended action resolves the problem Other possible errors are caused by an internal transition of states that puts the system and the user in an error condition In this event assistance from TSC is required to resolve the problem Note Any Enterprise Edge errors that are not listed in this manual are advanced and require assistance from TSC for resolution Errors List In the following list in cases where multiple errors can happen in a particular context a wild card representation is used Error Description Action Number 2 5 4 This is an invalid data error There was Provide the correct date value an error in setting system date Reason The date month or year component contains a zero or negative value Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 245 2 Xx 4 These are various errors related to an error in setting system date Reason Th
355. o another heading in the navigation tree Window identifier DN 222 Line access Field names Intercom keys 2 x Text fields OLI number Changing the Unified Manager s appearance You can change the Unified Manager s display to a Windows Motif or Sun Swing appearance using the following procedure 1 Select View from the menu bar 2 Select either Windows Motif or Metal 3 The view is updated for either a Windows Motif or default Sun Swing display Configuration Performance Fault Report Tools Logoff Enterprise Edge Front View You can resize the Unified Manager and configuration windows using your mouse using the following procedure 1 Move the pointer over any edge until it changes to a double headed arrow 2 Drag the edge of the window to the desired location and release the mouse Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Overview 29 Sn oe Hih Adjustable Edges aT Adjustable Navigation Tree Adjustable Columns Changing data views in the Unified Manager You can change the order and size of data views in the Unified Manager Use the following procedure to change the column order 1 Point to the column that you want to move and click on it with your mouse 2 Holding the mouse down drag and drop the column to the appropriate location The other column already in this location automatically changes places w
356. o maintain the minimum value of other service types The summation of the minimum values for incoming or outgoing PRI services cannot exceed the total number of lines in the PRI pool The maximum value for an incoming or outgoing PRI service cannot exceed the total number of lines in the PRI pool Programming Call by Call Limits 1 From General settings Call by Call limits select a pool PRI A to PRI F that supports Call by Call routing 2 Select a service under Service The service that is displayed depends upon the protocol 3 Enter a number if required under Min incoming 2 4 Enter a number if required under Max incoming 23 5 Enter a number if required under Min outgoing 4 6 Enter a number if required under Max outgoing 23 Release Reasons This feature is useful for diagnostic purposes It shows the reason why an ISDN call has been released The Release Reason can be displayed as Simple or Detailed text When the default None is selected no release reasons appears on the set Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 155 1 Select General settings Release reasons 2 Choose a Text setting Simple Detailed or None Note If you selected Simple text the Cause code must be disabled This is for diagnostics Line Pools All lines in a PRI interface are in the same PRI line pool This pool cannot contain any non PRI lines There is one PRI pool availabl
357. o the appropriate connectors or sockets either inside or outside the Enterprise Edge Server Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A digital telephone service that allows for a combination voice and data connection over a single high speed connection ISDN service can operate over the same copper twisted pair telephone line as analog telephone service intercom button A button that provides access to internal lines used for calls within a Enterprise Edge system and access to external lines through a line pool or external code A telephone may be assigned zero to eight Intercom buttons This is done under Line access in Terminals and Sets programming intercom keys See Intercom button Interface An information interchange path that allows communication between computer parts internal line A line on your telephone dedicated to making calls to destinations inside your system An internal line may still connect you with an external caller if you use it to access a line pool or to pick up a call using the call handling features such as Call Park or Call Pickup Directed P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 368 Glossary internal number A number also referred to as a Directory Number or DN that identifies a telephone or device internal user Someone using an Enterprise Edge telephone within the system Internet A global TCP IP network linking millions of computers for communicatio
358. oftware network The bearer capability for PRI is voice speech 3 1 kHz audio and data unrestricted 64 kbps restricted 64 kbps or 56 kbps Services and features for ISDN PRI As part of an ISDN digital network your system supports enhanced capabilities and features including e faster call set up and tear down e high quality voice transmission e dial up Internet and local area network LAN access e video transmission e network name display e name and number blocking e access to public protocols e Call by Call service selection e coordinated dialing plan e Emergency 911 dialing internal extension number transmission e access to Meridian 1 private networking SL 1 protocol premium telephony Network name display This feature allows ISDN to deliver the Name information of the users to those who are involved in a call that is on a public or private network Your Enterprise Edge system displays the name of an incoming call when it is available from the service provider If the Calling Party Name has the status of private it may be displayed as Private name if that is how the service provider has indicated that it should be displayed If the Calling Party Name is unavailable it may be displayed as Unknown name Your system might display the name of the called party on an outgoing call if it is provided by your service provider Your system sends the Business Name concatenated with the set name on an ou
359. og off Rebooting the Enterprise Edge server To reboot the Enterprise Edge server 1 Click Logoff and then click Reboot A message appears that asks you to confirm your request to reboot 2 Click the Yes button to reboot Configuring system settings 1 Click Group and then click System or Comprehensive 2 On the navigation tree click the Enterprise Edge key and then click the System key The screen displays the available Enterprise Edge item settings resources and configurable resource services 3 Configure item settings using Unified Manager and the resource services from the menu Scroll to see any settings that do not appear P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 58 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system Sees EE Duopo papak A amp WAH r ki wc 7 LPL Sep Aid bebe eh hrii Gye P coieererne dgr Finis Se __ iN ___ Eriein Edge DHCP Sere Eakiipiri Bdge DLE Sere Seabrpereg E zip ui Pecan Diep Edga SMP Agari seat Big ats ic we faders E cigs Vol greg Ups Mma Mie iip H rre The Unified Manager system settings are Setting Definition System Name Lets users specify the system name of the Enterprise Edge Unified Manager Description Shows a description of the Enterprise Edge Unified Manager installed system Resources A configurable listing of all resources installed on the Enterprise Edge Unified Manager system Services A configurable listing of s
360. og telephone connected to an ATA or an ASM P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 156 Configuring Telephony Resources Hospitality Services HS admin set A Hospitality Services HS admin set is any two line display Enterprise Edge telephone An HS admin set can be programmed to require a user to enter the Desk admin password before access to HS administrative features is granted Alarm time AL feature The Alarm time feature provides an alarm clock capability on Enterprise Edge and analog telephones connected to an ATA or an ASM Both room sets and common sets can be programmed to sound an audible alert at a requested time One Alarm time within a 24 hour period is programmable on a room or common set and must be reset daily When the alarm sounds all sets in a given room alert Canceling the alarm on any set cancels the alarm on all the sets in the room A new Alarm time entered on a room or common set overwrites any alarm set previously If the Enterprise Edge system experiences a power failure the failure can result in missed Alarm times When the Enterprise Edge system is running and the system s time resets the missed Alarm times alert in respective room or common sets At all times the Enterprise Edge system allows up to a maximum of 25 sets that can alert at the same time For more information about programming this feature see the Enterprise Edge Feature Telephone Programming Guide Service
361. ol A leave blank Private 002 Pool PRI A leave blank Private 6 001 None 002 None 003 Pool A leave blank Public 004 Pool PRI A leave blank Public 91613 004 1 003 None P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 328 Appendix A N etwork Examples To Toronto office Services Routing Service Route Use External DN type Route Use External DN type Destination Code Normal route Absorb Schedule 4 Absorb Heading Parameter Setting To Public Network Services Routing Service Destination Code 9161A Normal route 004 Absorb 1 Destination Code 916A Normal route 004 Absorb 1 Destination Code 91A Normal route 004 Absorb 1 Destination Code 9A Normal route 004 Absorb 1 Ottawa office Trunk Line Data Line 241 Target line Received 6221 Line Access Set 6221 L241 Ring only Line pool access Line pool A Line pool PRI A 001 Pool A leave blank Private 002 Pool PRI A leave blank Private 2 002 None 001 None Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 329 Heading Parameter Setting To Toronto Public Network Services Routing Service Route 003 Use Pool A External leave blank DN type Public Services Routing Service Route 004 Use Pool PRI A External leave blank DN type Public Destination Code 91416 Normal route 004 Absorb 1 Schedule 4 003 A
362. omatically after two rings Note CLASS trunks are required for this feature to work Consult your customer service representative to determine if you have CLASS trunks This feature also allows the automatic changing between North American daylight savings and standard time The Automatic Time and Date feature automatically overrides any manually programmed changes to the time and date in your system Note The year is not included with the time and date information and must be programmed manually if the current year differs from the network time Click Y or N to enable Automatic time amp date Link time Link time allows you to specify the duration of a signal required to access a feature through a remote system For example to program external dialing through a Centrex system which requires a Link time of 400 ms specify a Link time of 400 Tips The Link time required depends on the requirements of the host switching system that must be accessed Link is another name for recall or flash Set relocation Set relocation allows you to move any telephone to a new location within the Enterprise Edge system without losing the directory number autodial settings personal speed dial codes and any programming for that telephone Tips It is advisable to activate Set relocation after the set installation and programming has been done This provides you with more flexibility in testing equipment If this feature is deact
363. on Guide Enterprise Edge Call Center Set Up and Operation Guide Enterprise Edge Call Center Agent Cards Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Enterprise Edge TSP Server Configuration Guide Enterprise Edge Personal Call Manager User Guide Enterprise Edge Attendant Console Set Up and Operation Guide Enterprise Edge Attendant Console User Guide Enterprise Edge Call Detail Recording System Administrator Manual Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 About this document 13 Enterprise Edge ATA 2 Installation Guide e Enterprise Edge ATA 2 User Guide e Enterprise Edge Networking Set Up and Operation Guide e Enterprise Edge Networking User Guide In addition you can access the following telephone quick reference cards e Enterprise Edge M7100 User Card e Enterprise Edge M7208 User Card e Enterprise Edge M7310 User Card e Enterprise Edge M7324 User Card e Enterprise Edge M7410 User Card e Enterprise Edge CAP User Card Enterprise Edge Prime Telephone User Card Enterprise Edge Telephone Feature Card Regulations Safety Enterprise Edge equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA C22 2 No 950 95 and UL 1950 Edition 3 Risk of shock Ensure the computer is unplugged from the power socket and that any Aa telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully P0908508 I
364. on or unsupervised Disconnect supervision also referred to as loop supervision releases an external line when an open switch interval OSI is detected during a call on that line This prevents the line from remaining unavailable for other Enterprise Edge users e Unspr the default turns disconnect supervision off for the line e Super assigns supervised mode if supported by the line otherwise the line functions as unsupervised Tips The duration of an open switch interval OSI before Enterprise Edge disconnects a call is programmed by the Disconnect timer setting See Hardware on page 175 for more information Answer mode The Answer mode setting appears for T1 ground start lines T1 E amp M lines and T1 loop start lines whose Trunk mode setting is set to Super Select the setting Manual or Auto Note Disconnect supervision is required if loop start trunks are to operate in auto answer mode Answer with DISA The Answer with DISA setting is used to prompt a caller for a six digit class of service COS password The caller will hear a stuttered dial tone when the phone is answered and must then enter the password digits To program DISA ona PRI trunk see Direct inward system access DISA on page 310 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 104 Configuring Telephony Resources Link at CO Some exchanges respond to a Link signal Feature 7 A by providing an alternative line for
365. on t want to include the source port in your filter select IGNORE for it Otherwise select the port for one of the well known services from the list or type it in the list box If you type the port specify the service s numeric port number You can specify a range of ports by specifying the two limits of the range by ahyphen character for example 156 159 You can also specify 0 for the lower limit and 65536 for upper limit Destination Port Lets users specify a destination port to match the filter It is interpreted the same way as source port Protocol Lets users specify a protocol to match the filter If you don t want to include a protocol in your filter select IGNORE for the protocol Otherwise select the protocol from the list or type the numeric value of sub protocol under IP in the box PortRange Lets users reserve and list different UDP port ranges that the Enterprise Edge QoS module uses for VoIP RTP flows Set the UDP ports to high priority so that VoIP packets are forwarded quickly DSCode TOS Criteria Lets users specify the DS Code TOS value for the filter to match Use this setting only if your network or application behind Enterprise Edge is diffserv capable or diffserv aware Specify here the DS Code or TOS value that the application or the other edge device puts in the IP packets it sends Otherwise ignore this setting Priority Lets users specify the priority given to packets that match
366. one of the ports P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 256 Maintenance 5 Select Channels 6 Select B1 to display the device connected to the B1 channel or select B2 to display the device connected to the B2 channel The window displays the device its type the version number of the device and it s state a If there is an add on device attached to the telephone such as a central answering position module or a Busy Lamp Field select add on to display the add on device The following table lists some of the device types that may appear on the Enterprise Edge device identification display Display Explanation M7100 M7100 telephone M7310 M7310 telephone M7324 M7324 telephone 1 CAP1 First CAP module attached to an M7324 telephone 2 CAP2 Second CAP module attached to an M7324 telephone Nortel Networks ATA 2 Analog Terminal Adapter BLF Busy Lamp Field Disable a device Give notice that you are disabling equipment Inform people that you are going to disable their devices Pick a suitable time to disable devices Disabling a port will disconnect users from their calls Do not disable devices when many people are using the Enterprise Edge system Wait until after regular office hours Note Do not enable or disable ports during the first two minutes after plugging your system in If you do so incorrect ports may be enabled or disabled To recover from t
367. one with access to internal and external lines and line pools Each intercom button assigned during programming automatically appears on the telephone The buttons start with the lower right hand button or one button above if the Handsfree Mute feature is assigned to the telephone The following should be noted when assigning the number of Intercom keys Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 83 e A telephone requires two intercom buttons to be able to establish a conference call with two other Enterprise Edge telephones e Only one intercom button may be required if the button is only used to make and receive internal calls and to access line pools Two intercom buttons are required if a telephone has several lines assigned to ring only e The M7100 telephone can be assigned up to eight intercom buttons even though the telephone has only one programmable button OU Enter the digits used for the originating line identification number OLI Line assignment This setting allows you to assign physical trunks and target lines to each telephone Target lines are assigned and removed in the same manner as other lines Broadcast ring group ability is possible with multiple target line assignment across a group of sets To assign a trunk or target line to a telephone 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 to which you w
368. onfiguration rules should be followed unless local regulations require a modification e All PSTN connections must be over PRI e In order for all sets to be reached from a Public Safety Answering Position PSAP the system must be configured for DID access to all sets In order to reduce confusion the dial digits for each set should be configured to correspond to the set s extension number e The OLI digits for each set should be identical to the DID dialed digits for the set e The routing table should route 911 to a PRI line pool e Ifattendant notification is required the routing table must be set up for all 911 calls to use a dedicated line which has an appearance on the attendant s console e The actual digit string 911 is not hard coded into the system More than one emergency number can be supported If transmission of internal extension numbers is not required or desired then it is recommended that the person in charge of the system maintain a site map or location directory that allows emergency personnel to rapidly locate an Enterprise Edge set given its DID number This list should be kept up to date and readily available P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 344 Appendix B ISDN Overview 2 way DID With PRI the same lines can be used for receiving direct inward dialing DID and for making direct outward dialing DOD calls The dialing plan configured by your customer service r
369. only if you want to allocate an equal amount of log space to all the telephones in your system Reallocating Call log space may destroy Call log data at telephones that lose space There are 600 Call log spaces available in the system There are no spaces allocated by default Changing the space allocation using Log Defaults defines the log space available to all telephones in the system Any remaining unassigned log space is available in a log pool and can be reallocated from Terminals amp Sets Telco features Direct dial Direct dial lets you dial a single system wide digit that can be used to call a specific telephone called a direct dial telephone The most common example of a direct dial set would be telephone for an operator a receptionist or an attendant Set 1 Set 5 For the direct dial set indicate whether it has an internal or external number A total of five direct dial sets can be programmed on the system Select the setting Internal External or None Internal External Enter the internal or external number that the system will automatically dial when someone enters the direct dial digit The default number for the direct dial set is 221 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 143 Facility If you assign an external number as a direct dial set you must indicate which line to use for the call Select the line for the external number Pool
370. ore it must be a neighbor of cell 03 or 04 Register individual portables You must do two things to register each portable with the Enterprise Edge system e Register the portables by entering the Registration password on each one e Verify that the portable operates properly When you distribute the portables tell the users that the portables are registered and give them the corresponding extension numbers Tip You can register a portable to more than one system You cannot register a portable to more than one extension number per system You cannot register more than one portable to one extension number If a portable telephone is to be used in more than one Enterprise Edge system its owner must know which registration slot number was used to register the portable telephone with each system It is preferable that each user have the system they use most often registered in slot 1 If a portable telephone is lost or broken deregister it from the system before replacing it with another portable telephone System programming Once the registration process is complete portable telephone programming is much the same as it is for Enterprise Edge desk telephones Some of the programming settings do not affect the operation of the portable The table below shows the recommended settings for Enterprise Edge Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 171
371. ou statistical information on call by call limit settings for PRI when the protocol is set to call by call routing 1 Choose Resources Telephony Metrics CbC limit metrics The display shows the pools that supports CbC routing 2 Select a pool The display shows the services in the pool The services that are displayed depends upon the PRI protocol 3 Select a service The display shows the settings for the selected service To clear the settings for a selected service select Clear metrics under the Configuration menu Moving telephones You can move a Enterprise Edge telephone to a new location within the system without losing its programmed settings Set relocation automatic telephone relocation must be enabled in system programming This makes the internal numbers autodial settings and personal speed dial codes remain with the telephone when it is unplugged P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 280 Maintenance Automatic telephone relocation is disabled by default Use the following procedure to enable set relocation 1 Choose Resources Telephony General settings Feature settings 2 Inthe Set relocation box select Y from the pull down menu After set relocation is enabled unplug the telephone and plug it in again at another location It may take up to 45 seconds for the system to recognize the telephone Tips All telephones being moved should be relocated before new te
372. owever this is not usually required except for international calls where the number of digits dialed varies Under Routing service Dialing timeout select a different timeout value You can select one of the following values in seconds 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 Too small a timeout value forces you to enter the digits very quickly one after the other and too large a value causes the system to wait for a long time after the last digit is entered before the call is actually made For more information on non PRI routing tables and destination codes see Routing service on page 114 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 126 Configuring Telephony Resources Common settings Services share the settings for control sets schedule names and schedule times Control sets A control set turns Services on and off for the lines and or telephones assigned to it You can assign several control sets for your system A control set for lines controls Ringing service Restriction service and Routing service for its assigned lines a control set for telephones controls Restriction service and Routing service for its assigned telephones Assign a control set for each external line and telephone Enter the internal number of the control set for each line and for each set Tips External lines and telephones must be programmed with a control set to use the three kinds of Services You can assign a control set to more than one
373. p to 100 restriction filters can be created for the system A restriction filter consists of up to 48 restrictions and their associated overrides To restrict dialing within the system you can apply restriction filters to e outgoing external lines as line restrictions e telephones as set restrictions e external lines on specific telephones as line set restrictions Restriction filters can also be specified in Restrictions service for times when the system is operating according to a schedule See Restriction service on page 114 for more details Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Set restriction line 1 line 3 nog Oooo eli TTT Moa CTO HO line 5 Appendix A Network Examples 309 Line restriction no long distance except area codes 212 718 214 713 no long distance except area codes 212 718 Line Set restriction no long distance except area codes no long distance no long distance 212 718 415 Dialed digits must pass both the line restrictions and the set restrictions The line per set line set restriction overrides the line restriction and set restriction In this diagram a caller using line 001 could only dial long distance numbers to area codes 212 and 718 A caller using line 003 could not dial any long distance numbers A caller using line 005 could dial long distance numbers to area co
374. packet drop in case of congestion in the frame relay network This field s value carries the same semantics as the differentiated services codepoint discussed in RFC2474 The least significant two bits are ignored Compression Enabled PVCs Lists PVCs on which compression is enabled If the compression field is Disabled the field does not have any meaning If the compression field is Enabled compression and decompression are performed on the data going to and coming from the PVCs in this list The value can be a comma separated list of DLCI numbers You can specify a range of DLCIs by specifying the lower and upper boundaries by a hyphen You can mix individual numbers and ranges Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring networking resources 71 Attribute Description Access Rate Lets users set in kbps the maximum access rate on the interface running frame relay The frame relay congestion control engine uses this value to limit or shape traffic Specify a value computed using the T1 channels available for data communication on the port attached to this interface and their data rates To modify the configuration of the WAN Frame Relay Parameters 1 From the LMI Type list box select the LMI type 2 Inthe Polling Interval box type the polling interval in seconds 3 Inthe Full Enquiry Interval box type the full enquiry interval 4 Inthe Error Thres
375. page 130 and the Nortel Networks Voice Programming Guide for more details To use features on Enterprise Edge remotely press followed by the feature code Even if you are calling from another Enterprise Edge system press instead of Feature Remote access on loop start trunks Loop start trunks provide remote access to Enterprise Edge from the public network They must be configured to be auto answer to provide remote system access A loop start trunk must have disconnect supervision if it is to operate in auto answer mode T1 E amp M trunks always operate in disconnect supervised mode When a caller dials into the system on a line that has auto answer the system answers with system dial tone and no COS password is required In this case control over the system capabilities available to the caller is provided only by the restriction filters assigned to the line When a caller dials in on a line that has auto answer with DISA the system answers with stuttered dial tone This is the prompt to enter a COS password which determines which system capabilities are available to the caller Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 307 Remote access on a private network Nodes on the private network deliver the last dialed digits to the destination Enterprise Edge node for interpretation The destination Enterprise Edge node either matches the digits to a target line or interprets
376. pending on the required dialout Setting up a route for local calling An office may have different suppliers for local and long distance telephone service By programming a destination code any call that begins with 9 the most common dial out digit will automatically use lines dedicated to local service The first step is to build a route under Routing Service in Services e enter 001 or any other available route number You can view defined routes or erase a defined route e assuming that the lines for local calling have been placed in Line pool A choose it as the line pool e enter the dial out digits if any which are needed to direct the call once it is connected to an external line The second step of programming is setting up how the route will work with a destination code Because users will dial 9 to make an external call 9 should be the destination code For local calls only there are no dial out numbers compare with Setting up a route for long distance calling on page 120 e Enter 9 at Destination Code If entering a code other than 9 a valid destination code must be used See Destination codes on page 117 View existing destination codes before entering a new code P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 120 Configuring Telephony Resources The destination code can use a different route depending on a Schedule see Services In the current example Route 001 is use
377. phony programming backup and restore features BRU works with xmi files to perform step by step backup restore or upgrade of the full Enterprise Edge system or selected components For more information refer to Backup restore upgrade utility BRU for Enterprise Edge system on page 234 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 238 Maintenance Performing a backup When you perform a backup the telephony component of your system slows down but remains completely operational Backups keep your server working for a period of time therefore schedule backups for when you don t need your server for other tasks Use the following procedure to perform a backup 1 Verify that you are using the correct backup file for your system If you attempt to use an incompatible file for a restore it will cause a warm start of the Enterprise Edge system a restart where no programming is lost 2 Start the Backup and Restore tool by choosing Resources Telephony The Tools menu option is enabled 3 Click Tools Backup A confirmation dialog is displayed asking if you wish to start now 4 Click Yes to start When a backup is in progress the text shows the current action and the file name For example Backing up System Programming into file Fnvram new When a backup is in progress a bar graph shows the rough percentage of the action that is complete It does not appear unless a backup or restore 1s occu
378. ppear 2 Configure the Console Service Summary and Licensing attributes according to the following table Attribute Description Status Lets users specify the status of the Attendant Console The options are EnableManual EnableAuto Start Stop Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 225 Attribute Description Version Lists the version of the Attendant Console This attribute is read only Description Provides a description of the Attendant Console This attribute is read only Licensed Seats Lists the number of licensed seats This attribute is read only Used Seats Lists the number of used seats This attribute is read only Server Configuration To configure the Server Configuration attributes for the Attendant Console 1 From the navigation tree select Services Console Service Server Configuration The Voice Mail Port and Station Discovery screens appear 2 Configure the Voice Mail Port and Station Discovery attributes according to the following table Attribute Description Voice Mail Pilot Lets users specify the default voice mail extension for the system Specify an Extension extension number for the voice mail system Rediscover Lets users specify whether the system tries to communicate with all possible Station List on destination numbers to check for their status Exercise ca
379. prise Edge Attendant Console uses a graphical user interface to provide centralized call management For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge Attendant Console Set Up and Operation Guide and Enterprise Edge Attendant Console User Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 26 Enterprise Edge Overview Unified Manager The Enterprise Edge Unified Manager provides a web based browser that lets you view and change configuration settings for e IP Services e VoIP Service e Telephony Functions e Management Server Module e QoS Module Most changes made with the Unified Manager become part of current Enterprise Edge programming as soon as you select an item from the menu options However some changes won t take effect until about a minute after the user stops programming If you make a mistake when programming you will have to reenter the original programming For more information refer to e Browser requirements on page 26 e Understanding the Unified Manager on page 27 e Enterprise Edge system access on page 30 Browser requirements The following configuration is recommended for PCs acting as HTTP clients used to configure Enterprise Edge through the Unified Manager e Win NT workstation running on P133 or higher CPU or compatible e 64 MB RAM 10 MB disk space e Minimum screen resolution of 1024 X 768 e Minimum monitor size of 17 inches To use Enterprise Edge Unified Manager
380. prise Edge is the gateway that links your company s network to the Intranet or Internet Depending on your configuration you can let your workstations know that Enterprise Edge is your Internet gateway Note If your PC is a DHCP client under Enterprise Edge you do not have to let your workstations know that Enterprise Edge is your Internet gateway e DNS Proxy A Domain Name Service DNS proxy translates alphabetic domain names into computer readable IP addresses For example the domain name www nortelnetworks com for the Nortel Networks web site can translate to the IP address 192 177 5 18 After a domain name is translated into an IP address the workstations on your network can communicate with the web site Depending on the configuration of your system you can let your workstations know that Enterprise Edge is the DNS proxy Note If your PC is a DHCP client under Enterprise Edge you do not have to let your workstations know that Enterprise Edge is your DNS server When Enterprise Edge receives DNS requests from clients it first checks its local cache for name entries and records If found locally Enterprise Edge immediately responds to clients Otherwise Enterprise Edge creates a new DNS request to the remote Primary or Secondary DNS servers on behalf of the client If the remote DNS server responds with the requested records they are forwarded to clients and cached in Enterprise Edge Guidelines for Using DNS Consider the
381. protocol If AllowClearText is selected CHAP is used first and if the receiving end of the link declines PAP is used to authenticate the link user Two Way Authentication Lets users enable or disable link authentication in both directions User ID name password Lets users specify a user name and a password that the link uses to authenticate itself while dialing out to another router To set the access parameters for the WAN backup link 1 Scroll to find the WAN Access Parameters 2 From the Authentication list box select the authentication type 3 From the Two Way Authentication list box select the two way authentication type 4 Inthe User ID name password box type the user ID separating the user name and password with a space 5 Press the Tab key to save the settings 6 Click the WAN navigation key to close the navigation tree Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 6 The Telephony heading allows you to program and manage all the voice components associated with Enterprise Edge It includes information such as how to set up lines and trunks define settings for individual telephones how to customize your telephone network to suit your requirements and so on From the Unified Manager expand Resources and Telephony to view the Telephony subheadings The Telephony subheadings are briefly summarized in the table below Note that the Maint
382. r subnet mask A value used to route packets on TCP IP networks When the IP layer has to deliver a packet through an interface it uses the destination address contained in the packet together with the subnet mask of the interface to select an interface and the next hop in that subnet synchronous A synchronous signal is sourced from the same timing reference A synchronous signal causes the interval between successive bits characters or events to remain constant or locked in to a specific clock frequency system data An option in the Set Copy function System Data refers to the programmable system settings that apply to all telephones and lines System programming A programming section that lets you assign and maintain certain settings on the Enterprise Edge system System speed dial code A two digit code 01 to 70 that can be programmed to dial a telephone number up to 24 digits long System speed dial codes are programmed for the entire system under the System Speed programming heading System Startup See Startup programming T Tl Digital carrier system or line that carries data at 1 544 Mbps P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 386 Glossary TAPI SeeTelephony Application Program Interface Target lines Lines used to answer incoming calls only A target line routes a call according to digits it receives from an incoming trunk They are referred to by line numbers in
383. r 604 In the column Dial out P stands for pause a host system signaling option Press to insert a 1 5 second pause in the dialing string Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 311 Routing Service Services Routing Service Route Dial out if required Use Pool 000999 max 24 digits or characters 100 1 P 902 585 5 B C 101 1 P 902 585 B C I gt 102 1 P 604 645 A B C 103 1 P 604 645 e B C N ABC Routing service continued Dest code Services Routing service Dest codes Service Schedule N ormal Sched 1 Sched 2 Sched 3 Sched name N ormal N ight Evening Lunch MaxsdeCharyt Mara a ae Meada ot l a a a a a DestCode Use route Absorb Use route Absorb Use route Absorb Use route Absorb max 7 digits 001 999 Length 001 999 Length 001 999 Length 001 999 Length 30 Loea100 wio 000 All 000 All 000 All 31 ogo 701 awo 000 All 000 All 000 All 32 0001 02 miO 000 All 000 All 000 All 33 000 1 03LAa O 000 All 000 All 000 All Destination code numbering in a network Because the system checks the initial digits of a call against the routing tables each type of internal or external call must begin with a unique pattern of digits The following table gives a sample plan for how initial digits are assigned in a network of systems with three digit intercom numbe
384. r Setting To Toronto Routing Service Route 001 External No number Use Pool PRI A ServiceType Tie ServiceID 1 DN type Private Destination Code 2 Normal route 001 Absorb 0 To Public Network Routing Service Route 002 External No number Use Pool PRI A Service type Public Destination Code 9 Normal route 002 Absorb ALL Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway and M1 networking This example shows a private network composed of one central Meridian 1 and two smaller sites with Enterprise Edge systems connected over IP trunks through a corporate IP network This could represent a large head office with the Meridian 1 connected to several smaller branch offices In this network only the head office has trunks connected to the public network The branch offices access the public network using IP trunks to the head office This configuration allows for cost savings by consolidating the public access trunks Users at all three locations access the public network by dialing 9 followed by the public number For example a user in the west end branch might dial 9 555 1212 for a local call or 9 1 613 555 1212 for a long distance call These public calls are routed to the Meridian 1 by the Enterprise Edge routing table Routing tables at the Meridian 1 will then select an appropriate public facility for the call Private network calls are made by dialing a 4 digit private network DN For example if a user in the west end branch wis
385. r access code contains an Equal Access Identifier Code followed by a Carrier Identification Code The CIC identifies the carrier to be used to handle the call The Carrier Access Code table stores the CAC digit pattern that you define for your region In most cases it is not necessary to change the default values The capability is there to modify overall patterns if required you can define at most five entries two entries will be pre defined in North America but you are free to remove these defaults each entry consists of an equal access identifier code prefix one to six digits and a carrier identification code length one digit 1 9 each entry is identified by the prefix digits themselves Select General settings Access codes Carrier codes Prefix 10 Enter a Code prefix 1 6 digits Under ID length enter a carrier ID length value one digit 1 9 Public DN lengths In most cases it is not necessary to change the default values The public DN lengths table is used for all PRI calls except those whose routes use service type Private or service type Tie with DN Type specified as Private The public DN lengths table allows Enterprise Edge to determine the length of a DN based on the initial digits dialed by the user In the public DN lengths table you can define at most 30 entries each entry consists of a DN prefix string 1 to 10 digits and a length value two digits 1 25 several entries will be pre defined
386. r at the Toronto office examines the Called Party Number digits and determines that it should be routed to the IP address corresponding to the Ottawa office The Ottawa office receives the call sees that the leading digit s match its Private Network Access Code and uses a destination code to route the call over its public trunks to the PSTN This is a simplified example where only calls to the 613 Area Code are routed by the Ottawa node In a real world configuration it would also be desirable to handle Area Codes that are close for example Montreal 514 In the table that follows private network routing information is highlighted in gray Public network routing information is shown in white Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 327 Calls to Ottawa office Services Routing Service Services Routing Service Services Routing Service Calls to Ottawa Public Network Services Routing Service Route Use External DN type Route Use External DN type Destination Code Schedule 4 Absorb Normal route Absorb Route Use External DN type Route Use External DN type Destination Code Normal route Absorb Schedule 4 Absorb Heading Parameter Setting Toronto office Lines Trunk Line Data Line 241 Target line Received 2221 Terminals amp sets Line Access Set 221 L241 Ring only Line pool access Line pool A Line pool PRI A 001 Po
387. r call prefix digits Suppress Setting Lets users enter the length of personal identification digits to suppress 2 4 In the Access and Suppress boxes type the appropriate access and suppress settings You can define up to five settings for each Press the Tab key save the settings Click the Call Detail Recording navigation key to close the navigation tree TAPI Service Provider To configure TAPI Service Provider settings l On the navigation tree select Services TAPI Service Provider Clicking the TAPI Service Provider navigation key causes the key to disappear but doesn t show the read only settings You must click TAPI Service Provider TAPI Service Provider Settings and configurable Station List screens appear TAPI Service Provider Settings are read only however you can add and delete station in the Station List The TAPI Service Provider attributes are Attribute Description Status Shows the current status of the TSP telephony service provider as reported by the TSP software The possible values are Unknown In Service Not In Service Initializing In KSU Admin These strings are presented in English French or Spanish depending on the software settings The default value is Unknown and the typical value is In Service P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 224 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services Attribute Descrip
388. r premium traffic for example Netmeeting Enterprise Edge does not support preemption of admitted premium streams e Currently packet prioritizing and priority filters apply only to outbound traffic for specified interfaces Inbound traffic is treated on a first in first out FIFO priority e The maximum port numbers a user can reserve for premium traffic is 256 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 49 LAN Connections The Enterprise Edge Ethernet 802 3 interface supports the IEEE 802 3 Ethernet frame format The Ethernet interface uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD to manage the access to the physical media The Enterprise Edge Ethernet interface supports the following features 100 BASE TX with RJ 45 connector 10 100 Auto Sense Full Duplex support Fast LAN LAN routing WAN Connections This section includes information on WAN overview Permanent WAN connections Frame Relay PPP WAN overview A WAN wide area network is a geographically dispersed data communication network The term WAN distinguishes a broader data communication structure from a local area network LAN A WAN can be privately owned or rented but usually connotes the inclusion of public shared user networks Enterprise Edge includes two primary WAN links WAN1 WAN2 and a backup WAN dial up link WAN3 The Primary WAN link is al
389. r the interface This operation also involves setting default values for some parameters By default Enterprise Edge sets the IP Address of corresponding LAN interface to DNS Server WINS Server Default Gateway options of the scope It also sets the lease time to 3 days and creates a range of addresses for the scope If the IP Address of the LAN interface is in the lower half of the subnet the address range set for the scope includes all the address above the LAN interface address If the IP Address of the LAN interface is in the upper half of the subnet the address range set for the scope includes all the address below the LAN interface address By default the scope is enabled The DHCP LANI Scope Specific Options Address Range and Excluded Address Range attributes are Attribute Description DNS Server Lets users specify the clients DNS server The value for this parameter is automatically assigned by Enterprise Edge s auto configuration system If the IP Address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface is changed this value gets overwritten Use caution when changing this value WINS Server Lets users specify the client s WINS server The value for this parameter is automatically assigned by Enterprise Edge s auto configuration system If the IP Address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface is changed this value gets overwritten Use caution when changing this value Enterpris
390. rame Relay Press the Tab key to update the screen A configurable WAN PPP Parameters screen does not appear unless the current link protocol is PPP 4 Scroll to view any settings that do not appear 5 Configure the WAN Summary WAN Line Parameters WAN Frame Relay or PPP Parameters screens from Unified Manager Configure the PVC congestion control screen using the menu Refer to the following sections for details about the WAN Summary WAN Line Parameters WAN Frame Relay Parameters WAN PPP Parameters and PVC congestion control screens If your current link protocol is Frame Relay you must configure WAN Frame Relay parameters and PVC Congestion Control entries If your current link protocol is PPP you must configure WAN PPP Parameters If the WAN port you are configuring is a T1 Port you must configure WAN Line Parameters If the port you are configuring is a synchronous Sync port WAN Link Parameters have no effect and are ignored See the description of the port in WAN Summary section to see which port you are configuring WAN Primary Link Summary Parameters To reach the WAN Summary screen select Resources WAN then WANI or WAN2 The WAN Summary screen attributes are Attribute Description IP Address Lets users specify the IP address of the WAN interface Type the data in the following format 255 255 255 255 SubNet Mask Lets users specify the subnet mask in a valid dot format of the WAN interface
391. ramming O perations Guide 12 About this document system and telephony programming backup and restore Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system on page 281 allows you to solve problems in the Enterprise Edge system that require changes to system programming Appendix A Network Examples on page 303 includes some networking examples using the Enterprise Edge system Appendix B ISDN Overview on page 339 includes some background information about ISDN Appendix C Setting Up Remote Routers on page 349 explains how to set up a Nortel Networks BayRS router Glossary on page 351 contains a list of Enterprise Edge terms and definitions Related documents In addition to the Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide the Enterprise Edge documentation suite contains the following documents Enterprise Edge Feature Programming Telephone Guide Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide Enterprise Edge IP Telephony Configuration Guide Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging Set Up and Operation Guide Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging Reference Guide Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging Quick Reference Guide Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging Programming Record Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging AMIS Set Up and Operation Guide Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging AMIS User Guide Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging Client Installation Guide Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging Quick Reference Guide Enterprise Edge Software Keycode Installati
392. ramming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 113 Automatic allows you to program a stop and start time for a service You are still able to start and stop the service by entering the appropriate Services feature code at a control set If you select this setting you will have to set start and stop times See the section on schedule times for information on programming times Off prevents the service from being activated Trunk answer Trunk answer allows you to answer from any telephone an external call that is ringing at another telephone in your office This is useful if the other telephones have not been assigned the same lines as the telephone you are using to answer the call Click Y or N to enable Trunk answer Tip You can change the Trunk Answer setting only if Ringing service is set to Manual or Automatic Extra dial set Extra dial set allows you to assign an additional direct dial set in the Enterprise Edge system for each schedule you use Enter the internal number of the extra dial set or choose None Tip The extra dial set is activated during a schedule by entering the Ringing service feature code from a direct dial set This does not activate the Ringing service unless the direct dial set is also a control set Line settings For Ringing service Ring group and Auxiliary ringer use are programmed for each line individually Ring group You can assign a predefined ri
393. rations 330 337 speed dial 128 test log 257 261 264 version 253 system performance graphs and tables 283 system programming change DNS 136 feature settings 136 access codes 143 call log space 142 CAP assignment 143 daylight time 138 Delayed Ring Transfer 139 directd pickup 139 direct dial 142 held reminder 137 page 138 page tone 138 park 139 set relocation 140 remote access 146 system programming see system programming system settings Answer key 141 Automatic Time and Date 138 system settings configuring 57 T Tl line coding 182 signal diagnostics 274 transmission performance 274 Tapi service provider overview 223 target lines and received number 102 description 304 P0908508 Issue 02 incoming calls 305 numbering 305 TCP counters 251 technical support 283 telephone control sets 126 direct dial 144 log calls automatically 93 relocation 140 troubleshooting 284 voice message waiting indication 93 Terminals amp Sets 80 80 94 capabilities 86 allow redirect 87 auxiliary ringer 87 direct dial 86 DND on busy 86 handsfree 86 handsfree answerback 86 hotline 87 page zone 86 paging 86 pickup group 86 priority call 87 redirect ring 87 line access 81 answer DNs 85 intercom keys 82 line assignment 83 line pool access 84 prime line 82 name 89 restrictions 91 telco features 91 user preferences 90 testing loopback tests 272 system test log 257 tie lines 331 time system 61 timer disconnect 178 TOS pre
394. rded when a timeout occurred while waiting for ANI or DNIS digits to be received Invalid password entered Call by Call NVRAM data is corrupt and all the values have been reset to default DN length has been changed to less than 3 digits wireless system is disabled activation or recovery code entered new base station configuration detected the data driver has received a bad call reference the data driver has received a bad data event the data driver could not allocate a new index no response to the system within 10 seconds of being sent an initialization message no response to the system within 3 seconds a bad parameter value has been received in a stimulus message from the data device old data to be discarded has been detected RADAR flow control has received a bad stimulus message from an off core application attached set denied request for a B channel corrupt CLID length an asynchronous data report generated by SDI incorrect software key entered a call processing error has occurred on an ISDN line Alarm code 63 is sent because there are no DTMF receivers for an incoming call mobility data re evaluation sequence initiated an invalid dial pulse signal was received by the EE DTM auto attendant error How to read an event message In the event message shown below Evt799 indicates a call processing error has occurred on an ISDN line Evt799 XXXX YYS7 The event number Evt799 is followed by a number
395. rdination with the T1 service provider Some test patterns can cause the EE DTM to reset To avoid this start the payload loopback test from your system before the T1 service provider begins their test and stop the payload loopback test from your system after the T1 service provider ends their test Card loopback test The card edge loopback test loops the outgoing signal on the EE DTM back to its internal received signal path Signal paths to the external network are disconnected Continuity loopback test The continuity loopback test shorts the tip and ring pair of the receive signal path with the transmit signal path This test allows you to check the metallic continuity of the external wiring Start a loopback test Give notice that you are running a loopback test Calls on all T1 or PRI lines on the EE DTM will be automatically dropped when a loopback test is invoked Use the Page feature to notify people using the system that a test is about to begin and that calls will be disconnected 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Tests 2 Select the module which contains the card you want to test P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 274 Maintenance 3 Select the appropriate card The Configuration menu option is enabled The loopback status box displays the type of test currently running Note If there is an analog module in the slot or the slot is empty the box displays
396. re information see page 140 Values Y or N Default N Message reply Activates the Message reply enhancement feature For more information enhancement see page 141 Values Y or N Default Y Answer key Allows you to determine what types of calls will alert at the telephone For more information see page 141 Values Basic Enhanced or Extended Default Basic Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 139 Park mode The Call Park feature lets you suspend a call and lets someone retrieve the call by entering a retrieval code at any Enterprise Edge set in the system Park Mode is the setting which determines how a retrieval code is assigned to parked calls Select the way that the system will choose a Call Park code Lowest or Cycle When set to Lowest the system will choose the lowest code that is available when the call is parked When set to Cycle the system will choose the codes in a sequence from lowest to highest until all the codes have been used DRT to prime Delayed Ring Transfer automatically forwards unanswered external calls to a prime telephone after a certain period of time This helps ensure that no external call goes unanswered Tips An operational prime telephone must be assigned before this feature can operate A prime telephone is assigned to one or more external lines in the Line Data of programming Directed pi
397. received Values None Tone Lamp Default None Enterprise Edge Analog Terminal Adapter settings ATA 2 The analog terminal adapter converts digital interface signals to analog for communication with analog devices such as single line telephones fax machines and modems ATA answer timer A timer can be used to administer a delay between the last digit you dial on a device connected to Enterprise Edge ATA 2 and when the system begins to send out tones DTMF or modem on the outgoing line without capturing and interpreting them Tip If a modem or fax machine is attached you will want to keep the delay short If a call to a fax machine or modem cannot be connected try shortening the delay If an individual is dialing the number for a fax machine or modem you may want to make the delay a little longer ATA use Enterprise Edge ATA 2 can connect to devices that are either on your premises or at some other location Select On site or Off site Msge Indicate Select the type of message indicator to be activated when a set receives a message Select None Tone or Lamp Name The default name for a telephone is its DN but the name can be changed to a more descriptive name if desired P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 90 Configuring Telephony Resources To assign a name to a telephone 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528
398. refix or code is changed to None and the corresponding feature is disabled Network Name Display Enterprise Edge will display the name of the calling party when it is provided both Private or Public ISDN PRI interfaces The displayed name may include information such as the Receiving Calling Name Receiving Redirected Name and or Receiving Connected Name The outgoing name is the business name concatenated with the set name For information on programming your CLASS assignment see Feature assignment on page 93 Note Network Name Display is an optional feature that is available based on the interface to which you are subscribed Interface Feature NI PRI DMS SL 1 Custom PRI Premium telephony Receiving Calling Supported Supported Supported Name Receiving Redirected Supported Name Receiving Connected Supported Supported Name Sending Calling Party Name Supported Supported Supported Sending Connected Name Supported Supported Receiving and Sending Calling Party Name Network name display allows the name of an incoming PRI call to be displayed on the Enterprise Edge set receiving the call Calling Party Name with status of PRIVATE may be displayed on the Called Party set as Private name If the incoming Calling Name is defined by the CO as a private name then Private name appears on the answering set If the Calling Party Name is unavailable it may be displayed on the
399. representing the line or loop number and a code for the type of error In this example the error has occurred on line XXX and the error code is YY P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 264 Maintenance The following table lists the error codes and their meanings Error code Meaning 01 Internal software error Cannot acquire the B channel from the B channel arbitrator 02 Internal software error There is no free line available for the call 03 A call that is not on the B channel has been attempted These kind of calls are part of EKTS service which is not supported by this version of the software Check with your service provider to make sure your package does not include EKTS service 04 Internal software error Failed to instantiate on the chain 05 Internal software error Activation procedure failed 06 Internal software error Index conversion failed 07 Unexpected digits on a Manual answer mode line Configuration of the system and the network connection may not match 09 Cannot get vterm virtual terminal from the Vterm Server 0C Internal software error Already instantiated on the chain Events that cause a system restart You should rarely see any event messages that are not described in the Significant event messages on page 262 If you do see one of these event messages the system has followed its normal recovery from an unusual combin
400. responsible for executing program commands It is also referred to as the Central Processing Unit CPU Modem A communications device that allows data to be exchanged between computers over telephone lines The exchange is done by electronic processes called modulation and demodulation The modem changes modulates the data into tones to send to another modem and also converts demodulates tones when receiving from another modem Move Line buttons A feature that allows you to move external lines to different buttons on your telephone Multilink PPP Multilink PPP is an extension to the PPP protocol that enables you to group a set of links into a bundle for more bandwidth The links in the bundle can operate at different speeds Typical links can be ISDN B channels dial up connections and leased lines Music source A radio or other source of music can be connected to the system to provide music for the Music on Hold and Background Music features A music source is not part of the Enterprise Edge system and must be supplied by the customer M7100 telephone The Enterprise Edge model M7100 telephone that has a single line display and one programmable button without an indicator P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 372 Glossary M7208 telephone The Enterprise Edge model M7208 telephone that has a single line display and eight programmable buttons with indicators M7310 telephone The E
401. ress you can click Cancel to discontinue the operation For more information refer to Stopping a restore on page 240 4 Verify the system is working properly once the restore is complete Stopping a backup l When the restore is in progress click Cancel to discontinue the operation The Close Application dialog box appears The backup continues behind the dialog box until you respond Click Yes to stop the backup If you click No the backup will continue Stopping a restore Ifyou stop a restore you must perform another successful restore or the system will initiate a cold start This means all programming will be lost and all settings will return to the factory defaults 1 When the restore is in progress click Stop to discontinue the operation The Stop Restore dialog box appears Click Yes to stop the restore action If you click No the restore action continues If you select Yes the Cold Start Warning dialog box appears It tells you that the system will initiate a cold start You can only click Exit Application Click Exit Application Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 241 Enterprise Edge system diagnostics and utilities This section includes information Enterprise Edge diagnostics and utilities including e Uploading System Settings e Downloading System Settings e Enterprise Edge Performance Utility e Error Messages e MIB I Information Saving System
402. ress the Tab key to save the settings Routing To configure Routing services settings select Services Routing from the navigation tree This brings you to the Routing Summary and Global Settings screens The Routing Summary and Global Settings attributes are Attribute Description Description Shows a description of the router Version Shows the version of the router Status Lets users enable or disable the router Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 193 Attribute Description Packet Filtering Lets users enable or disable packet filtering When the system comes up the first time this value is N A indicating that the Management system cannot retrieve pertinent information Set it to Disabled or Enabled and valid values are displayed Disabling packet filtering here disables it on all interfaces The router performs better when packet capturing is disabled RIP Log Level Lets users specify a log level for the RIP routing protocol manager maximum generates the maximum log warnings also generates a log for warning conditions too errors only generates log errors only for use during normal operations disabled disables logging not recommended Triggered Update Interval Lets users specify the minimum interval between sending triggered updates To modify the attributes of the Routing Summary and Global
403. results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers While modifying a filter entry you can t change the name Source Address Lets users specify the source IP address in a valid dot format If you want to ignore the source address field in filter leave this field blank If you specify an address in this field you should also specify a subnet mask in the Source Mask field Source Mask Lets users specify the source mask of the IP address in a valid dot format If you specify a source address you must specify a source mask and vice versa Make sure that the mask and address match with each other i e bitwise and of mask and address is equal to the address If you want to specify a range of addresses use a subnet mask other than 255 255 255 255 For example address mask combination 10 10 10 32 255 255 255 252 represents addresses 10 10 10 32 10 10 10 35 Destination Address Lets users specify a destination IP address in a valid dot format See the instructions for Source Address Destination Mask Lets users specify a mask for the destination IP address in a valid dot format See the instructions for Source Mask P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 208 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services Attribute Description Source Port Lets users specify a source port to match the filter Specify a source port only if you choose a TCP or a UDP protocol If you d
404. rget line is busy the next incoming call will go to the prime set and not be redirected target line 241 redirected call main office Hardware Enterprise Edge an EE DTM with one T1 E amp M line or one T1 DID line Tips Any line appearance on a telephone can be selected as the incoming line to be redirected Restriction filter restrictions on the line are checked against the filter in effect at the time a call is redirected not when redirection is programmed A target line can not be selected as the outgoing line for redirection The incoming trunk must have disconnect supervision Heading Parameter Setting Incoming trunk Incoming trunk Trunk Line Data Line 061 T1 Loop Trunk Line Data Trunk mode Super Answer mode Auto OR Line 065 T1 DID OR Line 065 TI E amp M Answer mode Auto Received 4321 for target line 232 Rec d length Received length 4 digits Rec d length can be from 2 to 7 digits but must match number of digits sent by central office Outgoing trunk Outgoing trunk Trunk Line Data Line 062 T1 Loop Trunk Line Data OR Line 066 TI E amp M Capabilities Allow redirect Y Capabilities P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 338 Appendix A Network Examples PRI dialing plan example for 2 way DID The following list shows the steps involved in configuring a dialing plan for two
405. rides any line restrictions or set restrictions which might otherwise apply If no line set restrictions have been defined the numbers are checked against the set restrictions and the line restrictions if either of these have been defined The numbers may be rejected by either restriction Telco features Telco features can program the way Enterprise Edge works with features and services that are based in the public network or other outside source Enterprise Edge is designed to work with two of these kinds of services Call Display and an external voice message service When you are finished programming Telco features settings for one telephone you can copy those settings to other telephones Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 93 Feature assignment If you subscribe to Call Display services often called Caller ID external calls are identified on the display You may also have a message indicator from an external voice mail service show on the set s display Analog Call Display services are available with an EE CTM Feature assignment programming allows you to customize how this information is used PRI also provides the Caller ID Select the number of the line you want to program with Feature settings Call log set Call log set allows you to specify whether the telephone automatically logs Call Display information for calls on an external line The line
406. rier using an access number sometimes called an equal access code Programming for routing can include the access number so users don t have to dial it every time they make a long distance call 1 Create a route that uses a line pool containing local lines only 2 Program the route to use a line pool containing the lines used to access the long distance carriers 3 Enter the dial out digits which are the same as the access digits For example if the access code was 10222 the dial out digits would be10222 4 Create a destination code 91 9 for outside access and 1 for long distance A valid destination code must be used See Destination codes on page 117 5 Set Absorbed Length to 1 The 9 is only used internally and should be dropped the 1 is needed to direct the call to the public carrier network Tips The destination codes 9 and 91 used in the examples cannot be used together If the destination code 91 is needed to direct long distance calls you must create a separate set of codes that use local calling routes These codes would be for example 90 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 and 99 See Wild card character on page 118 for information on programming destination codes P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 122 Configuring Telephony Resources User dials 9 1 601 555 2222 Call is directed in the public system 9 1 601 555 2222 1 601 555 2222 91 is a destination code
407. rings simultaneously at all the sets in a group This way all receptionists in the group can share the load of answering large volumes of calls All sets automatically display the calling line identification CLID if available A familiar example is a fund raising campaign where a group of operators are waiting to take each call as it comes in e Linear starts the call at the first set in the Hunt Group and distribution is complete when the first free set has been found Simultaneous calls can be presented Distribution is order based e In Linear mode you can program your top salesperson to be the first member of the group to receive incoming calls e Rotary the call starts at the set after the one which answered the last call Distribution is complete when the next free set has been found Simultaneous calls can be presented Distribution is order based e In Rotary mode you can ensure that all your helpline people are receiving calls on an equal basis rather than one person receiving the majority of calls The call rings at one set at a time in a round robin fashion If a Hunt Group has available members but nobody answers the call the call is routed through the Hunt Group list until either someone answers the call or the queue time out occurs In the latter case the call is routed to the overflow position Once a call goes to the overflow position it is no longer a Hunt Group call To set the call distribution mode 1 Choose
408. rivileges and with a few people allowed to use it Multiple users logging on to Enterprise Edge from different client stations through the administrator account can causes inconsistent or wrong configuration There is no security within Enterprise Edge to prevent this To modify user profiles l 2 In the User Profile table click the user profile you want to modify On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify User The User Profile dialog box appears In the Password box type the new password if necessary In the Confirmed Password box retype the password From the Privilege list box select the appropriate user privilege Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete user profiles 1 ze In the User Profile table click the profile you want to delete On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete User A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Alarm Manager Configuring Management Settings 231 Enterprise Edge provides real time information about what is occurring within the Enterprise Edge system The Alarm Manager enables you to manage the collection and storage of this information In the Alarm Manager you can set various collection parameters for the Alarm Database You can also enable or disable the sending of all or vario
409. rkstations have shorter download times e Previously downloaded information is stored for future use by all workstations on the LAN e Enterprise Edge retrieves information from the Internet only if it is not already cached or if the cached file is out of date compared to the information on the Internet e Cookie blocking protects users privacy You can configure the web caching settings through your web browser The web proxy also provides security features similarly to the DNS proxy because it hides all of the internal browsers IP addresses from external web servers External web servers see only Enterprise Edge s IP address Guidelines for Using Web Caching Proxy The Enterprise Edge web proxy uses a web server for running in HTTP Proxy mode Consider the following guidelines when using web caching proxy e A web server installed in Enterprise Edge cannot be used as a general purpose HTTP server It is only used by the Enterprise Edge web based management client and web cache services e Ifusers must run their web sites they must run the HTTP Server on another system and make its IP address known to Enterprise Edge To set the web server as the web cache proxy refer to Web cache on page 216 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Using Enterprise Edge Services 41 Simple Network Management Protocol SN MP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the protocol that governs network m
410. rnal Use DN type Destination Code Normal route Absorb 001 No number Pool PRI A Private 4 001 0 001 002 No number Pool PRI A Public 9 002 0 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples 319 Additional Configuration In this example outgoing public network calls dialed from an Enterprise Edge set are passed to the Meridian M1 and the Meridian M1 is responsible for seizing a public trunk For this reason the 9 prefix is left in the number passed to the Meridian 1 This necessitates that the Public DN lengths table on each Enterprise Edge be modified to account for the extra leading digit Essentially the eight pre configured entries are modified to include a leading 9 in the prefix digits and the length value for each entry is increased by one The new entries are listed below Note that regulatory requirements may demand an entry for 911 Prefix Length Default 8 90 12 900 13 901 18 9011 19 91 12 9411 4 9911 4 Meridian M1 Configuration e Meridian M1 is the timing master for the private network PRI connections e Meridian M1 uses descending mode for PRI B channel selection e The Meridian M1 must recognize calls dialed to 2xxx and 6xxx numbers and route the call over PRI to either the East or West end offices The same applies to incoming DID calls from the public network e The Meridian
411. rnet Engineering Task Force IETF as one of several internal gateway protocols IGPs A RIP router sends full updates which list all the other hosts it knows about to its closest neighbor host every 30 seconds The neighbor host sends the information to its next neighbor until all the hosts in the network know the routing paths a state known as network convergence RIP uses a hop count to determine network distance Each host with a router in the network uses the routing table information to determine the next host for the packet until a specified destination is reached Enabling RIP on Network Interfaces To run RIP on one or more network interfaces go to the specific interface under router and enable RIP After you enable RIP for an interface you do not have to reboot the Enterprise Edge server for the changes to take effect Packet Filtering A packet is a unit of data routed between an origin and a destination on the Internet or on any other packet switched network When any file such as an e mail message HTML file GIF file or URL request is sent on the Internet the IP layer divides the file into packets of an efficient size for routing Each of these packets is numbered and includes the Internet address of the destination Enterprise Edge supports basic or stateless packet filtering for IP You can configure the filter to pass only the packets from the routes they list or to pass everything except the packets for the routes t
412. rnet Service Provider ISP Web proxy A web proxy or HTTP proxy is a server that acts on behalf of the requester of pages from an HTTP server and the Internet Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ WFQ is a queuing method that allows low volume traffic such as Telnet to be given priority and interactive traffic receives higher priority than batch transfers Also high bandwidth usage traffic such as batch file transfer traffic gets equal priority with other high bandwidth use traffic Wide Area Network WAN A collection of computers or Enterprise Edge Servers connected or networked to each other over long distances typically using common carrier facilities wireless See Companion Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Index Numerics 2 way DID PRI 344 PRI dialing plan example 338 2 way service 338 A access codes 143 315 accessing Unified Manager settings resources 63 services 185 system 57 administration web based setting up 55 admission control guidelines 45 introduction 44 alarm codes 261 CSU 276 messages 138 short term 277 telephone 138 alarm manager settings overview 231 alarm service settings overview 226 Alarm time 156 allocating log space 142 allow last number redial programming 91 ANI auto number identification 105 answer DNs 85 mode 103 with DISA 103 archiving backup files 237 assign answer DNs 85 intercom buttons 82 line pools 84 lines 83 prime line 82 auto
413. rring Note When a backup is in progress you can click Cancel to discontinue the operation For more information refer to Stopping a backup on page 240 When a backup is in progress you can also start another backup 5 When the backup is complete click Done The Backup and Restore dialog box closes Performing a restore The Restore feature allows you to overwrite existing programming or to upgrade the system When you perform a restore the telephony component of your system is non operational and call processing is suspended Perform restores during non business hours and warn users that the Enterprise Edge system will be out of service Schedule restores for a time when you don t need your server for other tasks Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 239 When you run a restore all of the sets are put in maintenance mode Programming data from your server s hard disk or other data storage medium is then loaded into the system s memory After the data is loaded the Backup and Restore tool takes the sets out of maintenance mode by initiating a warm start A warm start restarts the Enterprise Edge system with all its programming intact including any changes you have made Use the following procedure to perform a restore A restore overwrites existing programming You cannot recover Enterprise Edge system programming that has been overwritten If a restore fails the
414. rs Leading Digits Use 0 Network Direct Dial 221 253 Intercom calls 4 Coordinated Dialing Plan 5 Unused 6 Unused 8 Call Park Prefix 9 All PSTN Calls P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 312 Appendix A Network Examples In the table 4 is used as the initial digit for the coordinated dialing plan but 5 or 6 could also be used for this purpose Tip When programming a button to dial a Network number automatically autodial network calls must be programmed as external autodial numbers even though they resemble internal extension numbers Routes generally define the path between the Enterprise Edge system and another switch in the network not other individual telephones on that switch Dialing plan using T1 E amp M lines By properly planning and programming routing tables and destination codes an installer can create a dialing plan where e T1 E amp M lines between Enterprise Edge systems are available to other systems in the network The following figure and programming chart shows a coordinated dialing plan for a network of three Enterprise Edge systems Each system must be running Enterprise Edge software Each system must be equipped with target lines and Enterprise Edge with an EE DTM with at least one T1 E amp M line Routing by destination codes New York Toronto Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221
415. rvice for a call can be changed by entering a six digit Class of Service password Internal users cannot change their access to features with a COS password only their restriction filters Class of Service and Class of Service passwords are assigned in Passwords programming See Remote Access Class of Service password A six digit code that lets you switch from your current Class of Service to one that lets you dial numbers prohibited by your current Class of Service client A client is a computer system or process that requests a service of another computer system or process A workstation requesting the contents of a file from a file server is a client of the file server cold start A cold start occurs when all system programming is lost This can happen after a major event such as an extended power failure Companion Wireless The name for the communication systems which use radio technology to transmit and receive signals between its components and the Enterprise Edge Server Companion Wireless provides mobility in the workplace Calls that used to ring just at your telephone set can also appear and ring at your portable Companion portable telephone Hand held wireless telephones that allow complete mobility within the reach of Companion Base Stations or an external antenna Portables offer many but not all standard system features and share much of the same programming as wired desk telephones Conference A featur
416. ry number is available to handle the registration Link setup request A Base Station has received a corrupted stimulus message The Base Station does not understand the received stimulus message This occurs when you are trying to use a type of portable that the system does not support Wireless subsystem language loading error Firmware downloading to Base Station P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 270 Maintenance Event message display Eytierl Evtia7r2 Evtie7s Evtiar Etir EutiS79 Ewtisel Evtise4 Evtises Evtiss Evtise Evtises 55 55 53 55 55 55 55 55 Cause Basestation download is complete Wireless subsystem error Wireless subsystem Common Signaling Channel server software error Wireless auto admin Re Eval subsystem detected that a data re evaluation is required Wireless data re evaluation has started Wireless data re evaluation has completed Wireless auto admin Re Eval indicating that a configured cell failed to come on line Alarm 23 displays cell that failed The Wireless auto admin Re Eval subsystem has detected an error Sequencer functionality has detected an error The Wireless auto admin Re Eval Initial Intelligence component has detected an error The Wireless auto admin Re Eval radio Sniffing component has detected an error The Wireless auto admin Re Eval Radio Manager has detected
417. s an Enterprise Edge PRI software keycode This example shows a private network composed of one central Meridian 1 and two smaller sites with Enterprise Edge systems This could represent a large head office with the Meridian 1 connected to several smaller branch offices In this network only the head office has trunks connected to the public network The branch offices access the public network via the private connection to the head office This configuration allows for cost savings by consolidating the public access trunks Users at all three locations access the public network by dialing 9 followed by the public number For example a user in the west end branch might dial 9 555 1212 for a local call or 9 1 613 555 1212 for a long distance call These public calls are routed to the Meridian 1 by the Enterprise Edge routing table Routing tables at the Meridian 1 will then select an appropriate public facility for the call Private network calls are made by dialing a 4 digit private network DN For example if a user in the west end branch wishes to call a user in the east end branch within the private network they dial 6221 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Network 2221 Received 2221 Appendix A Network Examples 317 Network 6221 Received 6221 Internal 6221 Internal 2221 PRI SL 1 PRI SL 1 Enterprise Edge Enterprise Edge Ea
418. s off replace the module Replace the link cable Replace the module Replace the MSC For information on replacing components refer to the Enterprise Edge Installation and Maintenance Guide Problems for network or remote users Refer to one of the following items for information on how to solve network or remote user problems Remote feature code gets no response on page 297 Dialed number gets ringback and the wrong person on page 297 Dialed number gets dial tone instead of ringback on page 297 Dialed number gets busy tone on page 298 Dialed number does not get through on page 298 Dialed feature code gets overflow tone on page 299 Dialed feature code gets busy tone on page 300 Line pool access code gets overflow tone on page 300 Line pool access code gets ringback on page 301 Line pool access code gets busy tone on page 301 Dialed number gets no response on page 301 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 297 Remote feature code gets no response Possible problem An Enterprise Edge user has called into another Enterprise Edge system and is trying to activate a remote feature but gets no response after dialing the feature code Solution 1 Make sure that the remote caller is dialing the feature code correctly Use the asterisk character followed by the feature code to activate a remote feature Do not
419. s on a separate row Each row consists of the fields for the name of the remote gateway its IP address the status of the QoS monitoring for the connection and the mean opinion scores for each allowed voice codec types and for each direction If the QoS Monitor setting for the remote gateway entry is Disabled the MOS value for the remote gateway is N A Also if the QoS Monitor service is disabled or down for any reason all MOS values are N A While MOS values are being shown they are updated approximately every 50 seconds To refresh the data on the menu click View and then click Refresh Click the QoS Monitor navigation key to close the navigation tree Web cache To configure the web cache settings 1 On the navigation tree click Services Web Cache The Web Cache Summary screen appears Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 217 The Web Cache Summary attributes are Attribute Description Description Shows the description of the Web Cache server Version Shows the version of the Web Cache server Status Shows the status of the Web Cache server This setting is read only The server always runs to provide support for web based UIs for Enterprise Edge Server Address Lets users tell the web server what IP address to use for interacting with HTTP clients Since Enterprise Edge server typically has more than one IP interface and associat
420. s range Reason The IP Address values specified for the range are not correct At present each component in IP address specified in dotted format should be in the range 0 255 not including the boundary values Fix the value If your IP Address range contains more than 255 addresses in it and you need to exclude a range that ends with 255 or starts with 0 use the next upper or lower value to avoid specifying this value 5 5 40 This is an invalid data value There are missing values in the new excluded address range Reason Data for each excluded address entry should include two values one for the start and the other for end This error happens if one of them is missing Enter the missing value and click Save again P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 246 5 5 41 This is an invalid data value The new excluded address range is not completely within an IP Address range Reason Excluded Address ranges should be completely contained within a single IP Address range specified for the scope If a DHCP scope contains more than one IP Address range then the excluded address ranges specified if any may not span outside a single IP Address range in any way This includes overhanging outside of a single IP Address Range or spanning over multiple IP Address Range Fix the over hanging problem If required specify multiple excluded address range Note
421. sable PPP LCP extensions that include Time Remaining Identification and Callback features The Callback feature is not supported even if LCP extension is enabled To set the link parameters for the WAN backup link 1 Inthe Telephone box type your telephone number choice 2 Inthe Alternate Telephone box type your alternate telephone number choice 3 From the Connect Rate list box select your connection rate choice 4 Inthe Dial Retries box type the number of times to attempt dialing if the connection fails 5 From the Speaker Mode list box select your speaker mode choice 6 From the IP Header Compression list box select enable or disable 7 From the Software Compression list box select enable or disable 8 From the Hardware Compression list box select enable or disable 9 From the PPP LCP Extensions list box select enable or disable 10 Press the Tab key save the settings P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 76 Configuring networking resources WAN Backup Access Parameters Scroll down from the WAN Link Parameters screen to find the WAN Access Parameters screen The WAN Access Parameters are Attribute Description Authentication Lets users specify the authentication type for the link Users can choose AllowClearText or EncryptedOnly If EncryptedOnly is selected only encrypted authentication such as CHAP is used on this interface during PPP authentication
422. scope status 6 Press the TAB key to save the settings To modify add or delete a DHCP address range or excluded address range assign only one IP Address range for a DHCP Scope and exclude ranges of addresses in it from being assigned to clients To modify address ranges 1 Click an address in the address range table 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Address Ranges The Address Range dialog box appears 3 Type the necessary changes in any of the boxes 4 Click the Save button to save the modifications and return to Unified Manager P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 190 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services To add an address range l On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Address Range The Address Range dialog box appears In the Range box type the range identifier The range field uniquely identifies a range value in the scope The value for this field is used as key and must follow certain conventions It must always start with the prefix R followed by a unique number identifying the range in the table For example R2 is a valid name While adding specify non recurring values for the unique number While adding if you specify an existing range name it modifies the existing range Using non sequential numbers results in automatic reassignment of sequential numbers When you modify a range you can t change the range name The range na
423. set in Enterprise Edge configuration Use caution if you change it 3 Inthe WINS Node Type box type the appropriate WINS Node Type This is set in Enterprise Edge configuration Use caution if you change it 4 From the Status list box select either enable or disable 5 Press the Tab key to save the settings DHCP LAN settings To configure scope attributes for DHCP 1 Click the DHCP navigation key to expand the navigation tree P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 188 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 2 On the Navigation tree click LAN1 Clicking the LAN1 navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click LAN1 to display the configurable DHCP LAN services If your Enterprise Edge system has multiple LAN interfaces you can see multiple DHCP scopes under DHCP They are named LAN1 LAN2 etc This section describes configuring the DHCP scope for LAN1 Follow the same instructions to configure any of the parameters under the scope for LAN2 The frame displays the LAN Scope Specific Options Address Range and Excluded Address Range screens Scroll to view settings not displayed on Unified Manager Configure the scope specific options dialog box from Unified Manager Configure the LAN address range and the LAN excluded address services screens through the menu Note Ifthe IP Address or subnet mask for a LAN interface is changed the corresponding DHCP scope is created or modified fo
424. set that is in the call pickup group Transfer via Hold Transfer is supported on Hunt group sets however Transfer via Hold is not Once a call is answered on a Hunt group set its appearance disappears from all others sets in the Hunt group so that other calls can come in on the same line Priority Call Priority calls cannot be made to Hunt group DNs Ring Again Ring Again cannot be used when calling a Hunt group DN Line Redirection The Allow redirect attribute should be set to N for lines assigned to Hunt groups For more information see Capabilities on page 86 Page Zones Hunt group DNs cannot be included in a Page zone Voice Call Hunt groups cannot accept voice calls Answer buttons have no appearances for voice calls and the set does not ring Adding or removing members from a group Members of the group can be any Enterprise Edge set or portable An Enterprise Edge set can be in more than one Hunt Group but is considered a member in each Hunt Group increasing the total number of members in the system There can be only one appearance of the same Hunt Group on a set Hunt Group DNs cannot be members of other Hunt Groups A DN can be associated with a member of a Hunt Group and is called a member DN Consult your customer service representative to determine your Hunt Group number range To add a member to a hunt group 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2
425. settings Schedules Line xxx Ring group Public DN lengths Aux ringer Schedules Evening Q Night Lunch Service setting Sched 4 Evening Sched 5 Lunch Sched 6 Sched 4 Sched 5 Restriction service Sched 6 Night Service setting Common settings Evening Control sets Lunch Q For lines Sched 4 Lines 001 364 Sched 5 9 For sets Sched 6 DN 221 528 Schedule names Schedule 0 6 Schedule times Monday Sunday Schedules Night Evening Lunch Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 6 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 112 Configuring Telephony Resources Each of the three services has six schedules that you can customize For example you may want to combine alternate call ringing with alternate dialing restrictions for lunchtime evenings and weekends Schedules 1 2 and 3 Then you may want to run alternate call routing using three separate schedules Tips Once you have programmed the different services and schedules you can turn each of the services on separately For example the Night schedule might control both Ringing service and Restriction service But you can turn on just the Ringing service part of the Night schedule if you wish You can activate the services from the designated control telephone for each Enterprise Edge telephone and line in your system You can have one control telephone for the whole sy
426. shed over an analog or digital phone line Differentiated Services DiffServ DiffServ is a implementation methodology for QoS service for IP networks DiffServ is a rule based methodology intended to improve network performance Instead of applying faster more advanced technology networks are managed by appropriate network policies With DiffServ there is a cost associated with higher quality services and a risk with lower quality services P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 360 Glossary Direct dial A feature that lets you dial a designated telephone in your system with a single digit As many as five direct dial sets can be established Each telephone in the system is assigned to one direct dial telephone There is a single system wide digit for calling the assigned direct dial telephone of any telephone Direct dial telephones are established in System programming Telephones are assigned to a direct dial telephone under Capabilities in Terminals and Sets programming Direct dial A digit used system wide to call the Direct dial telephone The digit is assigned under Access codes in System programming Direct dial number The digit used to call the direct dial telephone directed pickup See Call Pickup Directed Directory number DN A unique number that is automatically assigned to each telephone or data terminal The DN also referred to as an internal number is often used to identify
427. siness planning It also has the ability to support multiple Wallboards which can be individually configured to display the information that the agents require For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Enterprise Edge Voice over IP gateway IP telephony is most commonly referred to as Voice over IP VoIP VoIP involves the conversion of voice from it s traditional telephony format into a packet format digital that can be transported over an intranet The Enterprise Edge VoIP gateway allows telephony calls to be made over any intranet connected to the Enterprise Edge system For more information refer to the Enterprise Edge IP Telephony Configuration Guide Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Overview 25 Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging consists of three features e Enterprise Edge Unified Messaging which allows you to create and receive messages on your personal computer e Enterprise Edge Personal Mailbox Manager which allows you to administer mailbox features and functions such as mailbox initialization recording of greetings target attendant and the setting up and maintenance of off premise message notification e Enterprise Edge Operator Manager which allows you to change the Operator password change business status enable or disable the system attendant and enable or disable the
428. situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should A contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician Hearing aid compatibility Enterprise Edge telephones are hearing aid compatible as defined in Section 68 316 of Part 68 FCC Rules Electromagnetic compatibility Enterprise Edge equipment meets all FCC Part 15 Class A radiated and conducted emissions requirements Enterprise Edge does not exceed the Class A limits for radiated and conducted emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of Industry Canada Telephone company registration It is usually not necessary to call the telecommunications company with information on the equipment before connecting the Enterprise Edge system to the telephone network If the telecommunications company requires this information provide the follo
429. ssary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service Repairs In the event of equipment malfunction all repairs to certified equipment will be performed by an authorized supplier Safety WARNING A The instructions in this manual are intended to be performed by Q ualified Service Personnel CE The CE mark indicates that the Enterprise Edge equipment meets the requirements of the following EU Directives e Low Voltage Directive 73 23IIC e Electromagnetic Directive 89 336 EEC Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 About this document 17 Risk of shock A Ensure the computer is unplugged from the power socketand thatany telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the computer Read and follow installation instructions carefully Only qualified persons should service the system A The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Enterprise Edge system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire Earth Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of
430. ssue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 14 About this document Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service A personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the Enterprise Edge system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground via the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections central office lines removed first Radio frequency interference Equipment generates RF energy This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual it may cause interference to radio communications It has been t
431. st end Branch West end Branch Meridian M1 DN 4221 PRI public protocol Central Office In the table that follows private network routing information is highlighted in gray Public network routing information is shown in white Heading Parameter Setting West End office Hardware EE DTM PRI Protocol SL 1 BchanSeq Ascend ClockSre Primary Trunk Line Data Line 245 Target line Received 2221 Line Access Set 2221 L245 Ring only Line pool access Line pool PRI A To Head Office Routing Service Route 001 External No number Use Pool PRI A DN type Private Destination Code 4 Normal route 001 Absorb 0 To East End Routing Service Destination Code 6 Normal route 001 Absorb 0 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 318 Appendix A N etwork Examples Heading Parameter Setting To Public Network Routing Service Route 002 External No number Use Pool PRI A DN type Public Destination Code 9 Normal route 002 Absorb 0 East End office Hardware EE DTM PRI Protocol SL 1 BchanSeq Ascend ClockSrc Primary Trunk Line Data Line 245 Target line Received 6221 Line Access Set 6221 L245 Ring only Line pool access Line pool PRI A To Head Office Routing Service To West End Routing Service To Public Network Routing Service Route External Use DN type Destination Code Normal route Absorb Destination Code Normal route Absorb Route Exte
432. starts The first service then resumes when the second service has ended Some schedules start and stop at the same times each day use COPY to copy the start and stop times from one day to the next Start and stop times don t span days When you program a schedule to start in the evening and stop in the morning it does not carry over into the next day For example if you program Night service for Friday 22 00 to 6 00 the system turns on Night service from midnight to 6 am on Friday and then again from 10 pm to midnight on Friday P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 128 Configuring Telephony Resources System speed dial The System speed dial heading allows you to specify speed dial codes 01 70 and external numbers that can be used by any telephone set on the system The following illustration shows a detailed view of the System speed dial programming map System speed dial Speed dial 01 70 External Facility Display digits Bypass restrictions Adding or changing a system speed dial You program a speed dial on your Enterprise Edge system so that anyone in your office can dial a frequently used number using a two digit code Examples of system speed dials might include telephone numbers of regional sales offices within your organization or key customers that you call frequently To change a speed dial that already exists follow the same steps as if you ar
433. stem or different control telephones for different Enterprise Edge telephones and lines If you want to have several services active at the same time simply program them on for the same schedule Ringing service At certain times or in certain situations you may want additional telephones to begin ringing for incoming lines The most common use of this feature is when a security desk telephone begins to ring for incoming lines after 5 00 p m a practice often called night service Ring groups Ring groups allows you to define groups of extended ringing sets A group can be assigned to any line for any of the schedules You can create up to 100 ring groups composed of up to 30 sets for each ring group To define a ring group enter the number of the group you want to program 001 100 Once you define a ring group enter the number of the set you want to assign to this ring group Tips You can assign any set on the Enterprise Edge system to aring group The assigned control set for each schedule is added to each ring group A set can belong to more than one ring group Schedules Indicate how Ringing service should be activated for each of the schedules Service setting Click on a schedule such as Night and select the setting for that schedule Off Auto or Manual Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control set using the Ringing service feature code Enterprise Edge Prog
434. sue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 117 Programming the PRI routing table The dialing plan must be thoroughly planned out in advance before programming the information into the Enterprise Edge system Programming the routing table takes place in Services under Routing Service Routes 1 Under Route001 External No number enter a number up to 24 digits 2 Under Use pool select a line pool The PRI pool s displayed depend on how the PRI lines are put into pools in the Trunk Line data section of programming It is possible to have only pool PRI A or only pool PRI B or only PRI C etc up to PRI F even if there are three EE DTMs configured as PRI in the system 3 Under ServiceType Public Select a different Service Type if required 4 Under Service ID None Enter the Service ID number This is shown only if the service requires an ID 5 Under DN type Public Enter Public or Private This is shown only for service type Tie Destination codes The numbers used for destination codes must not conflict with e Call Park Prefix e External Access Code e Direct Dial Numbers e Line Pool Code e Internal set numbers intercom e DISA set numbers e Auto DNs For example the system will confuse an internal number of 221 and a destination code of 22 because even if the caller dialed the complete internal number the call would be routed using the first two digits But an internal number of 221 and a destination code of 23 wou
435. sy you can choose if the caller get a busy tone or if the call is forwarded to the prime set Busy tone only works for PRI trunks Prime set This feature allows you to assign a telephone to provide backup answering for calls on the line Unanswered calls are redirected to the prime set For an Auto Answer line calls will be redirected if the received number is invalid or the target line is busy and if the If busy parameter is set To prime Enter the DN number of the prime set or select None The default prime set for each line is 221 Note Each line can be assigned only one prime set CLD set An Enterprise Edge set displays the telephone number of the calling party The Call Line Identifier CLID set prompt lets you specify which sets are capable of using the feature Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 103 Auto privacy This feature controls whether one Enterprise Edge user can select a line in use at another telephone to join an existing call The default setting is Privacy on so that nobody with an Enterprise Edge telephone can press a line appearance on their telephone to join a call in progress at another telephone Tips Users can change a line s privacy setting for an individual call using the Privacy feature Feature B 8 Trunk mode Trunk mode lets you specify one of two modes of operation for each line disconnect supervisi
436. t 01 to the oldest 96 Enter an interval number or select the most recent interval The display shows the start time of the interval Select 24 hour summary for an overall summary of the previous 24 hours The number of intervals are displayed in the summary Check the CSU alarms 1 2 3 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance CSU statistics Select a module and then select a card Select Alarm statistics and then select Active alarms The display shows all the active alarms of the types LOS loss of signal OOF out of Frame RAI Remote alarm indicator or AIS Alarm indication signal For more information on these types of transmission defects refer to Statistics collected by the Enterprise Edge system on page 275 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 277 Check carrier failure alarms Choose Maintenance CSU statistics Select a module and then select a card Select Alarm statistics Select CFA alarms The display shows LOS loss of signal OOF out of Frame RAI Remote alarm indicator or AIS Alarm indication signal For more information on these types of transmission defects refer to Statistics collected by the Enterprise Edge system on page 275 Select the type of alarms you wish to view The display shows the alarms and the periods for which alarms have been collected Check bipolar violations l 2 Choose Resources Telephon
437. t restriction or remote restriction still apply Line filter Line filter lets you assign a specific line restriction to a Class of Service password The line filter associated with the Class of Service password replaces any normally applicable line restriction The default setting None means that any normally applicable line filter still applies Remote package Remote package lets you assign a specific remote access package to a Class of Service password The remote access package associated with the Class of Service password replaces any normally applicable remote access package The default setting None means that any normally applicable remote access package still applies P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 132 Configuring Telephony Resources Call log passwords Call log passwords allows you to clear an individual s Call log password This is useful if a user has forgotten the password and you need to reset it Select the set DN and leave the field blank or enter a new password The user can then enter a new password from their telephone To create or reset a call log password 1 Choose Resources Telephony Passwords Call log passwords 2 Click a telephone set DN 221 528 3 Type a 4 digit password in the Password box and press Enter Registration password To ensure unauthorized portables are not registered to your system a separate level of password access is provided You can
438. t Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Click an If busy value Busy Tone Overflow or Queue and press Enter Programming the queue time out This setting allows you to program the number of seconds a call remains in the Hunt Group queue before it is routed to the overflow position 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Click a Queue timeout value 15 30 45 60 120 or 180 and press Enter Programming the overflow set This setting allows you to program the overflow set to which the Hunt Group calls are to be routed Unless the overflow position is a Hunt Group set the call ceases to be a Hunt Group call If the overflow set is a Hunt Group set the call is treated as a new call and goes to the bottom of the queue The overflow set can be a set DN number associated with a voice mailbox 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 165 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Type the DN number in the Overflow box and press Enter Setting the name This setting allows you to program the Hunt Group name such as SERVICE or SALES The name can be up to seven characters in length 1 Choose Resources Telephony Hunt Groups 2 Click a hunt group Hunt group 1 30 3 Type anew name and press Enter P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide
439. t alarm banner 284 identification 61 introduction 57 name 58 performance graphs and tables 283 resource services 59 time 61 connecting to Enterprise Edge methods for remote dial in 52 connections stand alone 344 Contrast Adjustment 284 P0908508 Issue 02 control telephone programming 126 coordinated dialing plan 310 copy telephone settings 80 COS Class of Service auto DN 145 calls answered with DISA 145 password 130 auto answer system 306 line restriction 131 remote access package 131 user filter 131 with DISA 310 CSU Channel Service Unit alarms 276 description 183 line build 182 performance statistics 276 stats 274 customizing call display services 93 D date system 61 Daylight Savings Time automatic 138 defaults dialing restriction 109 directory number lengths 148 remote access packages 147 restrictions 109 set restrictions 91 delay camp timeout 137 Delayed Ring Transfer 137 dial signal type 105 held line reminder 137 park timeout 137 transfer callback 137 delayed ring transfer 137 to prime telephone 137 139 deprovisioning a line 271 destination code description 115 117 device disabling 256 enabling 257 DHCP configuring automatically 38 guidelines 38 introduction 37 DHCP service settings LAN 187 overview 186 P0908508 Issue 02 Index 393 diagnostics 241 T1 signal 274 test results system test log 257 dial mode 102 tone absent on external lines 286 dialed number identification 105
440. t let all of your workstations know that they will have their new IP addresses assigned by Enterprise Edge To do this you may need to change the configuration of each workstation individually If you already have a DHCP server you must let it know that the Enterprise Edge server is their gateway and DNS proxy for the workstations Your Enterprise Edge server can function as a DHCP server You can use this feature if you do not want to administer static IP addresses for every workstation on your network You can configure Enterprise Edge to assign IP addresses dynamically Automatic Configuration using a DHCP server To configure the DHCP server you must define a particular range or scope for each LAN interface in Enterprise Edge and allocate a block of IP addresses for that scope The Enterprise Edge Auto Configure system automatically creates a scope using parameters inherited from the LAN interface Guidelines for Using DHCP Since many default DHCP parameters are inherited from LAN interface parameters configure LAN interfaces before configuring DHCP If you are modifying the DHCP configuration on Enterprise Edge follow the same guidelines of your organization In particular you can perform one or more of the tasks listed below to ensure proper operation of the networked system 1 Ifa change in the DHCP configuration resulted in the change of Router and Subnet mask options in a scope users must do one of the follow
441. t ranges are a subset of the remote router s port ranges e You must reserve two ports for each voice call you expect to carry over the WAN You need two ports for each video session if it is given premium treatment e You can reserve multiple discontinuous ranges Enterprise Edge requires that each range meet the following conditions Each range must start with an even number There must be an even number of ports in a range See Appendix C Setting Up Remote Routers on page 349 for additional information on setting UDP port ranges for remote routers P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 48 Using Enterprise Edge Services Relationship between the QoS Module and the VoIP QoS Monitor The VoIP gateway in Enterprise Edge includes a Quality of Service Monitor QMON that periodically monitors the delay and jitter of IP networks between two peer gateways by using a proprietary protocol These monitoring packets are delivered at UDP port 5000 The main objective of the QMON is to allow new VolP calls to fall back to the PSTN if the IP network is detected as bad The QoS module discussed here complements QMON While QMON passively monitors the IP network the QoS module actively improves the IP network by giving VoIP packets higher priority to travel so that the chance for QMON to detect bad is reduced Note Fora VolP call if a packet passes QMON but fails the QoS admission control it is
442. tates are Up the resource is operational Down the resource is not operational Consult your System Administrator for the appropriate configuration information before changing the settings To modify the configuration of the LAN settings 1 Inthe IP Address box type the IP address An example of how to format the information is shown at the right of the box 2 Inthe SubNet Mask box type the subnet mask 3 From the Connection Type list select the connection type 4 Press the Tab key to save the settings P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 66 Configuring networking resources To view LAN performance 1 While at the LAN1 summary screen on the menu click Performance and then click LAN Graph The LAN Graph Statistic Chart appears 2 On the menu click Performance and then click LAN Table The LAN Table Statistic Table appears For information on using performance tables and graphs refer to Graphs and tables on page 243 3 Click the LAN navigation key to close the LAN portion of the navigation tree Configuring WAN settings You configure WAN resource settings from Unified Manager WAN Interfaces have names such as WAN1 and WAN2 If your Enterprise Edge server has a permanent WAN card WAN1 and WAN are interfaces from this card These interfaces can run Frame Relay or PPP on a permanent WAN Link operating at T1 speed Click on these interfaces to see their description
443. tem A at telephone 234 can press an Intercom button and dial 7434 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming Operations Guide 316 Appendix A N etwork Examples This means that telephone 234 has dialed the line pool access code of the trunk to system C and will receive the dial tone of system C The digits 434 then map to the Received number 434 and ring telephone 434 with an appearance of the associated target line Tips Network calls that use routes are subject to any restriction filters that are in effect If the telephone used to make a network call has an appearance of a line used by the route the call will move from the intercom button to the line button The telephone used to make a network call must have access to the line pool used by the route Network calls are external calls even though they are dialed as if they were internal calls Only the features and capabilities available to external calls can be used When programming a button to dial a Network number automatically autodial network calls must be treated as external numbers even though they resemble internal set numbers Routes generally define the path between your Enterprise Edge switch and another switch in your network not other individual telephones on that switch For dialing plan information with PRI see Using a dialing plan to route outgoing PRI calls on page 123 PRI Networking with Meridian 1 Note Private networking require
444. terprise Edge always calls Enterprise Edge does not answer an incoming call from a router e Support for callback configuration is not provided Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 4 Refer to the following information when setting up your Enterprise Edge system e Enterprise Edge required parameters on page 53 e Setting up an Enterprise Edge IP Address on page 54 e Setting up web based administration on page 55 e Logging on to Enterprise Edge on page 56 e Logging off Enterprise Edge on page 57 e Rebooting the Enterprise Edge server on page 57 e Configuring system settings on page 57 Enterprise Edge required parameters The Enterprise Edge quick start module provides quick access to the parameters necessary for the Enterprise Edge server to become active online However you must enter a minimum set of parameters within the quick start module For more information see the Enterprise Edge Installation Guide Obtain the required parameter values from an Internet Service Provider ISP or corporate network administrator Note Nortel Networks recommends that after you powered on the Enterprise Edge server and connect with either an RS 232 or an Ethernet port configure all the required parameters at the same time After you configure the parameters reboot the Enterprise Edge server from either the console or the graphical user interface GUI P09085
445. tervals Erase the log after dealing with all the items Use the System test log selection under Maintenance to perform one of the following procedures e Display information on the items in the System test log on page 257 e Erase the log on page 258 Display information on the items in the System test log You can display information on any item in the System administration log using the following procedure 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance System test log 2 Ifthe Unified Manager indicates that there are hidden subheadings double click on the heading to display all the items in the log If there are no log entries the Unified Manager will indicate that there are no hidden subheadings P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 258 Maintenance 3 Select any item Information about the log item is displayed The description attribute indicates if the item is an event or alarm and includes the associated code The time the event or alarm occurred is displayed For more information on the event or alarm refer to Alarm codes on page 261 or Event messages on page 261 Note Alarms are also displayed in the Windows NT event log 4 Write down the item on the System administration log record and repeat these steps until you have recorded all the items Erase the log You can erase the displayed log items from the System Test log using the following procedure Note You cannot remove s
446. tes a file called ConsoleService log on the file system Log CP Events Log Device Events Log Response Events Log Session Events Log System Events Lets users enable events including various types of events in the log file generated Alarm Service To configure Alarm Service settings 1 On the navigation tree select Services Alarm Service Clicking the Alarm Service navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Alarm Service The Alarm Service Summary screen appears The Alarm Service Summary screen attributes are Attribute Description Descriptions Shows a description of the alarm service Version Shows the version of the alarm service Status Lets users enable or disable the alarm service 2 From the Status list box enable or disable alarm service 3 Press the Tab key to save the settings Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 227 Voice Mail To configure Voice Mail services settings 1 On the navigation tree select Services Voice Mail Clicking the Voice Mail navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Voice Mail The Voice Mail Summary screen appears The Voice Mail Summary screen attributes are read only The attributes are Attribute Description Name Shows the name of the component Status Shows the status of the voice mail service Version S
447. tgoing call but only after the Business Name has been programmed P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 342 Appendix B ISDN Overview The available features include e Receiving Connected Name e Receiving Calling Name e Receiving Redirected Name e Sending Connected Name e Sending Calling Party Name Network Name Display on page 149 Consult your customer service representative to determine which of these features is compatible with your service provider Name and number blocking When activated Feature _ 8 allows you to block the outgoing name and or number on a per call basis Name and number blocking can be used with an Enterprise Edge set Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider Call by Call service selection for PRI PRI lines can be dynamically allocated to different service types with the Call by Call feature PRI lines do not have to be pre allocated to a given service type Outgoing calls are routed through a dedicated PRI Pool and the calls can be routed based on various schedules The service types that may be available depending on your service provider are described below Public Public service calls connect your Enterprise Edge set with a Central Office CO DID and DOD calls are supported Private Private service calls connect your Enterprise Edge set with a Virtual Private Network DI
448. than what is required to carry the phone calls is available for other H 323 sessions like NetMeeting sessions from PCs connected to Enterprise Edge box or other data traffic classified as premium through QoS Filters This additional bandwidth reserved for premium traffic is always available for other data traffic if there is no additional H 323 traffic or other premium traffic A network administrator can reserve more WAN bandwidth than that required to carry phone calls and then prevent PC users from using it for NetMeeting sessions by setting filters that drop H 323 traffic at LAN interfaces Video Class Lets users specify the type of priority treatment for video traffic in H223 sessions The following choices are available Premium Video traffic is treated as premium traffic that consumes portions of bandwidth reserved for premium traffic Premium Bandwidth field Best Effort Video traffic is treated as best effort IP traffic that are prioritized among other best effort traffic passing through the WAN link Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 207 Attribute Description Premium DS Lets users specify the TOS field in the IP header for premium packets Code This value is used in conjunction with the frame relay driver in Enterprise Edge s WAN link if one is being used as well as rest of the network If the frame relay is used on WAN link this co
449. the digits as a remote feature request The call is either routed to the specified target line or the remote feature is activated By default T1 E amp M trunks are set to answer with DISA For auto answer T1 E amp M trunks connected to a private network change the default so that the trunks are not answered with DISA If an auto answer T1 E amp M trunk is configured to answer with DISA the system tries to interpret any received digits as a COS password The DISA DN and the Auto DN allow auto answer private network and DID calls in the same way that calls on auto answer loop start and auto answer T1 E amp M trunks can be answered with or without DISA These DNs are described in System programming under Access codes Remote access on T1 Direct Inward Dial DID trunks Remote system access on T1 DID trunks is similar to that of T1 E amp M trunks connected to a private network The main differences are e aremote caller is on the public network dialing standard local or long distance telephone numbers e the digits received are delivered by the central office e DISA cannot be administered to a T1 DID trunk As with a private network the dialed digits may be programmed to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or the Auto DN Remote access on PRI trunks Remote system access on PRI trunks is similar to that of T1 E amp M trunks connected to a private network The main differences are e aremote caller is on the publi
450. the operators of the system at the far end that the dialed number is not getting through Problems with Companion sets When there is a problem with a Companion set 1 Make sure the portable is compatible with Enterprise Edge Voice Messaging Companion Wireless software 2 Verify that the portable is ON and that the battery is not low 3 Establish a radio connection to get a dial tone 4 If there is no dial tone present e verify that a dial tone is available from Enterprise Edge e the portable may not be registered If this is the case register the portable again e check that the portable is using the correct registration slot e verify that the portable has been assigned the correct internal number by calling it from another telephone Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix A Network Examples Enterprise Edge in a network In addition to public network connections Enterprise Edge can be integrated into an existing private network of M1s to form a corporate telecommunications network Tips The ability to perform private networking requires software keys for Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway and Enterprise Edge PRI The big picture Enterprise Edge uses enhanced trunking to join other Nortel or customer equipment in a private network Authorized users can also access tie lines central office lines and Enterprise Edge features from outside the system Private at aa P
451. the outgoing name and number on a per call basis When this feature is used the call is flagged to the CO so that the name and number will not be presented to the person being called See Outgoing Name and Number Blocking on page 151 for more information Enter the telephone number for ONN blocking in the Tone or Pulse fields Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Software keys Configuring Telephony Resources 173 The Software keys heading allows you to enter software keys to access software packages A software key is required to order certain features or functionality groups for Enterprise Edge The standard configuration of the system does not require a software keycode Software keys System ID System Identification Number The unique System Identification Number or System ID can be obtained by looking in the Unified Manager under Software keys System ID Entering the software keys 1 Keys are entered in the Unified Manager by accessing Software keys and clicking the Add button 2 Enter the 8 digit number for Key 1 Key 2 and Key 3 3 Click OK You will receive a prompt Entry successful Note Ifthe entry is unsuccessful the prompt reads Invalid password If this happens reenter the codes or call the distributor for assistance The following table indicates the various Enterprise Edge packages or products that require a keycode Package Product Features amp
452. the passwords 11 19 9 Failed to Delete Required at least one user with read write privilege Reason You are attempting to delete the last existing user with READ WRITE privilege This operation is not permitted as it would not allow you to make any other changes to user configuration or other system configuration Add another user with read write privilege before deleting the concerned user id P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 248 11 12 10 Failed to Update Required at least one user with read write privilege Reason You are attempting to modify the last existing user with READ WRITE privilege At this time no modifications are permitted to the last READ WRITE user Add another user with READ WRITE privilege before modifying the concerned user id 14 4 21 Invalid Configuration Parameter Error in setting interface parameter Reason You re setting a static route input filter or output filter under an interface and you didn t enter a correct characteristic key field in the dialog box Values for these fields should strictly follow the convention provided in the labels for them It should be something like SRxx for static routes IFxx for input filters and OFxx for output filters Make sure your key names are as per convention and provide unique values for the number component 14 17 40 14 17 41 Command failed
453. the published telephone numbers for your network are correct Dialed number gets busy tone Possible problem The target line that the incoming digits map onto is busy and there is no prime telephone for the incoming trunk Solution For maximum call coverage make sure that you configure a prime telephone for every incoming trunk Dialed number does not get through Possible problem The digits sent by a switch at a central office or in the private network did not match any Received number or the Auto DN There is also no prime telephone assigned for the incoming trunk In this case the caller may hear overflow tone from the Enterprise Edge system or a recorded message from the originating switch Solution 1 Configure a prime telephone for every incoming trunk 2 Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits for the Received number length defined in your system 3 Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending 4 Check that you have defined a Received number for every target line in your system 5 Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your network are correct Possible problem The Enterprise Edge system did not receive some or all of the incoming digits Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 299 Solution 1 Check that the system hardware is receiving signals properly 2 Verify that the sw
454. the same way as physical lines TCP IP See Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TE See Terminal equipment TEI See Terminal Endpoint Identifier Telco features A programming section that lets you specify the external telephone numbers that are dialed by the Message feature to retrieve voice messages or to set up CLASS CMS services for lines and telephone Telco features are accessed by an installer or a system coordinator plus Telephony Application Program Interface TAPI The Telephony Application Program Interface TAPT is a standard program interface that lets you and your computer communicate over telephones or video phones to people or phone connected resources elsewhere in the world Telnet Telnet is a service that provides terminal emulation capabilities for logging into the Enterprise Edge unit from a remote location Terminal Endpoint Identifier A digit used to identify devices which are using an ISDN connection for D channel packet service Terminal equipment TE A generic term for devices that connect to an ISDN network Examples of ISDN TE are ISDN telephones computers equipped with ISDN cards and video terminals Terminals and Sets A programming section that lets you assign and change settings that apply to the telephones and other devices connected to the Enterprise Edge Server Terminals and Sets programming is performed by an installer or a system coordinator Enterprise
455. the substituted code In the receiving direction the B8ZS code is detected and replaced with eight consecutive binary zeros AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary zero is transmitted as zero volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse Always use the line coding method that the equipment at the receiving end expects Line Polarity Lets users set normal or inverted line polarity in the T1 line The option inverted is meaningful only if LineCoding is AMI Pulse Density Lets users control whether the DSU CSU maintains the minimum level of 1s on the line for AMI encoding Channel List Lets users create a list of channels used in the T1 line You can specify multiple channel numbers in a comma separated list Each item in the list can contain a range of channel numbers with the limits of the range separated by a hyphen For example a valid entry for channel list is 3 5 6 10 15 18 20 23 Specify the use of all the channels by using the string All To modify the configuration of the WAN1 or WAN2 Line Parameters screen l 2 From the Channel Rate list box select the channel rate From the Clock Source list box select the clock source From the Frame Type list box select the frame type From the Line Coding list box select the line coding From the Line Polarity list box select the line polarity From the Pulse Density list box sel
456. time The Hospitality heading allows you to enter the time when occupied rooms change state from Service done to Service required The Service change time is an integral part of the Room condition RC feature To change the service time 1 Choose Resources Telephony General Settings Hospitality 2 Type the time in the Service change time box according to the following format press Enter hh isa number from 00 to 23 mm is a number from 00 to 59 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 157 Set room settings The Set room settings heading allows you to assign sets to a room and enable access control to HS administrative features To assign a set to a room 1 Choose Resources Telephony General Settings Hospitality Set room settings 2 Click a DN number DN 221 344 3 Type a room number in the Room number box and press Enter To enable or disable password control 1 Choose Resources Telephony General Settings Hospitality Set room settings 2 Click a DN number DN 221 344 3 Click a Requires desk password value Y or N and press Enter The default setting is Y This means that administrative features cannot be accessed from a room set without first entering a valid password The Hospitality passwords heading is used to define a Desk password For more information see Desk password on page 132 Call permissions The Call permissions heading allows
457. tion Description Shows the description of TSP Version Shows the TSP version Station Licenses Shows the number of sets that are licensed to be controlled through the TSP This is a numeric value or the text string Unlimited or Maximum The station licenses can not be modified on this page but are changed by adding a keycode through the Software Keys page The string Unlimited is presented in English French or Spanish The default value is 2 Station Lets users add an internal phone number on the Enterprise Edge system Users can add as many entries as there are licenses have been granted The default is no entries in the Station List List elements are added and deleted through the Configuration menu items To add a station 1 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Station to List The Station List dialog box appears 2 In the station box type the station information 3 Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete a station 1 Select the station from the Station List that you want to delete 2 On the menu click Configuration and then click Remove Station from List A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion 3 Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager Console Service To configure Console Service attributes 1 On the navigation tree select Services Console Service The Console Service Summary and Licensing screens a
458. tion resources The System Settings are Attribute Description Name Lets users specify the name for the Enterprise Edge system The Enterprise Edge system must have a unique name in the connected network LAN or WAN so that no two Enterprise Edge servers that can reach each other through IP network do not have the same name The name must be less than 15 characters in length cannot contain special characters like etc Date Lets users set the current date for the Enterprise Edge system Because the value for the date changes save the changes as soon as the new date is entered Time Lets users set the current time for the Enterprise Edge system Because the value for the time keeps changing save the changes as soon as the new time is entered Use the 24 hour format to set the date The seconds field is optional 2 On the navigation tree click Identification to view the available system settings to configure The System Identification dialog box appears P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 62 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system Note Clicking the Identification navigation key causes the key to disappear You must click Identification to display the configurable system settings ike PTT P B Erinin Baja E aia T E iin ban TO r OS 3 Inthe System Name box type the system name 4 Inthe Date box type the current date 5 Inthe Time box type the current time
459. to guide the manufacturers of ISDN equipment and are based on the OSI Open Systems Interconnection model The layers include both physical connections such as wiring and logical connections which are programmed in computer software When equipment is designed to the ISDN standard for one of the layers it works with equipment for the layers above and below it There are three layers at work in ISDN for Enterprise Edge To support ISDN service all three layers must be working properly e Layer 1 A physical connection that supports fundamental signaling passed between the ISDN network your service provider and the Enterprise Edge system e Layer 2 A logical connection between the central office or the far end and the Enterprise Edge system Without Layer 2 call processing is not possible and there is no dial tone e Layer 3 Also a logical connection between the ISDN network your service provider and the Enterprise Edge system This controls which central office services are available to the connection For example a network connection can be programmed to carry data calls Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Appendix B ISDN Overview 341 The system of layers is important when you are installing maintaining and troubleshooting an ISDN system ISDN Bearer capability Bearer capability describes the transmission standard used by the PRI line so that it can work within a larger ISDN hardware and s
460. tomatically becomes available for registration Check that an extension number is available before registering a portable telephone to it If the extension number shows a status of Available it is ready for registering a Companion portable telephone P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 168 Configuring Telephony Resources If the extension number shows a status of Registered a Companion portable telephone is already registered to that extension number In this case you can either pick a different extension number or deregister the current portable telephone You must perform deregistration both at the portable and from the Unified Manager To view registered and available DNs 1 Select Telephony Companion Registration Portable DNs 2 Click a portable DN for example DN 471 Deregistering a portable Deregister an extension number from the Unified Manager when e you must replace the portable due to loss or breakage e you want to assign the handset to someone with a different telephone number than the previous user To deregister a portable 1 Select Telephony Companion Registration Portable DNs to deregister a DN 2 Click a portable DN for example DN 471 3 Click the Configuration menu and select Deregister Tip This procedure does not clear the registration data in the portable You must also deregister from the portable telephone on the air deregistration Radio d
461. ts may be added to coordinate character transfer Autobumping A feature that determines what the system does with new Call Log items when your Call Log is full When Autobumping is on a new log entry causes the oldest entry to be deleted If Autobumping is off your system does not log calls when your log is full Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 353 autodial button A memory button that if programmed provides one touch dialing of external or internal numbers autolog options A feature that allows you to select the type of calls that are stored in your Call Log You can choose to log calls that were not answered by anyone within the system to log calls that were unanswered at this telephone but answered elsewhere in the system to log all calls answered and not answered at this telephone or to not have calls automatically logged Automatic Dial A feature that allows you to dial without having to pick up the receiver or select a line You must have a prime line to use Automatic Dial Automatic Dial is assigned under Dialing options in Terminals and Sets programming Automatic Handsfree A feature which automatically activates Handsfree operation when you make or answer a call Automatic Handsfree is assigned under Handsfree in Terminals and Sets programming Automatic Hold A feature that automatically places an active call on hold when you select another line Automatic Hol
462. ttons display handset or other hardware problems on page 284 e Digital telephone display unreadable on page 284 e Telephone dead on page 285 Telephone has faulty buttons display handset or other hardware problems Run a Station Set Test feature _ 6J 0J 6J Digital telephone display unreadable If the trouble is with an M7310 or an M7324 telephone 1 Press ZJ 2 Press UP or DOWN to adjust the display contrast to the desired level 3 Press OK If the trouble is with an M7100 telephone 1 Press feature 7 2 Press a number on the dial pad to adjust the display contrast to the desired level 3 Press Hod _ If the display is still unreadable Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system 285 2 3 In the Unified Manager select Resources Telephony and then Maintenance to disable the problem telephone Replace the problem telephone with a known working one Enable the working telephone Telephone dead l 2 Run a Station Set Test Feature _ 6J 0 6J Check for dial tone Check the display If the problem persists replace the telephone with a known working telephone of the same type so that the programming is retained Check the internal wiring at both the modular jack and the distribution cross connect A TCM port should have between 15 and 26 V DC across the Tip and Ring when the telepho
463. tures 91 106 trunk answer 112 113 voice message center 107 system speed dial 128 telco features 172 Terminals amp Sets 80 80 94 Programming PRI routing table 117 protocols routing information 36 provisioning T1 lines 271 proxy DNS 39 web caching 40 public line 101 public network 303 331 332 Q QoS best effort queue counters 252 QoS best effort traffic counters 251 QoS dropped packets counter 251 QoS filters adding 210 deleting 210 modifying 209 QoS graph counters 252 QoS module relationship with the VoIP QoS monitor overview 48 restrictions and defaults 48 QoS monitor settings mean opinion score 216 overview 215 QoS port ranges adding 211 deleting 212 modifying 211 QoS service settings 206 filter 209 performance graphs and tables 209 P0908508 Issue 02 port ranges 211 QoS session counters 251 Quality of Service QoS overview 42 R radio frequency interference 14 17 reallocating log space 142 rebooting Enterprise Edge 57 received number 102 received number length 148 receiver volume 137 re evaluation see Companion programming registration information for telephone company 15 on a portable 170 registration password 132 Release Reasons 154 remote access COS password 130 defaults 147 from public network 306 loop start trunks 306 programming 131 restricting 146 T1 E amp M trunks 306 filters 131 system access 306 307 users troubleshooting 296 301 remote access dialing restri
464. tus on page 254 In the Unified Manager select Resources Telephony and then Maintenance to disable the appropriate ports using the heading Module port status For more information refer to Disable a module on page 254 Enable the appropriate ports using the heading Port DN status If you still cannot make external calls power down then power up the system This should be done after business hours to avoid losing calls To check the line contact the telephone company Notify service provider of T1 signaling disruption Notify your T1 service provider before disconnecting your T1 lines removing power to your system or performing any other action that disrupts your T1 signaling Failure to notify your T1 service provider may result in a loss of T1 service Dial tone absent on external lines Check for dial tone using a test telephone at the connections for the external line on the distribution block Make sure that a trunk module for the line is properly installed in the server or expansion cabinet Make sure that the hub is properly connected to the MSC card In the Unified Manager select Resources Telephony and then Maintenance to ensure that the line is not disabled See Display the module status on page 254 Hung lines ata telephone Line indicators that have been solid for a long time are the only visible indication that lines are hung Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508
465. u may want to use only 12 B channels instead of 23 B channels If this is your situation you should disable all the B channels that you do not need It is recommended that the number of lines that are deprovisioned on an EE DTM configured as PRI be the same as the number of b channels that are disabled For example If the EE DTM is on bus 7 when b channels 13 23 are disabled you should deprovision lines 73 to 83 Start with the display showing Maintenance l 2 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Link status Select the module and card Select B channels A list of the B channels on this card is displayed Select a channel The display shows the status of the PRI channel In the Configuration menu select Enable or Disable to change the setting for the channel Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Maintenance 279 Metrics The following usage metrics are available with the Enterprise Edge Software e Hunt group metrics on page 279 e Call by Call on page 279 Hunt group metrics This feature gives you statistical information on hunt group calls 1 Choose Resources Telephony Metrics Hunt Group Metrics The hunt groups are displayed up to a maximum of 30 2 Select the group number The display shows all the statistical information for the selected hunt group To clear the hunt group metrics Clear group under the Configuration menu Call by Call This feature gives y
466. u to add or remove individual T1 lines and PRI lines in and out of service CSU statistics displays T1 performance information supplied by the Channel Service Unit Tests allow you to test incoming T1 signals to evaluate transmission quality the connection between the system and telephones and the connection between an EE DTM and the network DN to port conversion allows you to determine the port that is associated with a particular DN Link Status displays the status of the PRI channel Debug used to debug your system For information on alarm codes and event messages refer to Alarm codes on page 261 and Event messages on page 261 System version System version allows you to check the version of a system You can use the system version heading to note the version number of the System Processor SP software which resides on the Media Services Card MSC 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance The version number of the SP is displayed in the system version box 2 Write the SP version number on the appropriate Maintenance record The SP version number can be used to determine the software release and the support feature and to trace any software faults P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 254 Maintenance Module port status Module port status allows you to view the status of all system modules as well as identify any device or lines connected to the s
467. ublic Network aog nes Network PRI lines Enterprise Edge Callers using Enterprise Edge can call directly to a specific telephone select an outgoing line to access a private network select an outgoing line to access features that are available on the private network select an outgoing central office line to access the public network use all of the Enterprise Edge features Callers in the public network can call directly to one or more Enterprise Edge telephones call into Enterprise Edge and select an outgoing tie line to access a private network call into Enterprise Edge and select an outgoing central office line to access the public network call into Enterprise Edge and use remote features P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 304 Appendix A Network Examples Callers in the private network can e call directly to one or more Enterprise Edge telephones e call into Enterprise Edge and select an outgoing tie line to access other nodes in a private network e call into Enterprise Edge and select an outgoing central office line to access the public network e call into Enterprise Edge and use remote features Networking Enterprise Edge with Meridian M1 over PRI Benefits Some of the benefits of networking Enterprise Edge and Meridian M1 over PRI include e common dialing plan e centralized PSTN trunking Enterprise Edge users can share the M1 s PSTN trunks with M1 users
468. upervisor In the Password box type your password The default password is super Click the Configure button The Enterprise Edge Unified Manager software starts Consult your system administrator for appropriate information Depending on your system Unified Manager software can take up to several minutes to initialize Enterprise Edge login screen MEPRTEL HETHORMS ENTERPRISES eg laser a j Pasreank F ean Daigas Upland Deviled ETA Harjai H pirakas Fees Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide P0908508 Issue 02 Setting up your Enterprise Edge system 57 The login screen includes these boxes Field Definition Login The user name The name can contain up to 50 case sensitive alphanumeric characters The default log in name is supervisor Password The Enterprise Edge password The password name can contain up to 12 case sensitive alphanumeric characters The default password is super Configure lets you access Enterprise Edge configuration Upload lets you upload and apply Enterprise Edge settings and system settings Download _ lets you download and save Enterprise Edge settings and system settings Logging off Enterprise Edge To log off Enterprise Edge 1 Click the Enterprise Edge icon in the navigation tree 2 On the menu click Logoff and then click Logoff A message appears that asks you to confirm your request to log off 3 Click the Yes button to l
469. ure _ 8 4 Values Y or N Default Y Call Forward The Call Forward heading allows you to define how calls are handled when they are unanswered or the line is busy To program call forward 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 3 Choose Capabilities Call Forward 4 Configure Call Forward according to the table Attribute Description Fwd no answer to Redirect all incoming calls when this telephone does not answer Values up to 24 digits Default blank Fwd no answer delay Defines the number of rings before an unanswered call is forwarded Values 2 3 4 6 10 Default 4 Fwd on busy to Redirects all incoming calls when this telephone is busy with another call Values up to 24 digits Default blank Notes 1 Appears after you have typed in a call forward no answer number and press Enter Hotline The Hotline heading allows you to define a telephone number that will be dialed automatically when a user lifts the receiver or presses the Handsfree Mute button To define an internal number as a hotline 1 Choose Resources Telephony Terminals amp Sets P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 88 Configuring Telephony Resources 2 Click the telephone set DN 221 528 3 Choose Capabilities Hotline 4 Click Internal and press Enter 5 In the Internal box type th
470. us types of SNMP traps To access the Alarm Manager select Management Alarm Manager from the navigation tree The Alarm Database and SNMP Trap screens appear The following table describes the Alarm Database and SNMP Trap attributes Set these attributes according to the information that the table provides Attribute Description MaxNumRec Shows the maximum number of records that the alarm database stores This attribute is READ ONLY at this time DiscardTime Shows the discard time in seconds for repeat alarms If the same alarm happens in this interval it is discarded This attribute is READ ONLY at this time KeptTime Shows the number of days that the alarm database keeps alarm records ResyncTime Shows the resynchronization time in seconds Alarm service re synchronizes with the event log at this interval A value of 0 disables resynchronization TrapsEnabled Lets users enable or disable sending SNMP traps when a new event arrives in the event log EventInfo Lets users enable or disable sending SNMP traps when an Information event Enabled atrives in the event log EventWarning Lets users enable or disable sending SNMP traps when a Warning event Enabled atrives in the event log EventError Lets users enable or disable sending SNMP traps when an Error event arrives Enabled in the event log ScrExclusion Lets users specify a comma separated list of event sources whose
471. ution before enabling next restart this option as it can take up to 30 minutes to complete General Information To view the General Information attributes for the Attendant Console 1 From the navigation tree select Services Console Service General Information The General Information screen appears This screen is read only 2 View the general information which the following table describes Attribute Description Access Version Lists the access version of the Attendant Console Attendant Lists the attendant console server version Console Server Version Switch Hardware Lists the version of the switch hardware Version Switch Software Lists the version of the switch software Version Attendant Lists the version of the attendant console server manager Console Server Manager P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 226 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services Diagnostic Logging To configure the Diagnostic Logging attributes 1 From the navigation tree select Services Console Service Diagnostic Logging The Diagnostic Logging screen appears 2 Configure the Diagnostic Logging attributes according to the following table Attribute Description Log Detail Level Lets users specify the debug level Any value between 0 and 20 is acceptable The typical setting is 5 Log To file Lets users enable logging to the file If enabled it crea
472. utomatically based on the numbers a caller dials For Enterprise Edge Servers linked in a network routing can create a transparent or coordinated dialing plan It can also be used to direct calls to the least expensive lines according to a Services schedule sometimes called least cost routing Run Stop A feature that creates a break point in a programmed external dialing sequence When you press a programmed key the system dials the number up to the run stop When you press it again the system dials the digits following the run stop Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Glossary 383 S SAPS See station auxiliary power supply Saved Number Redial A feature that allows you to save the number of the external call you are on providing you dialed the call so that you can call it again later Schedules Any of six different sets of services that can be applied to your system See Services Selective line redirection See Line Redirection Serial port A port that sends and receives data one bit at a time This port can be used to connect the Enterprise Edge Server to a printer external modem or mouse Serial port connector has nine pins and are designated by software with the letters COM and a single digit such as COM1 Service modes See Services Services A programming section that lets you assign which telephones ring which restrictions apply and which call routing is use
473. uxiliary speaker were being used at the time Solution If repeated attempts to use the remote feature get busy tone there may be a malfunction in a resource that the feature uses Check that the remote feature hardware is functioning normally Line pool access code gets overflow tone Possible problem If the published line pool access code is valid the remote caller does not have access to that line pool Solution Change the remote package for the incoming trunk so that it permits access to that line pool OR Give the remote caller a line pool access code that is permitted within the Class of Service on the incoming trunk Possible problem If the published line pool access code is invalid the system has attempted without success to match the invalid code to an Enterprise Edge target line internal number and there is no prime telephone for the auto answer trunk Solution 1 Make sure that the published line pool access codes are correct 2 Check that the line pool access codes have been entered correctly under Access codes in System programming Possible problem The caller may be dialing from the network on a rotary dial telephone or on a push button telephone that uses pulse signaling Solution Inform remote callers that they must dial from a push button telephone that uses DTMF tone signaling Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge s
474. vides you with some background information about ISDN and also includes information about e Analog vs ISDN e Type of ISDN service e ISDN layers e ISDN Bearer capability e Services and features for ISDN PRI e ISDN hardware e ISDN standards compatibility Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN technology provides a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving voice data images text and other information through the telecom network ISDN uses existing analog telephone wires and divides it into separate digital channels which dramatically increases the bandwidth ISDN uses a single transport to carry multiple information types What once required separate networks for voice data images or video conferencing is now combined onto one common high speed transport Nortel endeavours to test all variations of ISDN PRI on Enterprise Edge however due to the number of variations this is not always possible Analog versus ISDN ISDN offers significantly higher bandwidth and speed than analog transmission because of its end to end digital connectivity on all transmission circuits Being digital allows ISDN lines to provide better quality signaling than analog POTS lines and ISDN out of band data channel signaling offers faster call set up and tear down While an analog line carries only a single transmission at a time an ISDN line can carry one or more voice data fax and video transmissions simultaneously
475. w the Access Permission settings From the Access Permission the list box select the Access Permission Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To modify a community 1 2 3 4 Click a community in the Community table On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Community The Community List dialog box appears Click any box that requires modification and type the necessary changes Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager To delete a community 1 2 3 Click on a community in the Community table On the menu click Configuration and then click Delete Community A message appears that asks you to confirm the deletion Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion and return to Unified Manager To add a manager to the Manager List 1 On the menu click Configuration and then click Add Manager The Manager List dialog box appears In the Manager List box type the manager list In the Manager IP Address box type the manager IP address Click the Save button to return to Unified Manager Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 205 To modify the manager list l 2 3 4 In the Manager List table click a manager On the menu click Configuration and then click Modify Manager The Manager List dialog box appears Click any box that requires modification and type the necessary changes
476. ways a permanent link and it is a dedicated network adapter The primary link runs either Frame Relay or the PPP protocol at the link layer The Enterprise Edge primary WAN connection is through a two port card These two ports can be independently configured to run Frame Relay or PPP The card includes one serial sync port and one T1 port The backup WAN link is always configured as dial on demand network adapter by the router The backup Wan link runs PPP only Enterprise Edge provides backup WAN connection through a V 90 modem The primary and backup link management is performed from Enterprise Edge There is a Net Link Manager running in Enterprise Edge that monitors the primary link status and it starts the backup link when a break in the primary link is detected Similarly the backup link is automatically terminated when the primary link becomes active P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 50 Using Enterprise Edge Services Note Net Link Manager can back up only one link even though there are two primary links Net Link Manager backs up the link whose next hop address is given to it e Net Link Manager manages the default route in Enterprise Edge If a link breaks Net Link Manager removes all the default routes on the broken link and adds the default route to the new link This happens during switch over from primary to secondary links and vice versa Permanent WAN Connections This section includes
477. when you cannot get through to someone on your system because their telephone is busy or there is no answer Ring Again instructs the system to inform you when they hang up or next use their telephone ring group A setting under Services that lets you assign a number of different telephones to ring during one of the schedules Up to 20 ring groups can be programmed by an installer or a system coordinator plus ring type A feature that allows you to select one of four distinctive rings for your telephone ring volume A feature that allows you to set the volume at which your telephone rings ringing service A Services section that allows you to make additional telephones ring at specified times of the day and on specified days RIP See Routing Information Protocol Ris button Ends a call in the same way that hanging up the receiver does P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 382 Glossary ROM Read Only Memory Memory that stores data permanently ROM contains instructions that the Enterprise Edge Server needs to operate The instructions stored in ROM cannot be changed and are used by the Enterprise Edge Server each time it is turned on or restarted Router A router is a device that forwards traffic between networks based on network layer information and routing tables A router decides which path network traffic follows using routing protocols to gain information about the network
478. wing e telephone number s to which the system will be connected e FCC registration number on label affixed to Enterprise Edge e universal service order code USOC e service order code SOC e facility interface code FIC P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 16 About this document Use of a music source In accordance with U S Copyright Law a license may be required from the American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication system Nortel Networks hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Rights of the telecommunications company If the Enterprise Edge system is causing harm to the telephone network the telecommunications company may discontinue service temporarily If possible the telecommunications company will notify you in advance If advance notice is not practical the user will be notified as soon as possible The user will be given the opportunity to correct the situation and informed of the right to file a complaint to the FCC The telecommunications company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of the system If this happens the telecommunications company will give you advance notice in order for you to make any nece
479. y Maintenance CSU statistics Select a module and then select a card Select Alarm statistics by double clicking The display shows the number of bipolar violations that occurred in the last minute Check short term alarms 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance CSU statistics 2 Select a module and then select a card 3 Select Alarm statistics 4 Select ShortTerm alarms The display shows the short term alarms and the number of milliseconds not necessarily contiguous that were active in the last minute Check Defects 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance CSU statistics P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations G uide 278 Maintenance Select a module and then select a card Select Alarm statistics and then select Defects The display shows the first type of defect and the number of milliseconds not necessarily contiguous the hardware reported it active in the last minute Reset all statistics 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance CSU statistics 2 Select a module and then select a card 3 From the Configuration menu select Clear CSU statistics The system displays a message indicating that this will remove all of the statistics 4 Select OK to erase all the current statistics and begin collecting statistics again Link Status When you purchase PRI from your service provider you can request the number of B channels that are allocated for you to use For example yo
480. y Terminals amp Sets 2 Click the line Line 001 364 from which you want to copy settings ios Ifnecessary choose a subheading to refine your selection 4 On the Edit menu click Copy Nn Click Range from the Copy type list box 6 Type the start and end line numbers of the lines to which you want to copy the settings 7 Click the OK button Trunk Line data Trunk line data lets you program settings for lines that affect how Enterprise Edge communicates with other switches and lets you determine how lines including target lines will be used in the Enterprise Edge system To configure a trunk or line 1 Select a trunk type VoIP Loop E amp M DID Ground For more information about trunk types see Trunk type on page 100 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide P0908508 Issue 02 Configuring Telephony Resources 97 Note You can only change the trunk type setting for lines connected to an EE DTM module All other lines are automatically configured based on the type of hardware module present VoIP is automatically assigned as the trunk type to Lines 001 to 014 and cannot be changed Trunk line data settings vary depending on the type of trunk that has been programmed and the hardware to which the trunk is connected The following table lists the options that are available for each trunk type A checkmark indicates that the option is present E o Analog Loop start Digital
481. y contained in the Enterprise Edge Networking Operations Guide e Hospitality programming this guide is organized This document contains the following sections e Enterprise Edge Overview on page 21 provides an overview of the hardware and software components of the Enterprise Edge system as well as a description of the Unified Manager e Using Enterprise Edge Services on page 33 describes the services that can be used on the Enterprise Edge system e Setting up your Enterprise Edge system on page 53 includes information on how to set up your IP address and web based administration how to configure your system settings and other basic procedures such as logging on and off your Enterprise Edge system e Configuring Telephony Resources on page 77 describes the procedures used to program your Enterprise Edge system e Configuring networking resources on page 63 describes the procedures used to program the networking resources for your Enterprise Edge system e Configuring Enterprise Edge Services on page 185 describes the procedures used to program all the Enterprise Edge services e Configuring Management Settings on page 229 includes procedures used to program the system security including userids passwords and profiles e Maintenance on page 233 includes all the maintenance procedures required to keep your system operational It includes descriptions of how to perform both a P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Prog
482. y of all or selected programming information from the Enterprise Edge system If one of the files stored on your server becomes corrupted you cannot successfully restore the programming information Equip your server with an application that protects files from computer viruses and performs file backup and encryption The Backup and Restore tool stores up to two different copies of system programming e Current copy this version contains the system programming at the time of the last backup The current file is named Fnvram NEW current copy of system programming e Archive copy this version contains the Enterprise Edge system programming at the time of the second last backup It was the current copy until it was replaced by the most recent backup The archive file is named Fnvram OLD archive copy of system programming You cannot change the file names of the programming backup If you need to create alternate versions of the files create additional folders Backups are treated like an assembly line When a successful backup is performed the information stored in the current version is moved to the archive version Refer to the following procedures for more information e Performing a backup on page 238 e Performing a restore on page 238 e Stopping a backup on page 240 e Stopping a restore on page 240 Note The Backup Restore Upgrade utility BRU provides additional functionality that complements the Unified Manager tele
483. y the local VoIP gateway to be used as its IP Address while interacting with other VoIP gateways Since the Enterprise Edge server typically has more than one IP interfaces and more than one IP Address in it users must choose one that VoIP gateway uses This address must match the entry for this gateway in the remote gateway table of those VoIP gateways Ensure this address is reachable to the other gateways via IP 3 From the Ist Preferred Codecs list box select the video class 4 Configure the 2nd through 5th preferred codec selections 5 From the Echo Cancellation list box enable or disable echo cancellation 6 From the Non Linear Processing list box enable or disable non linear processing 7 From the Silence Compression list box enable or disable silence compression 8 From the Fallback to Circuit Switched list box to enable or disable fallback to circuit switched 9 Inthe Voice Jitter Buffer box type the voice jitter buffer and press the Tab key 10 P0908508 Issue 02 In the Fax Jitter Buffer box type the appropriate fax jitter buffer and press the Tab key Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 214 Configuring Enterprise Edge Services 11 In the Local Gateway IP box type the local gateway IP address and press the Tab key 12 Press the Tab key save the settings To modify VoIP Gateway Remote Gateway services 1 On the navigation tree click Remote Gateway Clicking the Remote Gateway nav
484. y tone 301 Dialed number gets no response 301 Problems with Companion sets 302 Appendix A Network Examples 303 Enterprise Edge in a network 303 The big picture 303 Networking Enterprise Edge with Meridian M1 over PRI 304 Benefits 304 Lines 304 PRI lines 305 T1 lines Loop E amp M DID Ground start 305 Target lines 305 Remote system access 306 Remote access on loop start trunks 306 Remote access on a private network 307 Remote access on T1 Direct Inward Dial DID trunks 307 Remote access on PRI trunks 307 Security 308 Class of Service 308 Restriction filters 308 Direct inward system access DISA 310 Coordinated dialing plan 310 Coordinated dialing plan using public lines 310 Destination code numbering in a network 311 Dialing plan using T1 E amp M lines 312 Dialing plans with shared line pools 315 PRI Networking with Meridian 1 316 Additional Configuration 319 Meridian M1 Configuration 319 P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide x Contents Call by Call Services Example 319 Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway and M1 networking 322 Toll bypass with Enterprise Edge VoIP Gateway 325 Other networking examples 330 Public network 331 Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones 331 Call Enterprise Edge and select tie lines to a private network 331 Call Enterprise Edge and select lines to the public network 332 Private network 333 Call one or more Enterprise Edge telephones 333 Call Enterprise Edge and select tie
485. ystem This allows you to isolate any malfunctioning part of the system In addition you can use Module port status to disable and enable modules and devices For more information refer to one of the following procedures e Display the module status on page 254 e Disable a module on page 254 e Enable a module on page 255 e Identify a device connected to the system on page 255 e Disable a device on page 256 e Enable a device on page 257 Display the module status Use this procedure to display module type the number of sets connected to the module the number of busy sets and the module s state 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Module port status The window displays Modules 01 through to 07 For information on module numbering refer to Hardware on page 175 2 Select one of the modules by double clicking The Configuration menu is enabled and the module s status information is displayed Disable a module You must disable a module before you replace it In addition you may be able to clear a hung line by disabling and enabling the affected module Use Page feature on your system prior to disabling Use the Page feature to inform people that you are about to disable a module Indicate that they may experience delays in the performance of their devices 1 Choose Resources Telephony Maintenance Module port status 2 Select the module you wish to disable The State box indicates that
486. ystem disable Registration when you have finished registering the portables Changing the Registration password To ensure unauthorized portables are not registered to your system a separate level of password access is provided You can and should set your own password to prevent unauthorized handsets from registering on your system You can change the Registration password under the Passwords heading in programming Change password to avoid incorrect registration To ensure accurate registration change the Registration password before registering any portables If there is another wireless system in radio range and both systems have the same Registration password and registration enabled you may accidentally register on the other system instead of on your own The default Registration password is 6 RADIO To program a new registration password 1 Select Telephony Passwords 2 Click Registration 3 Enter a new password Tip You can choose any combination of one to six digits It is easier to remember the password if the digits spell a word Provide this password only to selected personnel to prevent unauthorized access to programming The implications of such access may include the rearrangement of line assignments which could affect the operation of Enterprise Edge Portable DNs Once registration is enabled for your Enterprise Edge system a series of extension numbers 469 to 500 au
487. ystem 301 Line pool access code gets ringback Possible problem The published line pool access code is invalid and the system has routed the call to the prime telephone for the incoming trunk Solution 1 Make sure that the published line pool access codes are correct 2 Check that the line pool codes have been entered correctly under Access codes in System programming Line pool access code gets busy tone Possible problem There are not enough lines in the line pool to serve the number of users Solution If the line pool contains loop start trunks enter programming and move under used loop start trunks from other line pools into the deficient line pool OR Create a separate line pool for remote users only Dialed number gets no response Possible problem The remote caller after accessing a line in a line pool may have started dialing before the far end was ready to receive digits Solution Instruct remote callers to wait until they hear feedback before entering any digits Possible problem There may be a malfunction in the line that the remote caller accessed Solution If the problem is persistent check that all lines in the affected line pool are functioning normally Possible problem There may be a malfunction in the system that the caller is trying to reach P0908508 Issue 02 Enterprise Edge Programming O perations Guide 302 Troubleshooting your Enterprise Edge system Solution Inform

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

通信取扱説明書 WCL-13A(C5) 1. システム構成例    EL2600 MONTAGE et ENTRETIEN  取扱説明書( 1.5 MB)  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file